ProfitView Strategy TemplateHello traders,
This script took me a full week of coding/testing, sweat, and tears - and I’m too nice as I’m giving it for free to the community.
If you're tired of manual trading and looking for a solid strategy template to pair with your indicators, look no further.
This Pine Script v5 strategy template is engineered for maximum customization and risk management.
Best part?
This Pine Script v5 template facilitates the dynamic construction of ProfitView alerts, sparing users the time and effort of mastering the ProfitView syntax and manually creating alert commands.
This powerful tool gives much power to those who don't know how to code in Pinescript and want to automate their indicators' signals via the ProfitView Chrome extension.
IMPORTANT NOTES
ProfitView is a trading bot software that forwards TradingView alerts to your brokers (examples: Binance, Oanda, Coinbase, Bybit, etc.) for automating trading.
Many traders don't know how to dynamically create ProfitView-compatible alerts using the data from their TradingView scripts.
Traders using trading bots want their alerts to reflect the stop-loss/take-profit/trailing-stop/stop-loss to break options from your script and then create the orders accordingly.
This script showcases how to create ProfitView alerts dynamically.
TRADINGVIEW ALERTS
1) You'll have to create one alert per asset X timeframe = 1 chart.
Example: 1 alert for EUR/USD on the 5 minutes chart, 1 alert for EUR/USD on the 15-minute chart (assuming you want your bot to trade the EUR/USD on the 5 and 15-minute timeframes)
2) Select the Order fills and alert() function calls condition
3) For each alert, the alert message is pre-configured with the text below
{{strategy.order.alert_message}}
Please leave it as it is.
It's a TradingView native variable that will fetch the alert text messages built by the script.
4) ProfitView doesn't use webhook technology, so setting a webhook URL from the alerts notifications tab is unnecessary.
KEY FEATURES
I) Modular Indicator Connection
* plug your existing indicator into the template.
* Only two lines of code are needed for full compatibility.
Step 1: Create your connector
Adapt your indicator with only 2 lines of code and then connect it to this strategy template.
To do so:
1) Find in your indicator where the conditions print the long/buy and short/sell signals.
2) Create an additional plot as below
I'm giving an example with a Two moving averages cross.
Please replicate the same methodology for your indicator, whether a MACD , ZigZag, Pivots , higher-highs, lower-lows or whatever indicator with clear buy and sell conditions.
//@version=5
indicator("Supertrend", overlay = true, timeframe = "", timeframe_gaps = true)
atrPeriod = input.int(10, "ATR Length", minval = 1)
factor = input.float(3.0, "Factor", minval = 0.01, step = 0.01)
= ta.supertrend(factor, atrPeriod)
supertrend := barstate.isfirst ? na : supertrend
bodyMiddle = plot(barstate.isfirst ? na : (open + close) / 2, display = display.none)
upTrend = plot(direction < 0 ? supertrend : na, "Up Trend", color = color.green, style = plot.style_linebr)
downTrend = plot(direction < 0 ? na : supertrend, "Down Trend", color = color.red, style = plot.style_linebr)
fill(bodyMiddle, upTrend, color.new(color.green, 90), fillgaps = false)
fill(bodyMiddle, downTrend, color.new(color.red, 90), fillgaps = false)
buy = ta.crossunder(direction, 0)
sell = ta.crossunder(direction, 0)
//////// CONNECTOR SECTION ////////
Signal = buy ? 1 : sell ? -1 : 0
plot(Signal, title = "Signal", display = display.data_window)
//////// CONNECTOR SECTION ////////
Important Notes
🔥 The Strategy Template expects the value to be exactly 1 for the bullish signal and -1 for the bearish signal
Now, you can connect your indicator to the Strategy Template using the method below or that one.
Step 2: Connect the connector
1) Add your updated indicator to a TradingView chart
2) Add the Strategy Template as well to the SAME chart
3) Open the Strategy Template settings, and in the Data Source field, select your 🔌Connector🔌 (which comes from your indicator)
Note it doesn’t have to be named 🔌Connector🔌 - you can name it as you want - however, I recommend an explicit name you can easily remember.
From then, you should start seeing the signals and plenty of other stuff on your chart.
🔥 Note that whenever you update your indicator values, the strategy statistics and visuals on your chart will update in real-time
II) BOT Risk Management:
- Max Drawdown:
Mode: Select whether the max drawdown is calculated in percentage (%) or USD.
Value: If the max drawdown reaches this specified value, set a value to halt the bot.
- Max Consecutive Days:
Use Max Consecutive Days BOT Halt: Enable/Disable halting the bot if the max consecutive losing days value is reached.
- Max Consecutive Days: Set the maximum number of consecutive losing days allowed before halting the bot.
- Max Losing Streak:
Use Max Losing Streak: Enable/Disable a feature to prevent the bot from taking too many losses in a row.
- Max Losing Streak Length: Set the maximum length of a losing streak allowed.
Margin Call:
- Use Margin Call: Enable/Disable a feature to exit when a specified percentage away from a margin call to prevent it.
Margin Call (%): Set the percentage value to trigger this feature.
- Close BOT Total Loss:
Use Close BOT Total Loss: Enable/Disable a feature to close all trades and halt the bot if the total loss is reached.
- Total Loss ($): Set the total loss value in USD to trigger this feature.
Intraday BOT Risk Management:
- Intraday Losses:
Use Intraday Losses BOT Halt: Enable/Disable halting the bot on reaching specified intraday losses.
Mode: Select whether the intraday loss is calculated in percentage (%) or USD.
- Max Intraday Losses (%): Set the value for maximum intraday losses.
Limit Intraday Trades:
- Use Limit Intraday Trades: Enable/Disable a feature to limit the number of intraday trades.
- Max Intraday Trades: Set the maximum number of intraday trades allowed.
Restart Intraday EA:
- Use Restart Intraday EA: Enable/Disable a feature to restart the bot at the first bar of the next day if it has been stopped with an intraday risk management safeguard.
III) Order Types and Position Sizing
- Choose between market, limit, or stop orders.
- Set your position size directly in the template.
Please use the position size from the “Inputs” and not the “Properties” tab.
I know it's redundant. - the template needs this value from the "Inputs" tab to build the alerts, and the Backtester needs it from the "Properties" tab.
IV) Advanced Take-Profit and Stop-Loss Options
- Choose to set your SL/TP in either pips or percentages.
- Option for multiple take-profit levels and trailing stop losses.
- Move your stop loss to break even +/- offset in pips for “risk-free” trades.
V) Miscellaneous
Retry order openings if they fail.
Order Types:
Select and specify order type and price settings.
Position Size:
Define the type and size of positions.
Leverage:
Leverage settings, including margin type and hedge mode.
Session:
Limit trades to specific sessions.
Dates:
Limit trades to a specific date range.
Trades Direction:
Direction: Specify the market direction for opening positions.
VI) Notifications (Telegram/Discord/Email/IFTTT/Twilio/SMS)
Customize notifications sent to Telegram, Discord, Email, IFTTT, Twilio, and ProfitView Logger.
VII) Logger
The ProfitView commands are logged in the TradingView logger.
You'll find more information about it in this TradingView blog post .
WHY YOU MIGHT NEED THIS TEMPLATE
1) Transform your indicator into a ProfitView trading bot more easily than before
Connect your indicator to the template
Create your alerts
Set your EA settings
2) Save Time
Auto-generated alert messages for ProfitView.
I tested them all and checked with the support team what could/couldn’t be done.
3) Be in Control
Manage your trading risks with advanced features.
4) Customizable
Fits various trading styles and asset classes.
REQUIREMENTS
* Make sure you have your ProfitView account and do the settings correctly in your Chrome extension. If you don't know how to do it, read the documentation + ask for help in the ProfitView Discord support channel.
* If there is any issue with the template, ask me in the comments section - I’ll answer quickly.
BACKTEST RESULTS FROM THIS POST
1) I connected this strategy template to a dummy Supertrend script.
I could have selected any other indicator or concept for this script post.
I wanted to share an example of how you can quickly upgrade your strategy, making it compatible with ProfitView.
2) The backtest results aren't relevant for this educational script publication.
I used realistic backtesting data but didn't look too much into optimizing the results, as this isn't the point of why I'm publishing this script.
This strategy is a template to be connected to any indicator - the sky is the limit. :)
3) This template is made to take 1 trade per direction at any given time.
Pyramiding is set to 1 on TradingView.
The strategy default settings are:
* Initial Capital: 100000 USD
* Position Size: 1%
* Commission Percent: 0.075%
* Slippage: 1 tick
* No margin/leverage used
Best regards,
Dave
Cerca negli script per "stop loss"
Quantum Reversal Engine [ApexLegion]Quantum Reversal Engine
STRATEGY OVERVIEW
This strategy is constructed using 5 custom analytical filters that analyze different market dimensions - trend structure, momentum expansion, volume confirmation, price action patterns, and reversal detection - with results processed through a multi-component scoring calculation that determines signal generation and position management decisions.
Why These Custom Filters Were Independently Developed:
This strategy employs five custom-developed analytical filters:
1. Apex Momentum Core (AMC) - Custom oscillator with volatility-scaled deviation calculation
Standard oscillators lag momentum shifts by 2-3 bars. Custom calculation designed for momentum analysis
2. Apex Wick Trap (AWT) - Wick dominance analysis for trap detection
Existing wick analysis tools don't quantify trap conditions. Uses specific ratios for wick dominance detection
3. Apex Volume Pulse (AVP) - Volume surge validation with participation confirmation
Volume indicators typically use simple averages. Uses surge multipliers with participation validation
4. Apex TrendGuard (ATG) - Angle-based trend detection with volatility band integration
EMA slope calculations often produce false signals. Uses angle analysis with volatility bands for confirmation
5. Quantum Composite Filter (QCF) - Multi-component scoring and signal generation system
Composite scoring designed to filter noise by requiring multiple confirmations before signal activation.
Each filter represents mathematical calculations designed to address specific analytical requirements.
Framework Operation: The strategy functions as a scoring framework where each filter contributes weighted points based on market conditions. Entry signals are generated when minimum threshold scores are met. Exit management operates through a three-tier system with continued signal strength evaluation determining position holds versus closures at each TP level.
Integration Challenge: The core difficulty was creating a scoring system where five independent filters could work together without generating conflicting signals. This required backtesting to determine effective weight distributions.
Custom Filter Development:
Each of the five filters represents analytical approaches developed through testing and validation:
Integration Validation: Each filter underwent individual testing before integration. The composite scoring system required validation to verify that filters complement rather than conflict with each other, resulting in a cohesive analytical framework that was tested during the development period.
These filters represent custom-developed components created specifically for this strategy, with each component addressing different analytical requirements through testing and parameter adjustment.
Programming Features:
Multi-timeframe data handling with backup systems
Performance optimization techniques
Error handling for live trading scenarios
Parameter adaptation based on market conditions
Strategy Features:
Uses multi-filter confirmation approach
Adapts position holding based on continued signal strength
Includes analysis tools for trade review and optimization
Ongoing Development: The strategy was developed through testing and validation processes during the creation period.
COMPONENT EXPLANATION
EMA System
Uses 8 exponential moving averages (7, 14, 21, 30, 50, 90, 120, 200 periods) for trend identification. Primary signals come from 8/21 EMA crossovers, while longer EMAs provide structural context. EMA 1-4 determine short-term structure, EMA 5-8 provide long-term trend confirmation.
Apex Momentum Core (AMC)
Built custom oscillator mathematics after testing dozens of momentum calculation methods. Final algorithm uses price deviation from EMA baseline with volatility scaling to reduce lag while maintaining accuracy across different market conditions.
Custom momentum oscillator using price deviation from EMA baseline:
apxCI = 100 * (source - emaBase) / (sensitivity * sqrt(deviation + 1))
fastLine = EMA(apxCI, smoothing)
signalLine = SMA(fastLine, 4)
Signals generate when fastLine crosses signalLine at +50/-50 thresholds.
This identifies momentum expansion before traditional oscillators.
Apex Volume Pulse (AVP)
Created volume surge analysis that goes beyond simple averages. Extensive testing determined 1.3x multiplier with participation validation provides reliable confirmation while filtering false volume spikes.
Compares current volume to 21-period moving average.
Requires 1.3x average volume for signal confirmation. This filters out low-volume moves during quiet periods and confirms breakouts with actual participation.
Apex Wick Trap (AWT)
Developed proprietary wick trap detection through analysis of failed breakout patterns. Tested various ratio combinations before settling on 60% wick dominance + 20% body limit as effective trap identification parameters.
Analyzes candle structure to identify failed breakouts:
candleRange = math.max(high - low, 0.00001)
candleBody = math.abs(close - open)
bodyRatio = candleBody / candleRange
upperWick = high - math.max(open, close)
lowerWick = math.min(open, close) - low
upperWickRatio = upperWick / candleRange
lowerWickRatio = lowerWick / candleRange
trapWickLong = showAWT and lowerWickRatio > minWickDom and bodyRatio < bodyToRangeLimit and close > open
trapWickShort = showAWT and upperWickRatio > minWickDom and bodyRatio < bodyToRangeLimit and close < open This catches reversals after fake breakouts.
Apex TrendGuard (ATG)
Built angle-based trend detection after standard EMA crossovers proved insufficient. Combined slope analysis with volatility bands through iterative testing to eliminate false trend signals.
EMA slope analysis with volatility bands:
Fast EMA (21) vs Slow EMA (55) for trend direction
Angle calculation: atan(fast - slow) * 180 / π
ATR bands (1.75x multiplier) for breakout confirmation
Minimum 25° angle for strong trend classification
Core Algorithm Framework
1. Composite Signal Generation
calculateCompositeSignals() =>
// Component Conditions
structSignalLong = trapWickLong
structSignalShort = trapWickShort
momentumLong = amcBuySignal
momentumShort = amcSellSignal
volumeSpike = volume > volAvg_AVP * volMult_AVP
priceStrength_Long = close > open and close > close
priceStrength_Short = close < open and close < close
rsiMfiComboValue = (ta.rsi(close, 14) + ta.mfi(close, 14)) / 2
reversalTrigger_Long = ta.crossover(rsiMfiComboValue, 50)
reversalTrigger_Short = ta.crossunder(rsiMfiComboValue, 50)
isEMACrossUp = ta.crossover(emaFast_ATG, emaSlow_ATG)
isEMACrossDown = ta.crossunder(emaFast_ATG, emaSlow_ATG)
// Enhanced Composite Score Calculation
scoreBuy = 0.0
scoreBuy += structSignalLong ? scoreStruct : 0.0
scoreBuy += momentumLong ? scoreMomentum : 0.0
scoreBuy += flashSignal ? weightFlash : 0.0
scoreBuy += blinkSignal ? weightBlink : 0.0
scoreBuy += volumeSpike_AVP ? scoreVolume : 0.0
scoreBuy += priceStrength_Long ? scorePriceAction : 0.0
scoreBuy += reversalTrigger_Long ? scoreReversal : 0.0
scoreBuy += emaAlignment_Bull ? weightTrendAlign : 0.0
scoreBuy += strongUpTrend ? weightTrendAlign : 0.0
scoreBuy += highRisk_Long ? -1.2 : 0.0
scoreBuy += signalGreenDot ? 1.0 : 0.0
scoreBuy += isAMCUp ? 0.8 : 0.0
scoreBuy += isVssBuy ? 1.5 : 0.0
scoreBuy += isEMACrossUp ? 1.0 : 0.0
scoreBuy += signalRedX ? -1.0 : 0.0
scoreSell = 0.0
scoreSell += structSignalShort ? scoreStruct : 0.0
scoreSell += momentumShort ? scoreMomentum : 0.0
scoreSell += flashSignal ? weightFlash : 0.0
scoreSell += blinkSignal ? weightBlink : 0.0
scoreSell += volumeSpike_AVP ? scoreVolume : 0.0
scoreSell += priceStrength_Short ? scorePriceAction : 0.0
scoreSell += reversalTrigger_Short ? scoreReversal : 0.0
scoreSell += emaAlignment_Bear ? weightTrendAlign : 0.0
scoreSell += strongDownTrend ? weightTrendAlign : 0.0
scoreSell += highRisk_Short ? -1.2 : 0.0
scoreSell += signalRedX ? 1.0 : 0.0
scoreSell += isAMCDown ? 0.8 : 0.0
scoreSell += isVssSell ? 1.5 : 0.0
scoreSell += isEMACrossDown ? 1.0 : 0.0
scoreSell += signalGreenDot ? -1.0 : 0.0
compositeBuySignal = enableComposite and scoreBuy >= thresholdCompositeBuy
compositeSellSignal = enableComposite and scoreSell >= thresholdCompositeSell
if compositeBuySignal and compositeSellSignal
compositeBuySignal := false
compositeSellSignal := false
= calculateCompositeSignals()
// Final Entry Signals
entryCompositeBuySignal = compositeBuySignal and ta.rising(emaFast_ATG, 2)
entryCompositeSellSignal = compositeSellSignal and ta.falling(emaFast_ATG, 2)
Calculates weighted scores from independent modules and activates signals only when threshold requirements are met.
2. Smart Exit Hold Evaluation System
evaluateSmartHold() =>
compositeBuyRecentCount = 0
compositeSellRecentCount = 0
for i = 0 to signalLookbackBars - 1
compositeBuyRecentCount += compositeBuySignal ? 1 : 0
compositeSellRecentCount += compositeSellSignal ? 1 : 0
avgVolume = ta.sma(volume, 20)
volumeSpike = volume > avgVolume * volMultiplier
// MTF Bull/Bear conditions
mtf_bull = mtf_emaFast_final > mtf_emaSlow_final
mtf_bear = mtf_emaFast_final < mtf_emaSlow_final
emaBackupDivergence = math.abs(mtf_emaFast_backup - mtf_emaSlow_backup) / mtf_emaSlow_backup
emaBackupStrong = emaBackupDivergence > 0.008
mtfConflict_Long = inLong and mtf_bear and emaBackupStrong
mtfConflict_Short = inShort and mtf_bull and emaBackupStrong
// Layer 1: ATR-Based Dynamic Threshold (Market Volatility Intelligence)
atr_raw = ta.atr(atrLen)
atrValue = na(atr_raw) ? close * 0.02 : atr_raw
atrRatio = atrValue / close
dynamicThreshold = atrRatio > 0.02 ? 1.0 : (atrRatio > 0.01 ? 1.5 : 2.8)
// Layer 2: ROI-Conditional Time Intelligence (Selective Pressure)
timeMultiplier_Long = realROI >= 0 ? 1.0 : // Profitable positions: No time pressure
holdTimer_Long <= signalLookbackBars ? 1.0 : // Loss positions 1-8 bars: Base
holdTimer_Long <= signalLookbackBars * 2 ? 1.1 : // Loss positions 9-16 bars: +10% stricter
1.3 // Loss positions 17+ bars: +30% stricter
timeMultiplier_Short = realROI >= 0 ? 1.0 : // Profitable positions: No time pressure
holdTimer_Short <= signalLookbackBars ? 1.0 : // Loss positions 1-8 bars: Base
holdTimer_Short <= signalLookbackBars * 2 ? 1.1 : // Loss positions 9-16 bars: +10% stricter
1.3 // Loss positions 17+ bars: +30% stricter
// Dual-Layer Threshold Calculation
baseThreshold_Long = mtfConflict_Long ? dynamicThreshold + 1.0 : dynamicThreshold
baseThreshold_Short = mtfConflict_Short ? dynamicThreshold + 1.0 : dynamicThreshold
timeAdjustedThreshold_Long = baseThreshold_Long * timeMultiplier_Long
timeAdjustedThreshold_Short = baseThreshold_Short * timeMultiplier_Short
// Final Smart Hold Decision with Dual-Layer Intelligence
smartHold_Long = not mtfConflict_Long and smartScoreLong >= timeAdjustedThreshold_Long and compositeBuyRecentCount >= signalMinCount
smartHold_Short = not mtfConflict_Short and smartScoreShort >= timeAdjustedThreshold_Short and compositeSellRecentCount >= signalMinCount
= evaluateSmartHold()
Evaluates whether to hold positions past TP1/TP2/TP3 levels based on continued signal strength, volume confirmation, and multi-timeframe trend alignment
HOW TO USE THE STRATEGY
Step 1: Initial Setup
Apply strategy to your preferred timeframe (backtested on 15M)
Enable "Use Heikin-Ashi Base" for smoother signals in volatile markets
"Show EMA Lines" and "Show Ichimoku Cloud" are enabled for visual context
Set default quantities to match your risk management (5% equity default)
Step 2: Signal Recognition
Visual Signal Guide:
Visual Signal Guide - Complete Reference:
🔶 Red Diamond: Bearish momentum breakdown - short reversal signal
🔷 Blue Diamond: Strong bullish momentum - long reversal signal
🔵 Blue Dot: Volume-confirmed directional move - trend continuation
🟢 Green Dot: Bullish EMA crossover - trend reversal confirmation
🟠 Orange X: Oversold reversal setup - counter-trend opportunity
❌ Red X: Bearish EMA breakdown - trend reversal warning
✡ Star Uprising: Strong bullish convergence
💥 Ultra Entry: Ultra-rapid downward momentum acceleration
▲ VSS Long: Velocity-based bullish momentum confirmation
▼ VSS Short: Velocity-based bearish momentum confirmation
Step 3: Entry Execution
For Long Positions:
1. ✅ EMA1 crossed above EMA2 exactly 3 bars ago [ta.crossover(ema1,ema2) ]
2. ✅ Current EMA structure: EMA1 > EMA2 (maintained)
3. ✅ Composite score ≥ 5.0 points (6.5+ for 5-minute timeframes)
4. ✅ Cooldown period completed (no recent stop losses)
5. ✅ Volume spike confirmation (green dot/blue dot signals)
6. ✅ Bullish candle closes above EMA structure
For Short Positions:
1. ✅ EMA1 crossed below EMA2 exactly 3 bars ago [ta.crossunder(ema1,ema2) ]
2. ✅ Current EMA structure: EMA1 < EMA2 (maintained)
3. ✅ Composite score ≥ 5.4 points (7.0+ for 5-minute timeframes)
4. ✅ Cooldown period completed (no recent stop losses)
5. ✅ Momentum breakdown (red diamond/red X signals)
6. ✅ Bearish candle closes below EMA structure
🎯 Critical Timing Note: The strategy requires EMA crossover to have occurred 3 bars prior to entry, not at the current bar. This attempts to avoid premature entries and may improve signal reliability.
Step 4: Reading Market Context
EMA Ribbon Interpretation:
All EMAs ascending = Strong uptrend context
EMAs 1-3 above EMAs 4-8 = Bullish structure
Tight EMA spacing = Low volatility/consolidation
Wide EMA spacing = High volatility/trending
Ichimoku Cloud Context:
Price above cloud = Bullish environment
Price below cloud = Bearish environment
Cloud color intensity = Momentum strength
Thick cloud = Strong support/resistance
THE SMART EXIT GRID SYSTEM
Smart Exit Grid Approach:
The Smart Exit Grid uses dynamic hold evaluation that continuously analyzes market conditions after position entry. This differs from traditional fixed profit targets by adapting exit timing based on real-time signal strength.
How Smart Exit Grid System Works
The system operates through three evaluation phases:
Smart Score Calculation:
The smart score calculation aggregates 22 signal components in real-time, combining reversal warnings, continuation signals, trend alignment indicators, EMA structural analysis, and risk penalties into a numerical representation of market conditions. MTF analysis provides additional confirmation as a separate validation layer.
Signal Stack Management:
The per-tick signal accumulation system monitors 22 active signal types with MTF providing trend validation and conflict detection as a separate confirmation layer.
Take Profit Progression:
Smart Exit Activation:
The QRE system activates Smart Exit Grid immediately upon position entry. When strategy.entry() executes, the system initializes monitoring systems designed to track position progress.
Upon position opening, holdTimer begins counting, establishing the foundation for subsequent decisions. The Smart Exit Grid starts accumulating signals from entry, with all 22 signal components beginning real-time tracking when the trade opens.
The system operates on continuous evaluation where smartScoreLong and smartScoreShort calculate from the first tick after entry. QRE's approach is designed to capture market structure changes, trend deteriorations, or signal pattern shifts that can trigger protective exits even before the first take profit level is reached.
This activation creates a proactive position management framework. The 8-candle sliding window starts from entry, meaning that if market conditions change rapidly after entry - due to news events, liquidity shifts, or technical changes - the system can respond within the configured lookback period.
TP Markers as Reference Points:
The TP1, TP2, and TP3 levels function as reference points rather than mandatory exit triggers. When longTP1Hit or shortTP1Hit conditions activate, they serve as profit confirmation markers that inform the Smart Exit algorithm about achieved reward levels, but don't automatically initiate position closure.
These TP markers enhance the Smart Exit decision matrix by providing profit context to ongoing signal evaluation. The system recognizes when positions have achieved target returns, but the actual exit decision remains governed by continuous smart score evaluation and signal stack analysis.
TP2 Reached: Enhanced Monitoring
TP2 represents significant profit capture with additional monitoring features:
This approach is designed to help avoid premature profit-taking during trending conditions. If TP2 is reached but smartScoreLong remains above the dynamic threshold and the 8-candle sliding window shows persistent signals, the position continues holding. If market structure deteriorates before reaching TP2, the Smart Exit can trigger closure based on signal analysis.
The visual TP circles that appear when levels are reached serve as performance tracking tools, allowing users to see how frequently entries achieve various profit levels while understanding that actual exit timing depends on market structure analysis.
Risk Management Systems:
Operating independently from the Smart Exit Grid are two risk management systems: the Trap Wick Detection Protocol and the Stop Loss Mechanism. These systems maintain override authority over other exit logic.
The Trap Wick System monitors for conditionBearTrapExit during long positions and conditionBullTrapExit during short positions. When detected, these conditions trigger position closure with state reset, bypassing Smart Exit evaluations. This system recognizes that certain candlestick patterns may indicate reversal risk.
Volatility Exit Monitoring: The strategy monitors for isStrongBearCandle combined with conditionBearTrapExit, recognizing when market structure may be shifting.
Volume Validation: Before exiting on volatility, the strategy requires volume confirmation: volume > ta.sma(volume, 20) * 1.8. This is designed to filter exits on weak, low-volume movements.
The Stop Loss Mechanism operates through multiple triggers including traditional price-based stops (longSLHit, shortSLHit) and early exit conditions based on smart score deterioration combined with negative ROI. The early exit logic activates when smartScoreLong < 1.0 or smartScoreShort < 1.0 while realROI < -0.9%.
These risk management systems are designed so that risk scenarios can trigger protective closure with state reset across all 22 signal counters, TP tracking variables, and smart exit states.
This architecture - Smart Exit activation, TP markers as navigation tools, and independent risk management - creates a position management system that adapts to market conditions while maintaining risk discipline through dedicated protection protocols.
TP3 Reached: Enhanced Protection
Once TP3 is hit, the strategy shifts into enhanced monitoring:
EMA Structure Monitoring: isEMAStructureDown becomes a primary exit trigger
MTF Alignment: The higher timeframe receives increased consideration
Wick Trap Priority: conditionBearTrapExit becomes an immediate exit signal
Approach Differences:
Traditional Fixed Exits:
Exit at predetermined levels regardless of market conditions
May exit during trend continuation
May exit before trend completion
Limited adaptation to changing volatility
Smart Exit Grid Approach:
Adaptive timing based on signal conditions
Exits when supporting signals weaken
Multi-timeframe validation for trend confirmation
Volume confirmation requirements for holds
Structural monitoring for trend analysis
Dynamic ATR-Based Smart Score Threshold System
Market Volatility Adaptive Scoring
// Real-time ATR Analysis
atr_raw = ta.atr(atrLen)
atrValue = na(atr_raw) ? close * 0.02 : atr_raw
atrRatio = atrValue / close
// Three-Tier Dynamic Threshold Matrix
dynamicThreshold = atrRatio > 0.02 ? 1.0 : // High volatility: Lower threshold
(atrRatio > 0.01 ? 1.5 : // Medium volatility: Standard
2.8) // Low volatility: Higher threshold
The market volatility adaptive scoring calculates real-time ATR with a 2% fallback for new markets. The atrRatio represents the relationship between current volatility and price, creating a foundation for threshold adjustment.
The three-tier dynamic threshold matrix responds to market conditions by adjusting requirements based on volatility levels: lowering thresholds during high volatility periods above 2% ATR ratio to 1.0 points, maintaining standard requirements at 1.5 points for medium volatility between 1-2%, and raising standards to 2.8 points during low volatility periods below 1%.
Profit-Loss Adaptive Management:
The system applies different evaluation criteria based on position performance:
Winning Positions (realROI ≥ 0%):
→ timeMultiplier = 1.0 (No additional pressure)
→ Maintains base threshold requirements
→ Allows natural progression to TP2/TP3 levels
Losing Positions (realROI < 0%):
→ Progressive time pressure activated
→ Increasingly strict requirements over time
→ Faster decision-making on underperforming trades
ROI-Adaptive Smart Hold Decision Process:
The strategy uses a profit-loss adaptive system:
Winning Position Management (ROI ≥ 0%):
✅ Standard threshold requirements maintained
✅ No additional time-based pressure applied
✅ Allows positions to progress toward TP2/TP3 levels
✅ timeMultiplier remains at 1.0 regardless of hold duration
Losing Position Management (ROI < 0%):
⚠️ Time-based threshold adjustments activated
⚠️ Progressive increase in required signal strength over time
⚠️ Earlier exit evaluation on underperforming positions
⚠️ timeMultiplier increases from 1.0 → 1.1 → 1.3 based on hold duration
Real-Time Monitoring:
Monitor Analysis Table → "Smart" filter → "Score" vs "Dynamic Threshold"
Winning positions: Evaluation based on signal strength deterioration only
Losing positions: Evaluation considers both signal strength and progressive time adjustments
Breakeven positions (0% ROI): Treated as winning positions - no time adjustments
This approach differentiates between winning and losing positions in the hold evaluation process, requiring higher signal thresholds for extended holding of losing positions while maintaining standard requirements for winning ones.
ROI-Conditional Decision Matrix Examples:
Scenario 1 - Winning Position in Any Market:
Position ROI: +0.8% → timeMultiplier = 1.0 (regardless of hold time)
ATR Medium (1.2%) → dynamicThreshold = 1.5
Final Threshold = 1.5 × 1.0 = 1.5 points ✅ Position continues
Scenario 2 - Losing Position, Extended Hold:
Position ROI: -0.5% → Time pressure activated
Hold Time: 20 bars → timeMultiplier = 1.3
ATR Low (0.8%) → dynamicThreshold = 2.8
Final Threshold = 2.8 × 1.3 = 3.64 points ⚡ Enhanced requirements
Scenario 3 - Fresh Losing Position:
Position ROI: -0.3% → Time pressure activated
Hold Time: 5 bars → timeMultiplier = 1.0 (still early)
ATR High (2.1%) → dynamicThreshold = 1.0
Final Threshold = 1.0 × 1.0 = 1.0 points 📊 Recovery opportunity
Scenario 4 - Breakeven Position:
Position ROI: 0.0% → timeMultiplier = 1.0 (no pressure)
Hold Time: 15 bars → No time penalty applied
Final Threshold = dynamicThreshold only ⚖️ Neutral treatment
🔄8-Candle Sliding Window Signal Rotation System
Composite Signal Counting Mechanism
// Dynamic Lookback Window (configurable: default 8)
signalLookbackBars = input.int(8, "Composite Lookback Bars", minval=1, maxval=50)
// Rolling Signal Analysis
compositeBuyRecentCount = 0
compositeSellRecentCount = 0
for i = 0 to signalLookbackBars - 1
compositeBuyRecentCount += compositeBuySignal ? 1 : 0
compositeSellRecentCount += compositeSellSignal ? 1 : 0
Candle Flow Example (8-bar window):
→
✓ ✓ ✗ ✓ ✗ ✓ ✗ ✓ 🗑️
New Signal Count = 5/8 signals in window
Threshold Check: 5 ≥ signalMinCount (2) = HOLD CONFIRMED
Signal Decay & Refresh Mechanism
// Signal Persistence Tracking
if compositeBuyRecentCount >= signalMinCount
smartHold_Long = true
else
smartHold_Long = false
The composite signal counting operates through a configurable sliding window. The system maintains rolling counters that scan backward through the specified number of candles.
During each evaluation cycle, the algorithm iterates through historical bars, incrementing counters when composite signals are detected. This creates a dynamic signal persistence measurement where recent signal density determines holding decisions.
The sliding window rotation functions like a moving conveyor belt where new signals enter while the oldest signals drop off. For example, in an 8-bar window, if 5 out of 8 recent candles showed composite buy signals, and the minimum required count is 2, the system confirms the hold condition. As new bars form, the window slides forward, potentially changing the signal count and triggering exit conditions when signal density falls below the threshold.
Signal decay and refresh occur continuously where smartHold_Long remains true only when compositeBuyRecentCount exceeds signalMinCount. When recent signal density drops below the minimum requirement, the system switches to exit mode.
Advanced Signal Stack Management - 22-Signal Real-Time Evaluation
// Long Position Signal Stacking (calc_on_every_tick=true)
if inLong
// Primary Reversal Signals
if signalRedDiamond: signalCountRedDiamond += 1 // -0.5 points
if signalStarUprising: signalCountStarUprising += 1 // +1.5 points
if entryUltraShort: signalCountUltra += 1 // -1.0 points
// Trend Confirmation Signals
if strongUpTrend: trendUpCount_Long += 1 // +1.5 points
if emaAlignment_Bull: bullAlignCount_Long += 1 // +1.0 points
// Risk Assessment Signals
if highRisk_Long: riskCount_Long += 1 // -1.5 points
if topZone: tzoneCount_Long += 1 // -0.5 points
The per-tick signal accumulation system operates with calc_on_every_tick=true for real-time responsiveness. During long positions, the system monitors primary reversal signals where Red Diamond signals subtract 0.5 points as reversal warnings, Star Uprising adds 1.5 points for continuation signals, and Ultra Short signals deduct 1.0 points as counter-trend warnings.
Trend confirmation signals provide weighted scoring where strongUpTrend adds 1.5 points for aligned momentum, emaAlignment_Bull contributes 1.0 point for structural support, and various EMA-based confirmations contribute to the overall score. Risk assessment signals apply negative weighting where highRisk_Long situations subtract 1.5 points, topZone conditions deduct 0.5 points, and other risk factors create defensive scoring adjustments.
The smart score calculation aggregates all 22 components in real-time, combining reversal warnings, continuation signals, trend alignment indicators, EMA structural analysis, and risk penalties into a numerical representation of market conditions. This score updates continuously, providing the foundation for hold-or-exit decisions.
MULTI-TIMEFRAME (MTF) SYSTEM
MTF Data Collection
The strategy requests higher timeframe data (default 30-minute) for trend confirmation:
= request.security(syminfo.tickerid, mtfTimeframe, , lookahead=barmerge.lookahead_off, gaps=barmerge.gaps_off)
MTF Watchtower System - Implementation Logic
The system employs a timeframe discrimination protocol where currentTFInMinutes is compared against a 30-minute threshold. This creates different operational behavior between timeframes:
📊 Timeframe Testing Results:
30M+ charts: Full MTF confirmation → Tested with full features
15M charts: Local EMA + adjusted parameters → Standard testing baseline
5M charts: Local EMA only → Requires parameter adjustment
1M charts: High noise → Limited testing conducted
When the chart timeframe is 30 minutes or above, the strategy activates useMTF = true and requests external MTF data through request.security(). For timeframes below 30 minutes, including your 5-minute setup, the system deliberately uses local EMA calculations to avoid MTF lag and data inconsistencies.
The triple-layer data sourcing architecture works as follows: timeframes from 1 minute to 29 minutes rely on chart-based EMA calculations for immediate responsiveness. Timeframes of 30 minutes and above utilize MTF data through the security function, with a backup system that doubles the EMA length (emaLen * 2) if MTF data fails. When MTF data is unavailable or invalid, the system falls back to local EMA as the final safety net.
Data validation occurs through a pipeline where mtf_dataValid checks not only for non-null values but also verifies that EMA values are positive above zero. The system tracks data sources through mtf_dataSource which displays "MTF Data" for successful external requests, "Backup EMA" for failed MTF with backup system active, or "Chart EMA" for local calculations.
🔄 MTF Smart Score Caching & Recheck System
// Cache Update Decision Logic
mtfSmartIntervalSec = input.int(300, "Smart Grid Recheck Interval (sec)") // 5-minute cache
canRecheckSmartScore = na(timenow) ? false :
(na(lastCheckTime) or (timenow - lastCheckTime) > mtfSmartIntervalSec * 1000)
// Cache Management
if canRecheckSmartScore
lastCheckTime := timenow
cachedSmartScoreLong := smartScoreLong // Store current calculation
cachedSmartScoreShort := smartScoreShort
The performance-optimized caching system addresses the computational intensity of continuous MTF analysis through intelligent interval management. The mtfSmartIntervalSec parameter, defaulting to 300 seconds (5 minutes), determines cache refresh frequency. The system evaluates canRecheckSmartScore by comparing current time against lastCheckTime plus the configured interval.
When cache updates trigger, the system stores current calculations in cachedSmartScoreLong and cachedSmartScoreShort, creating stable reference points that reduce excessive MTF requests. This cache management balances computational efficiency with analytical accuracy.
The cache versus real-time hybrid system creates a multi-layered decision matrix where immediate signals update every tick for responsive market reaction, cached MTF scores refresh every 5 minutes for stability filtering, dynamic thresholds recalculate every bar for volatility adaptation, and sliding window analysis updates every bar for trend persistence validation.
This architecture balances real-time signal detection with multi-timeframe strategic validation, creating adaptive trading intelligence that responds immediately to market changes while maintaining strategic stability through cached analysis and volatility-adjusted decision thresholds.
⚡The Execution Section Deep Dive
The execution section represents the culmination of all previous systems – where analysis transforms into action.
🚪 Entry Execution: The Gateway Protocol
Primary Entry Validation:
Entry isn't just about seeing a signal – it's about passing through multiple security checkpoints, each designed to filter out low-quality opportunities.
Stage 1: Signal Confirmation
entryCompositeBuySignal must be TRUE for longs
entryCompositeSellSignal must be TRUE for shorts
Stage 2: Enhanced Entry Validation
The strategy employs an "OR" logic system that recognizes different types of market opportunities:
Path A - Trend Reversal Entry:
When emaTrendReversal_Long triggers, it indicates the market structure is shifting in favor of the trade direction. This isn't just about a single EMA crossing – it represents a change in market momentum that experienced traders recognize as potential high-probability setups.
Path B - Momentum Breakout Entry:
The strongBullMomentum condition is where QRE identifies accelerating market conditions:
Criteria:
EMA1 rising for 3+ candles AND
EMA2 rising for 2+ candles AND
Close > 10-period high
This combination captures those explosive moves where the market doesn't just trend – it accelerates, creating momentum-driven opportunities.
Path C - Recovery Entry:
When previous exit states are clean (no recent stop losses), the strategy permits entry based purely on signal strength. This pathway is designed to help avoid the strategy becoming overly cautious after successful trades.
🛡️ The Priority Exit Matrix: When Rules Collide
Not all exit signals are created equal. QRE uses a strict hierarchy that is designed to avoid conflicting signals from causing hesitation:
Priority Level 1 - Exception Exits (Immediate Action):
Condition: TP3 reached AND Wick Trap detected
Action: Immediate exit regardless of other signals
Rationale: Historical analysis suggests wick traps at TP3 may indicate potential reversals
Priority Level 2 - Structural Breakdown:
Condition: TP3 active AND EMA structure deteriorating AND Smart Score insufficient
Logic: isEMAStructureDown AND NOT smartHold_Long
This represents the strategy recognizing that the underlying market structure that justified the trade is failing. It's like a building inspector identifying structural issues – you don't wait for additional confirmation.
Priority Level 3 - Enhanced Volatility Exits:
Conditions: TP2 active AND Strong counter-candle AND Wick trap AND Volume spike
Logic: Multiple confirmation required to reduce false exits
Priority Level 4 - Standard Smart Score Exits:
Condition: Any TP level active AND smartHold evaluates to FALSE
This is the bread-and-butter exit logic where signal deterioration triggers exit
⚖️ Stop Loss Management: Risk Control Protocol
Dual Stop Loss System:
QRE provides two stop loss modes that users can select based on their preference:
Fixed Mode (Default - useAdaptiveSL = false):
Uses predetermined percentage levels regardless of market volatility:
- Long SL = entryPrice × (1 - fixedRiskP - slipBuffer)
- Short SL = entryPrice × (1 + fixedRiskP + slipBuffer)
- Default: 0.6% risk + 0.3% slippage buffer = 0.9% total stop
- Consistent and predictable stop loss levels
- Recommended for users who prefer stable risk parameters
Adaptive Mode (Optional - useAdaptiveSL = true):
Dynamic system that adjusts stop loss based on market volatility:
- Base Calculation uses ATR (Average True Range)
- Long SL = entryPrice × (1 - (ATR × atrMultSL) / entryPrice - slipBuffer)
- Short SL = entryPrice × (1 + (ATR × atrMultSL) / entryPrice + slipBuffer)
- Automatically widens stops during high volatility periods
- Tightens stops during low volatility periods
- Advanced users can enable for volatility-adaptive risk management
Trend Multiplier Enhancement (Both Modes):
When strongUpTrend is detected for long positions, the stop loss receives 1.5x breathing room. Strong trends often have deeper retracements before continuing. This is designed to help avoid the strategy being shaken out of active trades by normal market noise.
Mode Selection Guidance:
- New Users: Start with Fixed Mode for predictable risk levels
- Experienced Users: Consider Adaptive Mode for volatility-responsive stops
- Volatile Markets: Adaptive Mode may provide better stop placement
- Stable Markets: Fixed Mode often sufficient for consistent risk management
Early Exit Conditions:
Beyond traditional stop losses, QRE implements "smart stops" that trigger before price-based stops:
Early Long Exit: (smartScoreLong < 1.0 OR prev5BearCandles) AND realROI < -0.9%
🔄 State Management: The Memory System
Complete State Reset Protocol:
When a position closes, QRE doesn't just wipe the slate clean – it performs a methodical reset:
TP State Cleanup:
All Boolean flags: tp1/tp2/tp3HitBefore → FALSE
All Reached flags: tp1/tp2/tp3Reached → FALSE
All Active flags: tp1/tp2/tp3HoldActive → FALSE
Signal Counter Reset:
Every one of the 22 signal counters returns to zero.
This is designed to avoid signal "ghosting" where old signals influence new trades.
Memory Preservation:
While operational states reset, certain information is preserved for learning:
killReasonLong/Short: Why did this trade end?
lastExitWasTP1/TP2/TP3: What was the exit quality?
reEntryCount: How many consecutive re-entries have occurred?
🔄 Re-Entry Logic: The Comeback System
Re-Entry Conditions Matrix:
QRE implements a re-entry system that recognizes not all exits are created equal:
TP-Based Re-Entry (Enabled):
Criteria: Previous exit was TP1, TP2, or TP3
Cooldown: Minimal or bypassed entirely
Logic: Target-based exits indicate potentially viable market conditions
EMA-Based Re-Entry (Conditional):
Criteria: Previous exit was EMA-based (structural change)
Requirements: Must wait for EMA confirmation in new direction
Minimum Wait: 5 candles
Advanced Re-Entry Features:
When adjustReEntryTargets is enabled, the strategy becomes more aggressive with re-entries:
Target Adjustment: TP1 multiplied by reEntryTP1Mult (default 2.0)
Stop Adjustment: SL multiplied by reEntrySLMult (default 1.5)
Logic: If we're confident enough to re-enter, we should be confident enough to hold for bigger moves
Performance Tracking: Strategy tracks re-entry win rate, average ROI, and total performance separately from initial entries for optimization analysis.
📊 Exit Reason Analytics: Learning from Every Trade
Kill Reason Tracking:
Every exit is categorized and stored:
"TP3 Exit–Wick Trap": Exit at target level with wick pattern detection
"Smart Exit–EMA Down": Structural breakdown exit
"Smart Exit–Volatility": Volatility-based protection exit
"Exit Post-TP1/TP2/TP3": Standard smart exit progression
"Long SL Exit" / "Short SL Exit": Stop loss exits
Performance Differentiation:
The strategy tracks performance by exit type, allowing for continuous analysis:
TP-based exits: Achieved target levels, analyze for pattern improvement
EMA-based exits: Mixed results, analyze for pattern improvement
SL-based exits: Learning opportunities, adjust entry criteria
Volatility exits: Protective measures, monitor performance
🎛️ Trailing Stop Implementation:
Conditional Trailing Activation:
Activation Criteria: Position profitable beyond trailingStartPct AND
(TP hold active OR re-entry trade)
Dynamic Trailing Logic:
Unlike simple trailing stops, QRE's implementation considers market context:
Trending Markets: Wider trail offsets to avoid whipsaws
Volatile Markets: Tighter offsets to protect gains
Re-Entry Trades: Enhanced trailing to maximize second-chance opportunities
Return-to-Entry Protection:
When deactivateOnReturn is enabled, the strategy will close positions that return to entry level after being profitable. This is designed to help avoid the frustration of watching profitable trades turn into losers.
🧠 How It All Works Together
The beauty of QRE lies not in any single component, but in how everything integrates:
The Entry Decision: Multiple pathways are designed to help identify opportunities while maintaining filtering standards.
The Progression System: Each TP level unlocks new protection features, like achieving ranks in a video game.
The Exit Matrix: Prioritized decision-making aims to reduce analysis paralysis while providing appropriate responses to different market conditions.
The Memory System: Learning from each trade while preventing contamination between separate opportunities.
The Re-Entry Logic: Re-entry system that balances opportunity with risk management.
This creates a trading system where entry conditions filter for quality, progression systems adapt to changing market conditions, exit priorities handle conflicting signals intelligently, memory systems learn from each trade cycle, and re-entry logic maximizes opportunities while managing risk exposure.
📊 ANALYSIS TABLE INTERPRETATION -
⚙️ Enabling Analysis Mode
Navigate to strategy settings → "Testing & Analysis" → Enable "Show Analysis Table". The Analysis Table displays different information based on the selected test filter and provides real-time insight into all strategy components, helping users understand current market conditions, position status, and system decision-making processes.
📋 Filter Mode Interpretations
"All" Mode (Default View):
Composite Section:
Buy Score: Aggregated strength from all 22 bullish signals (threshold 5.0+ triggers entry consideration)
Sell Score: Aggregated strength from all 22 bearish signals (threshold 5.4+ triggers entry consideration)
APEX Filters:
ATG Trend: Shows current trend direction analysis
Indicates whether momentum filters are aligned for directional bias
ReEntry Section:
Most Recent Exit: Displays exit type and timeframe since last position closure
Status: Shows if ReEntry system is Ready/Waiting/Disabled
Count: Current re-entry attempts versus maximum allowed attempts
Position Section (When Active):
Status: Current position state (LONG/SHORT/FLAT)
ROI: Dual calculation showing Custom vs Real ROI percentages
Entry Price: Original position entry level
Current Price: Live market price for comparison
TP Tracking: Progress toward profit targets
"Smart" Filter (Critical for Active Positions):
Smart Exit Section:
Hold Timer: Time elapsed since position opened (bar-based counting)
Status: Whether Smart Exit Grid is Enabled/Disabled
Score: Current smart score calculation from 22-component matrix
Dynamic Threshold: ATR-based minimum score required for holding
Final Threshold: Time and ROI-adjusted threshold actually used for decisions
Score Check: Pass/Fail based on Score vs Final Threshold comparison
Smart Hold: Current hold decision status
Final Hold: Final recommendation based on all factors
🎯 Advanced Smart Exit Debugging - ROI & Time-Based Threshold System
Understanding the Multi-Layer Threshold System:
Layer 1: Dynamic Threshold (ATR-Based)
atrRatio = ATR / close
dynamicThreshold = atrRatio > 0.02 ? 1.0 : // High volatility: Lower threshold
(atrRatio > 0.01 ? 1.5 : // Medium volatility: Standard
2.8) // Low volatility: Higher threshold
Layer 2: Time Multiplier (ROI & Duration-Based)
Winning Positions (ROI ≥ 0%):
→ timeMultiplier = 1.0 (No time pressure, regardless of hold duration)
Losing Positions (ROI < 0%):
→ holdTimer ≤ 8 bars: timeMultiplier = 1.0 (Early stage, standard requirements)
→ holdTimer 9-16 bars: timeMultiplier = 1.1 (10% stricter requirements)
→ holdTimer 17+ bars: timeMultiplier = 1.3 (30% stricter requirements)
Layer 3: Final Threshold Calculation
finalThreshold = dynamicThreshold × timeMultiplier
Examples:
- Winning Position: 2.8 × 1.0 = 2.8 (Always standard)
- Losing Position (Early): 2.8 × 1.0 = 2.8 (Same as winning initially)
- Losing Position (Extended): 2.8 × 1.3 = 3.64 (Much stricter)
Real-Time Debugging Display:
Smart Exit Section shows:
Score: 3.5 → Current smartScoreLong/Short value
Dynamic Threshold: 2.8 → Base ATR-calculated threshold
Final Threshold: 3.64 (ATR×1.3) → Actual threshold used for decisions
Score Check: FAIL (3.5 vs 3.64) → Pass/Fail based on final comparison
Final Hold: NO HOLD → Actual system decision
Position Status Indicators:
Winner + Early: ATR×1.0 (No pressure)
Winner + Extended: ATR×1.0 (No pressure - winners can run indefinitely)
Loser + Early: ATR×1.0 (Recovery opportunity)
Loser + Extended: ATR×1.1 or ATR×1.3 (Increasing pressure to exit)
MTF Section:
Data Source: Shows whether using MTF Data/EMA Backup/Local EMA
Timeframe: Configured watchtower timeframe setting
Data Valid: Confirms successful MTF data retrieval status
Trend Signal: Higher timeframe directional bias analysis
Close Price: MTF price data availability confirmation
"Composite" Filter:
Composite Section:
Buy Score: Real-time weighted scoring from multiple indicators
Sell Score: Opposing directional signal strength
Threshold: Minimum scores required for signal activation
Components:
Flash/Blink: Momentum acceleration indicators (F = Flash active, B = Blink active)
Individual filter contributions showing which specific signals are firing
"ReEntry" Filter:
ReEntry System:
System: Shows if re-entry feature is Enabled/Disabled
Eligibility: Conditions for new entries in each direction
Performance: Success metrics of re-entry attempts when enabled
🎯 Key Status Indicators
Status Column Symbols:
✓ = Condition met / System active / Signal valid
✗ = Condition not met / System inactive / No signal
⏳ = Cooldown active (waiting period)
✅ = Ready state / Good condition
🔄 = Processing / Transitioning state
🔍 Critical Reading Guidelines
For Active Positions - Smart Exit Priority Reading:
1. First Check Position Type:
ROI ≥ 0% = Winning Position (Standard requirements)
ROI < 0% = Losing Position (Progressive requirements)
2. Check Hold Duration:
Early Stage (≤8 bars): Standard multiplier regardless of ROI
Extended Stage (9-16 bars): Slight pressure on losing positions
Long Stage (17+ bars): Strong pressure on losing positions
3. Score vs Final Threshold Analysis:
Score ≥ Final Threshold = HOLD (Continue position)
Score < Final Threshold = EXIT (Close position)
Watch for timeMultiplier changes as position duration increases
4. Understanding "Why No Hold?"
Common scenarios when Score Check shows FAIL:
Losing position held too long (timeMultiplier increased to 1.1 or 1.3)
Low volatility period (dynamic threshold raised to 2.8)
Signal deterioration (smart score dropped below required level)
MTF conflict (higher timeframe opposing position direction)
For Entry Signal Analysis:
Composite Score Reading: Signal strength relative to threshold requirements
Component Analysis: Individual filter contributions to overall score
EMA Structure: Confirm 3-bar crossover requirement met
Cooldown Status: Ensure sufficient time passed since last exit
For ReEntry Opportunities (when enabled):
System Status: Availability and eligibility for re-engagement
Exit Type Analysis: TP-based exits enable immediate re-entry, SL-based exits require cooldown
Condition Monitoring: Requirements for potential re-entry signals
Debugging Common Issues:
Issue: "Score is high but no hold?"
→ Check Final Threshold vs Score (not Dynamic Threshold)
→ Losing position may have increased timeMultiplier
→ Extended hold duration applying pressure
Issue: "Why different thresholds for same score?"
→ Position ROI status affects multiplier
→ Time elapsed since entry affects multiplier
→ Market volatility affects base threshold
Issue: "MTF conflicts with local signals?"
→ Higher timeframe trend opposing position
→ System designed to exit on MTF conflicts
→ Check MTF Data Valid status
⚡ Performance Optimization Notes
For Better Performance:
Analysis table updates may impact performance on some devices
Use specific filters rather than "All" mode for focused monitoring
Consider disabling during live trading for optimal chart performance
Enable only when needed for debugging or analysis
Strategic Usage:
Monitor "Smart" filter when positions are active for exit timing decisions
Use "Composite" filter during setup phases for signal strength analysis
Reference "ReEntry" filter after position closures for re-engagement opportunities
Track Final Threshold changes to understand exit pressure evolution
Advanced Debugging Workflow:
Position Entry Analysis:
Check Composite score vs threshold
Verify EMA crossover timing (3 bars prior)
Confirm cooldown completion
Hold Decision Monitoring:
Track Score vs Final Threshold progression
Monitor timeMultiplier changes over time
Watch for MTF conflicts
Exit Timing Analysis:
Identify which threshold layer caused exit
Track performance by exit type
Analyze re-entry eligibility
This analysis system provides transparency into strategy decision-making processes, allowing users to understand how signals are generated and positions are managed according to the programmed logic during various market conditions and position states.
SIGNAL TYPES AND CHARACTERISTICS
🔥 Core Momentum Signals
Flash Signal
Calculation: ta.rma(math.abs(close - close ), 5) > ta.sma(math.abs(close - close ), 7)
Purpose: Detects sudden price acceleration using smoothed momentum comparison
Characteristics: Triggers when recent price movement exceeds historical average movement
Usage: Primary momentum confirmation across multiple composite calculations
Weight: 1.3 points in composite scoring
Blink Signal
Calculation: math.abs(ta.change(close, 1)) > ta.sma(math.abs(ta.change(close, 1)), 5)
Purpose: Identifies immediate price velocity spikes
Characteristics: More sensitive than Flash, captures single-bar momentum bursts
Usage: Secondary momentum confirmation, often paired with Flash
Weight: 1.3 points in composite scoring
⚡ Advanced Composite Signals
Apex Pulse Signal
Calculation: apexAngleValue > 30 or apexAngleValue < -30
Purpose: Detects extreme EMA angle momentum
Characteristics: Identifies when trend angle exceeds ±30 degrees
Usage: Confirms directional momentum strength in trend-following scenarios
Pressure Surge Signal
Calculation: volSpike_AVP and strongTrendUp_ATG
Purpose: Combines volume expansion with trend confirmation
Characteristics: Requires both volume spike and strong uptrend simultaneously
Usage: bullish signal for trend continuation
Shift Wick Signal
Calculation: ta.crossunder(ema1, ema2) and isWickTrapDetected and directionFlip
Purpose: Detects bearish reversal with wick trap confirmation
Characteristics: Combines EMA crossunder with upper wick dominance and directional flip
Usage: Reversal signal for trend change identification
🛡️ Trap Exit Protection Signals
Bear Trap Exit
Calculation: isUpperWickTrap and isBearEngulfNow
Conditions: Previous bullish candle with 80%+ upper wick, followed by current bearish engulfing
Purpose: Emergency exit signal for long positions
Priority: Highest - overrides all other hold conditions
Action: Immediate position closure with full state reset
Bull Trap Exit
Calculation: isLowerWickTrap and isBullEngulfNow
Conditions: Previous bearish candle with 80%+ lower wick, followed by current bullish engulfing
Purpose: Emergency exit signal for short positions
Priority: Highest - overrides all other hold conditions
Action: Immediate position closure with full state reset
📊 Technical Analysis Foundation Signals
RSI-MFI Hybrid System
Base Calculation: (ta.rsi(close, 14) + ta.mfi(close, 14)) / 2
Oversold Threshold: < 35
Overbought Threshold: > 65
Weak Condition: < 35 and declining
Strong Condition: > 65 and rising
Usage: Momentum confirmation and reversal identification
ADX-DMI Trend Classification
Strong Up Trend: (adx > 25 and diplus > diminus and (diplus - diminus) > 5) or (ema1 > ema2 and ema2 > ema3 and ta.rising(ema2, 3))
Strong Down Trend: (adx > 20 and diminus > diplus - 5) or (ema1 < ema2 and ta.falling(ema1, 3))
Trend Weakening: adx < adx and adx < adx
Usage: Primary trend direction confirmation
Bollinger Band Squeeze Detection
Calculation: bbWidth < ta.lowest(bbWidth, 20) * 1.2
Purpose: Identifies low volatility periods before breakouts
Usage: Entry filter - avoids trades during consolidation
🎨 Visual Signal Indicators
Red X Signal
Calculation: isBearCandle and ta.crossunder(ema1, ema2)
Visual: Red X above price
Purpose: Bearish EMA crossunder with confirming candle
Composite Weight: +1.0 for short positions, -1.0 for long positions
Characteristics: Simple but effective trend change indicator
Green Dot Signal
Calculation: isBullCandle and ta.crossover(ema1, ema2)
Visual: Green dot below price
Purpose: Bullish EMA crossover with confirming candle
Composite Weight: +1.0 for long positions, -1.0 for short positions
Characteristics: Entry confirmation for trend-following strategies
Blue Diamond Signal
Trigger Conditions: amcBuySignal and score >= 4
Scoring Components: 11 different technical conditions
Key Requirements: AMC bullish + momentum rise + EMA expansion + volume confirmation
Visual: Blue diamond below price
Purpose: Bullish reversal or continuation signal
Characteristics: Multi-factor confirmation requiring 4+ technical alignments
Red Diamond Signal
Trigger Conditions: amcSellSignal and score >= 5
Scoring Components: 11 different technical conditions (stricter than Blue Diamond)
Key Requirements: AMC bearish + momentum crash + EMA compression + volume decline
Visual: Red diamond above price
Purpose: Potential bearish reversal or continuation signal
Characteristics: Requires higher threshold (5 vs 4) for more selective triggering
🔵 Specialized Detection Signals
Blue Dot Signal
Calculation: volumePulse and isCandleStrong and volIsHigh
Requirements: Volume > 2.0x MA, strong candle body > 35% of range, volume MA > 55
Purpose: Volume-confirmed momentum signal
Visual: Blue dot above price
Characteristics: Volume-centric signal for high-liquidity environments
Orange X Signal
Calculation: Complex multi-factor oversold reversal detection
Requirements: AMC oversold + wick trap + flash/blink + RSI-MFI oversold + bullish flip
Purpose: Oversold bounce signal with multiple confirmations
Visual: Orange X below price
Characteristics: Reversal signal requiring 5+ simultaneous conditions
VSS (Velocity Signal System)
Components: Volume spike + EMA angle + trend direction
Buy Signal: vssTrigger and vssTrendDir == 1
Sell Signal: vssTrigger and vssTrendDir == -1
Visual: Green/Red triangles
Purpose: Velocity-based momentum detection
Characteristics: Fast-response signal for momentum trading
⭐ Elite Composite Signals
Star Uprising Signal
Base Requirements: entryCompositeBuySignal and echoBodyLong and strongUpTrend and isAMCUp
Additional Confirmations: RSI hybrid strong + not high risk
Special Conditions: At bottom zone OR RSI bottom bounce OR strong volume bounce
Visual: Star symbol below price
Purpose: Bullish reversal signal from oversold conditions
Characteristics: Most selective bullish signal requiring multiple confirmations
Ultra Short Signal
Scoring System: 7-component scoring requiring 4+ points
Key Components: EMA trap + volume decline + RSI weakness + composite confirmation
Additional Requirements: Falling EMA structure + volume spike + flash confirmation
Visual: Explosion emoji above price
Purpose: Aggressive short entry for trend reversal or continuation
Characteristics: Complex multi-layered signal for experienced short selling
🎯 Composite Signal Architecture
Enhanced Composite Scoring
Long Composite: 15+ weighted components including structure, momentum, flash/blink, volume, price action, reversal triggers, trend alignment
Short Composite: Mirror structure with bearish bias
Threshold: 5.0 points required for signal activation
Conflict Resolution: If both long and short signals trigger simultaneously, both are disabled
Final Validation: Requires EMA momentum confirmation (ta.rising(emaFast_ATG, 2) for longs, ta.falling(emaFast_ATG, 2) for shorts)
Risk Assessment Integration
High Risk Long: RSI > 70 OR close > upper Bollinger Band 80%
High Risk Short: RSI < 30 OR close < lower Bollinger Band 80%
Zone Analysis: Top zone (95% of 50-bar high) vs Bottom zone (105% of 50-bar low)
Risk Penalty: High risk conditions subtract 1.5 points from composite scores
This signal architecture creates a multi-layered detection system where simple momentum signals provide foundation, technical analysis adds structure, visual indicators offer clarity, specialized detectors capture different market conditions, and composite signals identify potential opportunities while integrated risk assessment is designed to filter risky entries.
VISUAL FEATURES SHOWCASE
Ichimoku Cloud Visualization
Dynamic Color Intensity: Cloud transparency adapts to momentum strength - darker colors indicate stronger directional moves, while lighter transparency shows weakening momentum phases.
Gradient Color Mapping: Bullish momentum renders blue-purple spectrum with increasing opacity, while bearish momentum displays corresponding color gradients with intensity-based transparency.
Real-time Momentum Feedback: Color saturation provides immediate visual feedback on market structure strength, allowing traders to assess levels at a glance without additional indicators.
EMA Ribbon Bands
The 8-level exponential moving average system creates a comprehensive trend structure map with gradient color coding.
Signal Type Visualization
STRATEGY PROPERTIES & BACKTESTING DISCLOSURE
📊 Default Strategy Configuration:
✅ Initial Capital: 100,000 USD (realistic for average traders)
✅ Commission: 0.075% per trade (realistic exchange fees)
✅ Slippage: 3 ticks (market impact consideration)
✅ Position Size: 5% equity per trade (sustainable risk level)
✅ Pyramiding: Disabled (single position management)
✅ Sample Size: 185 trades over 12-month backtesting period
✅ Risk Management: Adaptive stop loss with maximum 1% risk per trade
COMPREHENSIVE BACKTESTING RESULTS
Testing Period & Market Conditions:
Backtesting Period: June 25, 2024 - June 25, 2025 (12 months)
Timeframe: 15-minute charts (MTF system active)
Market: BTCUSDT (Bitcoin/Tether)
Market Conditions: Full market cycle including volatility periods
Deep Backtesting: Enabled for maximum accuracy
📈 Performance Summary:
Total Return: +2.19% (+2,193.59 USDT)
Total Trades Executed: 185 trades
Win Rate: 34.05% (63 winning trades out of 185)
Profit Factor: 1.295 (gross profit ÷ gross loss)
Maximum Drawdown: 0.65% (653.17 USDT)
Risk-Adjusted Returns: Consistent with conservative risk management approach
📊 Detailed Trade Analysis:
Position Distribution:
Long Positions: 109 trades (58.9%) | Win Rate: 36.70%
Short Positions: 76 trades (41.1%) | Win Rate: 30.26%
Average Trade Duration: Optimized for 15-minute timeframe efficiency
Profitability Metrics:
Average Profit per Trade: 11.74 USDT (0.23%)
Average Winning Trade: 151.17 USDT (3.00%)
Average Losing Trade: 60.27 USDT (1.20%)
Win/Loss Ratio: 2.508 (winners are 2.5x larger than losses)
Largest Single Win: 436.02 USDT (8.69%)
Largest Single Loss: 107.41 USDT (controlled risk management)
💰 Financial Performance Breakdown:
Gross Profit: 9,523.93 USDT (9.52% of capital)
Gross Loss: 7,352.48 USDT (7.35% of capital)
Net Profit After Costs: 2,171.44 USDT (2.17%)
Commission Costs: 1,402.47 USDT (realistic trading expenses)
Maximum Equity Run-up: 2,431.66 USDT (2.38%)
⚖️ Risk Management Validation:
Maximum Drawdown: 0.65% showing controlled risk management
Drawdown Recovery: Consistent equity curve progression
Risk per Trade: Successfully maintained below 1.5% per position
Position Sizing: 5% equity allocation proved sustainable throughout testing period
📋 Strategy Performance Characteristics:
✅ Strengths Demonstrated:
Controlled Risk: Maximum drawdown well below industry standards (< 1%)
Positive Expectancy: Win/loss ratio of 2.5+ creates profitable edge
Consistent Performance: Steady equity curve without extreme volatility
Realistic Costs: Includes actual commission and slippage impacts
Sample Size: 185 trades during testing period
⚠️ Performance Considerations:
Win Rate: 34% win rate requires discipline to follow system signals
Market Dependency: Performance may vary significantly in different market conditions
Timeframe Sensitivity: Optimized for 15-minute charts; other timeframes may show different results
Slippage Impact: Real trading conditions may affect actual performance
📊 Benchmark Comparison:
Strategy Return: +2.19% over 12 months
Buy & Hold Bitcoin: +71.12% over same period
Strategy Advantage: Significantly lower drawdown and volatility
Risk-Adjusted Performance: Different risk profile compared to holding cryptocurrency
🎯 Real-World Application Insights:
Expected Trading Frequency:
Average: 15.4 trades per month (185 trades ÷ 12 months)
Weekly Frequency: Approximately 3-4 trades per week
Active Management: Requires regular monitoring during market hours
Capital Requirements:
Minimum Used in Testing: $10,000 for sustainable position sizing
Tested Range: $50,000-$100,000 for comfortable risk management
Commission Impact: 0.075% per trade totaled 1.4% of capital over 12 months
⚠️ IMPORTANT BACKTESTING DISCLAIMERS:
📈 Performance Reality:
Past performance does not guarantee future results. Backtesting results represent hypothetical performance and may not reflect actual trading outcomes due to market changes, execution differences, and emotional factors.
🔄 Market Condition Dependency:
This strategy's performance during the tested period may not be representative of performance in different market conditions, volatility regimes, or trending vs. sideways markets.
💸 Cost Considerations:
Actual trading costs may vary based on broker selection, market conditions, and trade size. Commission rates and slippage assumptions may differ from real-world execution.
🎯 Realistic Expectations:
The 34% win rate requires psychological discipline to continue following signals during losing streaks. Risk management and position sizing are critical for replicating these results.
⚡ Technology Dependencies:
Strategy performance assumes reliable internet connection, platform stability, and timely signal execution. Technical failures may impact actual results.
CONFIGURATION OPTIMIZATION
5-Minute Timeframe Optimization (Advanced Users Only)
⚠️ Important Warning: 5-minute timeframes operate without MTF confirmation, resulting in reduced signal quality and higher false signal rates.
Example 5-Minute Parameters:
Composite Thresholds: Long 6.5, Short 7.0 (vs 15M default 5.0/5.4)
Signal Lookback Bars: 12 (vs 15M default 8)
Volume Multiplier: 2.2 (vs 15M default 1.8)
MTF Timeframe: Disabled (automatic below 30M)
Risk Management Adjustments:
Position Size: Reduce to 3% (vs 5% default)
TP1: 0.8%, TP2: 1.2%, TP3: 2.0% (tighter targets)
SL: 0.8% (tighter stop loss)
Cooldown Minutes: 8 (vs 5 default)
Usage Notes for 5-Minute Trading:
- Wait for higher composite scores before entry
- Require stronger volume confirmation
- Monitor EMA structure more closely
15-Minute Scalping Setup:
TP1: 1.0%, TP2: 1.5%, TP3: 2.5%
Composite Threshold: 5.0 (higher filtering)
TP ATR Multiplier: 7.0
SL ATR Multiplier: 2.5
Volume Multiplier: 1.8 (requires stronger confirmation)
Hold Time: 2 bars minimum
3-Hour Swing Setup:
TP1: 2.0%, TP2: 4.0%, TP3: 8.0%
Composite Threshold: 4.5 (more signals)
TP ATR Multiplier: 8.0
SL ATR Multiplier: 3.2
Volume Multiplier: 1.2
Hold Time: 6 bars minimum
Market-Specific Adjustments
High Volatility Periods:
Increase ATR multipliers (TP: 2.0x, SL: 1.2x)
Raise composite thresholds (+0.5 points)
Reduce position size
Enable cooldown periods
Low Volatility Periods:
Decrease ATR multipliers (TP: 1.2x, SL: 0.8x)
Lower composite thresholds (-0.3 points)
Standard position sizing
Disable extended cooldowns
News Events:
Temporarily disable strategy 30 minutes before major releases
Increase volume requirements (2.0x multiplier)
Reduce position sizes by 50%
Monitor for unusual price action
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dual ROI System: Adaptive vs Fixed Mode
Adaptive RR Mode:
Uses ATR (Average True Range) for automatic adjustment
TP1: 1.0x ATR from entry price
TP2: 1.5x ATR from entry price
TP3: 2.0x ATR from entry price
Stop Loss: 1.0x ATR from entry price
Automatically adjusts to market volatility
Fixed Percentage Mode:
Uses predetermined percentage levels
TP1: 1.0% (default)
TP2: 1.5% (default)
TP3: 2.5% (default)
Stop Loss: 0.9% total (0.6% risk tolerance + 0.3% slippage buffer)(default)
Consistent levels regardless of volatility
Mode Selection: Enable "Use Adaptive RR" for ATR-based targets, disable for fixed percentages. Adaptive mode works better in varying volatility conditions, while fixed mode provides predictable risk/reward ratios.
Stop Loss Management
In Adaptive SL Mode:
Automatically scales with market volatility
Tight stops during low volatility (smaller ATR)
Wider stops during high volatility (larger ATR)
Include 0.3% slippage buffer in both modes
In Fixed Mode:
Consistent percentage-based stops
2% for crypto, 1.5% for forex, 1% for stocks
Manual adjustment needed for different market conditions
Trailing Stop System
Configuration:
Enable Trailing: Activates dynamic stop loss adjustment
Start Trailing %: Profit level to begin trailing (default 1.0%)
Trailing Offset %: Distance from current price (default 0.5%)
Close if Return to Entry: Optional immediate exit if price returns to entry level
Operation: Once position reaches trailing start level, stop loss automatically adjusts upward (longs) or downward (shorts) maintaining the offset distance from favorable price movement.
Timeframe-Specific Risk Considerations
15-Minute and Above (Tested):
✅ Full MTF system active
✅ Standard risk parameters apply
✅ Backtested performance metrics valid
✅ Standard position sizing (5%)
5-Minute Timeframes (Advanced Only):
⚠️ MTF system inactive - local signals only
⚠️ Higher false signal rate expected
⚠️ Reduced position sizing preferred (3%)
⚠️ Tighter stop losses required (0.8% vs 1.2%)
⚠️ Requires parameter optimization
⚠️ Monitor performance closely
1-Minute Timeframes (Limited Testing):
❌ Excessive noise levels
❌ Strategy not optimized for this frequency
Risk Management Practices
Allocate no more than 5% of your total investment portfolio to high-risk trading
Never trade with funds you cannot afford to lose
Thoroughly backtest and validate the strategy with small amounts before full implementation
Always maintain proper risk management and stop-loss settings
IMPORTANT DISCLAIMERS
Performance Disclaimer
Past performance does not guarantee future results. All trading involves substantial risk of loss. This strategy is provided for informational purposes and does not constitute financial advice.
Market Risk
Cryptocurrency and forex markets are highly volatile. Prices can move rapidly against positions, resulting in significant losses. Users should never risk more than they can afford to lose.
Strategy Limitations
This strategy relies on technical analysis and may not perform well during fundamental market shifts, news events, or unprecedented market conditions. No trading strategy can guarantee 100% success or eliminate the risk of loss.
Legal Compliance
You are responsible for compliance with all applicable regulations and laws in your jurisdiction. Consult with licensed financial professionals when necessary.
User Responsibility
Users are responsible for their own trading decisions, risk management, and compliance with applicable regulations in their jurisdiction.
RC - Crypto Scalper v3Cryptocurrency scalping strategy for perpetual futures with risk management and automation capabilities.
## Strategy Overview
This strategy identifies high-probability scalping opportunities in cryptocurrency perpetual futures markets using adaptive position sizing, dynamic stop losses, and intelligent exit management to maintain consistent risk-adjusted returns across varying market conditions.
## Technical Foundation
The strategy employs exponential moving averages for trend detection, Bollinger Bands for volatility measurement and mean reversion signals, RSI for momentum confirmation and overbought/oversold conditions, ATR for dynamic volatility-based stop placement, and VWAP for institutional price level identification. These technical indicators are combined with volume analysis and optional multi-timeframe confirmation to filter low-probability setups.
## Entry Methodology
The strategy identifies trading opportunities using three complementary approaches that can be enabled individually or in combination:
Momentum-Based Entries: Detects directional price movements aligned with short-term and intermediate-term trend indicators, with momentum oscillator confirmation to avoid entries at exhaustion points. Volume analysis provides additional confirmation of institutional participation.
Mean Reversion Entries: Identifies price extremes using statistical volatility bands combined with momentum divergence, targeting high-probability reversal zones in ranging market conditions. Entries require initial price structure confirmation to reduce false signals.
Institutional Flow Entries: Monitors volume-weighted price levels to identify areas where institutional orders are likely concentrated, entering on confirmed breaks of these key levels with supporting directional bias from trend indicators.
Each methodology uses distinct combinations of the technical indicators mentioned above, with specific parameter relationships and confirmation requirements that can be customized based on trader preference and market conditions.
## Exit Framework
Adaptive Stop Loss: Uses ATR-based stops (default 0.7x multiplier on 14-period ATR) that automatically adjust to current market volatility. Stop distance expands during volatile periods to avoid premature stops while tightening during consolidation to protect capital. Alternative percentage-based stops available for traders preferring fixed-distance risk management.
Trailing Profit System: Employs a dual-target exit approach combining fixed limit orders with dynamic trailing stops. The system activates trailing stops when positions reach profitable thresholds, allowing winning trades to capture extended moves while protecting accumulated gains. The high fixed limit (6R default) serves as a ceiling for exceptional moves while the trailing mechanism handles the majority of exits at optimal profit levels.
Time-Based Management: Implements maximum holding period constraints (50 bars default) to prevent capital from being trapped in directionless price action. This ensures consistent capital turnover and prevents the strategy from holding through extended consolidation periods.
Breakeven Protection: Automatically adjusts stop loss to entry price plus commission costs once trades reach predefined profit thresholds (0.7R default), eliminating downside risk on positions that have demonstrated directional follow-through.
## Risk Management
Position Sizing: Dynamic position sizing based on account equity percentage risk model (2% default). Calculates optimal position size based on entry price, stop distance, and account risk tolerance. Includes maximum position exposure caps and minimum position size thresholds to ensure practical trade execution.
Daily Loss Limits: Automatic trading suspension when intraday losses exceed configured threshold (5% of equity default). Prevents catastrophic drawdown days and removes emotional decision-making during adverse market conditions. Resets automatically at the start of each new trading day.
Leverage Controls: Comprehensive leverage monitoring with built-in liquidation protection for margined positions. Strategy calculates liquidation prices based on leverage settings and automatically closes positions approaching critical margin levels, preventing forced liquidations.
Exposure Management: Multiple layers of position size controls including maximum position value as percentage of equity (50% default), leverage-adjusted margin requirements, and minimum capital availability thresholds before opening new positions.
## Market Filters
Session-Based Filtering: Configurable trading windows for Asian (00:00-08:00 UTC), London (08:00-16:00 UTC), and New York (13:00-21:00 UTC) sessions. Allows traders to focus on specific market hours or avoid illiquid periods based on their asset and trading style.
Volatility Requirements: Minimum and maximum ATR percentage thresholds ensure strategy only operates within optimal volatility ranges. Prevents trading during both insufficient movement periods and extreme volatility events where execution quality deteriorates.
Trend Alignment: Optional higher timeframe trend filter ensures directional bias aligns with broader market structure, reducing counter-trend entries during strong directional moves.
Volume Confirmation: Configurable volume requirements for entry validation, ensuring sufficient market participation and reducing false signals during low-liquidity periods.
## Automation Support
Built-in webhook integration generates JSON payloads compatible with popular broker automation platforms. Alert system provides comprehensive notifications for all entry signals, exit executions, risk limit breaches, and daily trading status updates. Supports both automated and manual execution workflows.
## Settings Explanation
Initial Capital: $5,000
Selected as realistic starting point for retail traders entering crypto futures markets. Strategy scales proportionally - larger accounts show similar percentage returns with proportionally larger absolute gains and position sizes.
Risk Per Trade: 2%
Conservative default providing significant drawdown tolerance. With 51% historical win rate and positive expectancy, risking 2% per trade allows for extended losing streaks without account impairment. Adjustable from 0.5% (very conservative) to 5% (aggressive, experienced traders only).
Leverage: 10x
Standard cross-margin leverage for cryptocurrency perpetual futures. Combined with 2% risk setting and maximum 50% equity position size caps, actual exposure remains controlled despite leverage. Built-in liquidation protection provides additional safety layer.
Commission: 0.055%
Modeled on major exchange maker fee structures (Bybit, Binance Futures).
**Slippage: 50 ticks**
Ultra-conservative slippage assumption representing extreme worst-case execution scenarios. ETH perpetual tick size is $0.01, therefore 50 ticks equals $0.50 per side or $1.00 round trip slippage per trade.
Real-world slippage on 30-minute timeframe typically ranges from 2-5 ticks ($0.02-0.05 round trip) under normal conditions, with 10-20 ticks during highly volatile periods. The 50-tick setting assumes every single trade executes during extreme market stress conditions.
This ultra-conservative modeling approach means real-world trading performance under typical market conditions may exceed backtest results, as the strategy has been tested under punishing execution cost assumptions that represent worst-case scenarios rather than expected outcomes.
Stop Loss: ATR-based (0.7x multiplier)
Volatility-adaptive stops optimized for 30-minute cryptocurrency perpetuals. The 0.7x multiplier balances protection against premature stops due to normal market noise. Lower multipliers (0.5-0.6x) suitable for lower timeframes, higher multipliers (0.8-1.2x) for higher timeframes.
Take Profit: 6R (Risk:Reward)
High target designed to work in conjunction with trailing stop system rather than as primary exit mechanism. Historical analysis shows most profitable trades exit via trailing stops at lower multiples, with the 6R limit capturing occasional extended moves. This configuration allows the trailing stop system to operate optimally while providing upside capture on exceptional price runs.
Trailing Stop: Activates at 1R | Offset 0.5R
Trailing mechanism engages when position reaches 1:1 risk-reward, then maintains 0.5R distance from peak favourable price. This configuration allows profitable trades room to develop while protecting accumulated gains from reversals.
Maximum Holding Period: 50 bars
Automatic exit trigger after 50 bars (25 hours on 30-minute timeframe) prevents capital commitment to non-trending price action. Adjustable based on timeframe and trading style preferences.
## Backtest Performance
Test Period: November 2023 - November 2025 (2 years)
Asset: ETH/USDT Perpetual Futures
Timeframe: 30 minutes
Initial Capital: $5,000
Performance Metrics:
- Final Equity: $25,353.99
- Net Profit: $20,353.99
- Total Return: 407.08%
- Annualized Return: ~204%
- Total Trades: 2,549
- Winning Trades: 1,308 (51.28%)
- Losing Trades: 1,241 (48.72%)
- Profit Factor: 1.215
- Sharpe Ratio: 0.813
- Sortino Ratio: 6.428
- Maximum Drawdown: 11.53%
- Average Drawdown: <2%
Trade Statistics:
- Average Win: 1.15% per trade
- Average Loss: -0.98% per trade
- Win/Loss Ratio: 1.17:1
- Largest Win: 7.14%
- Largest Loss: -2.31%
- Average Trade Duration: ~8 hours
- Trades Per Month: ~106
Cost Analysis:
- Total Commission Paid: $21,277.06
- Commission as % of Gross Profit: 18.5%
- Modeled Slippage Impact: $2,549.00 (50 ticks per trade)
- Total Trading Costs: $23,826.06
- Net Profit After All Costs: $20,353.99
Risk-Adjusted Performance:
- Return/Max DD Ratio: 35.3
- Profit Per Trade: $7.98 average
- Risk of Ruin: <0.001% (with 2% risk, 51% win rate, 1.17 R:R)
## Bear Market Validation
To validate robustness across different market conditions, the strategy was additionally tested during the 2022 cryptocurrency bear market:
Test Period: May 2022 - November 2022 (7 months)
Market Conditions: ETH declined 57% (from ~$2,900 to ~$1,200)
Bear Market Results:
- Net Profit: $4,959.69
- Return: 99.19%
- Total Trades: 845
- Win Rate: 51.72%
- Maximum Drawdown: 18.54%
- Profit Factor: 1.235
- Outperformance vs Buy & Hold: +156.3%
The strategy demonstrated profitable performance during severe market decline, with short positions showing particular strength (54.1% win rate on shorts vs 49.4% on longs). This validates that the edge is not dependent on bullish market conditions and the multiple entry methodologies adapt naturally to different market environments.
## Recommended Usage
Optimal Timeframes:
- Primary: 30-minute (tested and optimized)
- Alternative: 1-hour (more selective, fewer trades)
- Not recommended: <15-minute (execution quality deteriorates)
Suitable Assets:
High-liquidity cryptocurrency perpetual futures recommended:
- BTC/USDT (>$2B daily volume)
- ETH/USDT (>$1B daily volume)
- SOL/USDT, AVAX/USDT (>$100M daily volume)
- Avoid low-liquidity pairs (<$50M daily volume)
Risk Configuration:
- Conservative: 1-1.5% per trade
- Moderate: 2-3% per trade (default: 2%)
- Aggressive: 3-5% per trade (requires discipline)
## Important Considerations
Backtesting vs Live Trading: Always paper trade first. Real-world results vary based on execution quality, broker-specific factors, network latency, and individual trade management decisions. Backtest performance represents historical simulation with ultra-conservative cost assumptions, not guaranteed future results.
Market Conditions: Strategy designed for liquid, actively-traded markets. Performance characteristics:
- Strong trends: Optimal (trailing stops capture extended moves)
- Ranging markets: Moderate (mean reversion component provides edge)
- Low volatility: Reduced (ATR filter prevents most entries)
- Extreme volatility: Protected (maximum volatility filter prevents entries)
Cost Impact: Commission represents approximately 18.5% of gross profit in backtests. The 50-tick slippage assumption is deliberately punitive - typical execution will likely be 5-10x better (2-10 ticks actual vs 50 ticks modeled), meaning real-world net results may significantly exceed backtest performance under normal market conditions.
Execution Quality: 30-minute timeframe provides sufficient time for order placement and management. Automated execution recommended for consistency. Manual execution requires discipline to follow signals without hesitation or second-guessing.
Starting Procedures:
1. Run backtest on your specific asset and timeframe
2. Paper trade for minimum 50 trades or 2 weeks
3. Start with minimum position sizes (0.5-1% risk)
4. Gradually scale to target risk levels as confidence builds
5. Monitor actual execution costs vs backtest assumptions
## Strategy Limitations
- Requires liquid markets; performance degrades significantly on low-volume pairs
- No built-in news event calendar; traders should manually avoid scheduled high-impact events
- Weekend/holiday trading may experience wider spreads and different price behaviour
- Does not model spread costs (assumes mid-price fills); add 1-2 ticks additional cost for market orders
- Performance during market structure changes (regime shifts) may differ from backtest period
- Requires consistent monitoring during active trading hours for optimal automated execution
- Slippage assumptions are deliberately extreme; actual slippage will typically be much lower
## Risk Disclosure
Cryptocurrency trading involves substantial risk of loss. Leverage amplifies both gains and losses. This strategy will experience losing streaks and drawdowns. The 11.53% maximum historical drawdown in bull market testing and 18.54% in bear market testing do not represent ceilings - larger drawdowns are possible and should be expected in live trading.
Past performance does not guarantee future results. Market conditions evolve, and historical edge may diminish or disappear. No strategy works in all market conditions. The strategy has been tested with extremely conservative slippage assumptions (50 ticks per trade) that significantly exceed typical execution costs; this provides a safety margin but does not eliminate risk.
Capital at Risk: Only trade with capital you can afford to lose completely. The strategy's positive historical performance across both bull and bear markets does not eliminate the possibility of significant losses or account impairment.
Not Financial Advice: This strategy is an educational tool, not investment advice. Users are solely responsible for their trading decisions, risk management, and outcomes. The developer assumes no liability for trading losses.
Leverage Warning: Trading with leverage can result in losses exceeding initial investment. Ensure you understand leverage mechanics and liquidation risks before using leveraged products.
## Technical Requirements
- TradingView Premium subscription (for strategy testing and alerts)
- Understanding of risk management principles
- Familiarity with perpetual futures mechanics
- Broker account supporting crypto perpetuals (if trading live)
- For automation: Webhook-compatible execution platform
## Version History
v3.0 - November 2025 (Initial Release)
- Multi-methodology entry system (Momentum, Mean Reversion, VWAP)
- Comprehensive risk management framework
- Adaptive exit system with trailing stops
- Session and volatility filtering
- Webhook automation support
- Validated across bull market (2024-25) and bear market (2022) periods
- Tested with ultra-conservative 50-tick slippage assumptions
Disclaimer: This strategy is provided "as-is" for educational purposes. Past performance does not indicate future results. All backtests conducted with 50-tick slippage (ultra-conservative assumptions). Actual trading costs typically significantly lower. Trade responsibly and at your own risk.
Qullamaggie [Modified] | FractalystWhat's the purpose of this strategy?
The strategy aims to identify high-probability breakout setups in trending markets, inspired by Kristjan "Qullamaggie" Kullamägi’s approach.
It focuses on capturing explosive price moves after periods of consolidation, using technical criteria like moving averages, breakouts, trailing stop-loss and momentum confirmation.
Ideal for swing traders seeking to ride strong trends while managing risk.
----
How does the strategy work?
The strategy follows a systematic process to capture high-momentum breakouts:
Pre-Breakout Criteria:
Prior Price Surge: Identifies stocks that have rallied 30-100%+ in recent month(s), signaling strong underlying momentum (per Qullamaggie’s volatility expansion principles).
Consolidation Phase: Looks for a tightening price range (e.g., flag, pennant, or tight base), indicating a potential "coiling" before continuation.
Trend Confirmation: Uses moving averages (e.g., 20/50/200 EMA) to ensure the stock is trading above key averages on the daily chart, confirming an uptrend.
Price Break: Enters when price clears the consolidation high with conviction.
Risk Management:
Initial Stop Loss: Placed below the consolidation low or a recent swing point to limit downside.
Break-Even Adjustment: Moves stop loss to breakeven once the trade reaches 1.5x risk-to-reward (RR), securing a "free trade" while letting winners run.
Trailing Stop (Unique Edge):
Market Structure Trailing: Instead of trailing via moving averages, the stop is dynamically adjusted using structural invalidation level. This adapts to price action, allowing the trade to stay open during volatile retracements while locking in gains as new structure forms.
Why This Matters: Most strategies use rigid trailing stops (e.g., below the 10EMA), which often exit prematurely in choppy markets. By trailing based on structure, this strategy avoids "noise" and captures larger trends, directly boosting overall returns.
----
What markets or timeframes is this suited for?
This is a long-only strategy designed for trending markets, and it performs best in:
Markets: Stocks (especially high-growth, liquid equities), cryptocurrencies (major pairs with strong volatility), commodities (e.g., oil, gold), and futures (index/commodity futures).
Timeframes: Primarily daily charts for swing trades (1-30 day holds), though weekly charts can help confirm broader trends.
Key Advantage: The TradingView script allows instant backtesting with adjustable parameters
You can:
- Test historical performance across multiple markets to identify which assets align best with the strategy.
- Optimize settings (e.g., trailing stop sensitivity, moving averages etc.) to match a market’s volatility profile.
Build a diversified portfolio by filtering for markets that show consistent profitability in backtests.
For example, you might discover cryptos require tighter trailing stops due to volatility, while stocks thrive with wider structural stops. The script automates this analysis, letting you to trade confidently.
----
What indicators or tools does the strategy use?
The strategy combines customizable technical tools with strict anti-lookahead safeguards:
Core Indicators:
Moving Averages: Adjustable periods (e.g., 20/50/200 EMA or SMA) and timeframes (daily/weekly) to confirm trend alignment. Users can test combinations (e.g., 10EMA vs. 20EMA) to optimize for specific markets.
Breakout Parameters:
Consolidation Length: Adjustable window to define the "tightness" of the pre-breakout pattern.
Entry Models: Flexible entry logics (Breakouts and fractals)
Anti-Lookahead Design:
All calculations (e.g., moving averages, consolidation ranges, volume averages) use only closed/confirmed data available at the time of the signal.
----
How do I manage risk with this strategy?
The strategy prioritizes customizable risk controls to align with your trading style and account size:
User-Defined Risk Inputs:
Risk Per Trade: Set a % of Equity (e.g., 1-2%) to determine position size. The strategy auto-calculates shares/contracts to match your selected risk per trade.
Flexibility: Choose between fixed risk or equity-based scaling.
The script adjusts position sizing dynamically based on your selection.
Pyramiding Feature:
Customizable Entries: Adjust the number of pyramiding trades allowed (e.g., 1-3 additional positions) in the strategy settings. Each new entry is triggered only if the prior trade hits its 1.5x RR target and the trend remains intact.
Risk-Scaled Additions: New positions use profits from prior trades, compounding gains without increasing initial risk.
Risk-Free Trade Mechanic:
Once a trade reaches 1.5x RR, the stop loss is moved to breakeven, eliminating downside risk.
The strategy then opens a new position (if pyramiding is enabled) using a portion of the locked-in profit. This "snowballs" winners while keeping total capital exposure stable.
Impact on Net Profit & Drawdown:
Net Profit Boost: Pyramiding lets you ride multi-leg trends aggressively. For example, a 100% runner could generate 2-3x more profit vs. a single-entry approach.
Controlled Drawdowns: Since new positions are funded by profits (not initial capital), max drawdown stays anchored to your original risk per trade (e.g., 1-2% of account). Even if later entries fail, the breakeven stop on prior trades protects overall equity.
Why This Works: Most strategies either over-leverage (increasing drawdowns) or exit too early. By recycling profits into new positions only after securing risk-free capital, this approach mimics hedge fund "scaling in" tactics while staying retail-trader friendly.
----
How does the strategy identify market structure for its trailing stoploss?
The strategy identifies market structure by utilizing an efficient logic with for loops to pinpoint the first swing candle that features a pivot of 2. This marks the beginning of the break of structure, where the market's previous trend or pattern is considered invalidated or changed.
----
What are the underlying calculations?
The underlying calculations involve:
Identifying Swing Points: The strategy looks for swing highs (marked with blue Xs) and swing lows (marked with red Xs). A swing high is identified when a candle's high is higher than the highs of the candles before and after it. Conversely, a swing low is when a candle's low is lower than the lows of the candles before and after it.
Break of Structure (BOS):
Bullish BOS: This occurs when the price breaks above the swing high level of the previous structure, indicating a potential shift to a bullish trend.
Bearish BOS: This happens when the price breaks below the swing low level of the previous structure, signaling a potential shift to a bearish trend.
Structural Liquidity and Invalidation:
Structural Liquidity: After a break of structure, liquidity levels are updated to the first swing high in a bullish BOS or the first swing low in a bearish BOS.
Structural Invalidation: If the price moves back to the level of the first swing low before the bullish BOS or the first swing high before the bearish BOS, it invalidates the break of structure, suggesting a potential reversal or continuation of the previous trend.
This method provides users with a technical approach to filter market regimes, offering an advantage by minimizing the risk of overfitting to historical data, which is often a concern with traditional indicators like moving averages.
By focusing on identifying pivotal swing points and the subsequent breaks of structure, the strategy maintains a balance between sensitivity to market changes and robustness against historical data anomalies, ensuring a more adaptable and potentially more reliable market analysis tool.
----
What entry criteria are used in this script?
The script uses two entry models for trading decisions: BreakOut and Fractal.
Underlying Calculations:
Breakout: The script records the most recent swing high by storing it in a variable. When the price closes above this recorded level, and all other predefined conditions are satisfied, the script triggers a breakout entry. This approach is considered conservative because it waits for the price to confirm a breakout above the previous high before entering a trade. As shown in the image, as soon as the price closes above the new candle (first tick), the long entry gets taken. The stop-loss is initially set and then moved to break-even once the price moves in favor of the trade.
Fractal: This method involves identifying a swing low with a period of 2, which means it looks for a low point where the price is lower than the two candles before and after it. Once this pattern is detected, the script executes the trade. This is an aggressive approach since it doesn't wait for further price confirmation. In the image, this is represented by the 'Fractal 2' label where the script identifies and acts on the swing low pattern.
----
What type of stop-loss identification method are used in this strategy?
This strategy employs two types of stop-loss methods: Initial Stop-loss and Trailing Stop-Loss.
Underlying Calculations:
Initial Stop-loss:
ATR Based: The strategy uses the Average True Range (ATR) to set an initial stop-loss, which helps in accounting for market volatility without predicting price direction.
Calculation:
- First, the True Range (TR) is calculated for each period, which is the greatest of:
- Current Period High - Current Period Low
- Absolute Value of Current Period High - Previous Period Close
- Absolute Value of Current Period Low - Previous Period Close
- The ATR is then the moving average of these TR values over a specified period, typically 14 periods by default. This ATR value can be used to set the stop-loss at a distance from the entry price that reflects the current market volatility.
Swing Low Based:
For this method, the stop-loss is set based on the most recent swing low identified in the market structure analysis. This approach uses the lowest point of the recent price action as a reference for setting the stop-loss.
Trailing Stop-Loss:
The strategy uses structural liquidity and structural invalidation levels across multiple timeframes to adjust the stop-loss once the trade is profitable. This method involves:
Detecting Structural Liquidity: After a break of structure, the liquidity levels are updated to the first swing high in a bullish scenario or the first swing low in a bearish scenario. These levels serve as potential areas where the price might find support or resistance, allowing the stop-loss to trail the price movement.
Detecting Structural Invalidation: If the price returns to the level of the first swing low before a bullish break of structure or the first swing high before a bearish break of structure, it suggests the trend might be reversing or invalidating, prompting the adjustment of the stop-loss to lock in profits or minimize losses.
By using these methods, the strategy dynamically adjusts the initial stop-loss based on market volatility, helping to protect against adverse price movements while allowing for enough room for trades to develop. The ATR-based stop-loss adapts to the current market conditions by considering the volatility, ensuring that the stop-loss is not too tight during volatile periods, which could lead to premature exits, nor too loose during calm markets, which might result in larger losses. Similarly, the swing low based stop-loss provides a logical exit point if the market structure changes unfavorably.
Each market behaves differently across various timeframes, and it is essential to test different parameters and optimizations to find out which trailing stop-loss method gives you the desired results and performance. This involves backtesting the strategy with different settings for the ATR period, the distance from the swing low, and how the trailing stop-loss reacts to structural liquidity and invalidation levels.
Through this process, you can tailor the strategy to perform optimally in different market environments, ensuring that the stop-loss mechanism supports the trade's longevity while safeguarding against significant drawdowns.
----
What type of break-even method is used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain RR ratio.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price + (Initial Risk * RR Ratio)
----
What tables are available in this script?
- Summary: Provides a general overview, displaying key performance parameters such as Net Profit, Profit Factor, Max Drawdown, Average Trade, Closed Trades and more.
Total Commission: Displays the cumulative commissions incurred from all trades executed within the selected backtesting window. This value is derived by summing the commission fees for each trade on your chart.
Average Commission: Represents the average commission per trade, calculated by dividing the Total Commission by the total number of closed trades. This metric is crucial for assessing the impact of trading costs on overall profitability.
Avg Trade: The sum of money gained or lost by the average trade generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the Net Profit by the overall number of closed trades. An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.
MaxDD: Displays the largest drawdown of losses, i.e., the maximum possible loss that the strategy could have incurred among all of the trades it has made. This value is calculated separately for every bar that the strategy spends with an open position.
Profit Factor: The amount of money a trading strategy made for every unit of money it lost (in the selected currency). This value is calculated by dividing gross profits by gross losses.
Avg RR: This is calculated by dividing the average winning trade by the average losing trade. This field is not a very meaningful value by itself because it does not take into account the ratio of the number of winning vs losing trades, and strategies can have different approaches to profitability. A strategy may trade at every possibility in order to capture many small profits, yet have an average losing trade greater than the average winning trade. The higher this value is, the better, but it should be considered together with the percentage of winning trades and the net profit.
Winrate: The percentage of winning trades generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the number of winning trades by the total number of closed trades generated by a strategy. Percent profitable is not a very reliable measure by itself. A strategy could have many small winning trades, making the percent profitable high with a small average winning trade, or a few big winning trades accounting for a low percent profitable and a big average winning trade. Most mean-reversion successful strategies have a percent profitability of 40-80% but are profitable due to risk management control.
BE Trades: Number of break-even trades, excluding commission/slippage.
Losing Trades: The total number of losing trades generated by the strategy.
Winning Trades: The total number of winning trades generated by the strategy.
Total Trades: Total number of taken traders visible your charts.
Net Profit: The overall profit or loss (in the selected currency) achieved by the trading strategy in the test period. The value is the sum of all values from the Profit column (on the List of Trades tab), taking into account the sign.
- Monthly: Displays performance data on a month-by-month basis, allowing users to analyze performance trends over each month and year.
- Weekly: Displays performance data on a week-by-week basis, helping users to understand weekly performance variations.
- UI Table: A user-friendly table that allows users to view and save the selected strategy parameters from user inputs. This table enables easy access to key settings and configurations, providing a straightforward solution for saving strategy parameters by simply taking a screenshot with Alt + S or ⌥ + S.
User-input styles and customizations:
Please note that all background colors in the style are disabled by default to enhance visualization.
How to Use This Strategy to Create a Profitable Edge and Systems?
Choose Your Strategy mode:
- Decide whether you are creating an investing strategy or a trading strategy.
Select a Market:
- Choose a one-sided market such as stocks, indices, or cryptocurrencies.
Historical Data:
- Ensure the historical data covers at least 10 years of price action for robust backtesting.
Timeframe Selection:
- Choose the timeframe you are comfortable trading with. It is strongly recommended to use a timeframe above 15 minutes to minimize the impact of commissions/slippage on your profits.
Set Commission and Slippage:
- Properly set the commission and slippage in the strategy properties according to your broker/prop firm specifications.
Parameter Optimization:
- Use trial and error to test different parameters until you find the performance results you are looking for in the summary table or, preferably, through deep backtesting using the strategy tester.
Trade Count:
- Ensure the number of trades is 200 or more; the higher, the better for statistical significance.
Positive Average Trade:
- Make sure the average trade is above zero.
(An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.)
Performance Metrics:
- Look for a high profit factor, and net profit with minimum drawdown.
- Ideally, aim for a drawdown under 20-30%, depending on your risk tolerance.
Refinement and Optimization:
- Try out different markets and timeframes.
- Continue working on refining your edge using the available filters and components to further optimize your strategy.
What Makes This Strategy Unique?
This strategy combines flexibility, smart risk management, and momentum focus in a way that’s rare and practical:
1. Adapts to Any Market Rhythm
Works on daily, weekly, or intraday charts without code changes.
Uses two entry types: classic breakouts (like trending stocks) or fractal patterns (to avoid false starts).
2. Smarter Stop-Loss System
No rigid rules: Stops adjust based on price structure (e.g., new “higher lows”), not fixed percentages.
Avoids whipsaws: Tightens stops only when the trend strengthens, not in choppy markets.
3. Safe Profit-Boosting Pyramiding
Adds new positions only after prior trades are risk-free (stops moved above breakeven).
Scales up using locked-in profits, not new capital, to grow gains safely.
4. Built-In Momentum Check
Tracks 1/3/6-month price growth to spotlight stocks with strong, lasting momentum.
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data.
Built-in components, features, and functionalities of our charting tools are the intellectual property of @Fractalyst Unauthorized use, reproduction, or distribution of these proprietary elements is prohibited.
- By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer and agrees to respect our intellectual property rights and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
Adaptive Genesis Engine [AGE]ADAPTIVE GENESIS ENGINE (AGE)
Pure Signal Evolution Through Genetic Algorithms
Where Darwin Meets Technical Analysis
🧬 WHAT YOU'RE GETTING - THE PURE INDICATOR
This is a technical analysis indicator - it generates signals, visualizes probability, and shows you the evolutionary process in real-time. This is NOT a strategy with automatic execution - it's a sophisticated signal generation system that you control .
What This Indicator Does:
Generates Long/Short entry signals with probability scores (35-88% range)
Evolves a population of up to 12 competing strategies using genetic algorithms
Validates strategies through walk-forward optimization (train/test cycles)
Visualizes signal quality through premium gradient clouds and confidence halos
Displays comprehensive metrics via enhanced dashboard
Provides alerts for entries and exits
Works on any timeframe, any instrument, any broker
What This Indicator Does NOT Do:
Execute trades automatically
Manage positions or calculate position sizes
Place orders on your behalf
Make trading decisions for you
This is pure signal intelligence. AGE tells you when and how confident it is. You decide whether and how much to trade.
🔬 THE SCIENCE: GENETIC ALGORITHMS MEET TECHNICAL ANALYSIS
What Makes This Different - The Evolutionary Foundation
Most indicators are static - they use the same parameters forever, regardless of market conditions. AGE is alive . It maintains a population of competing strategies that evolve, adapt, and improve through natural selection principles:
Birth: New strategies spawn through crossover breeding (combining DNA from fit parents) plus random mutation for exploration
Life: Each strategy trades virtually via shadow portfolios, accumulating wins/losses, tracking drawdown, and building performance history
Selection: Strategies are ranked by comprehensive fitness scoring (win rate, expectancy, drawdown control, signal efficiency)
Death: Weak strategies are culled periodically, with elite performers (top 2 by default) protected from removal
Evolution: The gene pool continuously improves as successful traits propagate and unsuccessful ones die out
This is not curve-fitting. Each new strategy must prove itself on out-of-sample data through walk-forward validation before being trusted for live signals.
🧪 THE DNA: WHAT EVOLVES
Every strategy carries a 10-gene chromosome controlling how it interprets market data:
Signal Sensitivity Genes
Entropy Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to market order/disorder calculations. Low values = conservative, require strong directional clarity. High values = aggressive, act on weaker order signals.
Momentum Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to RSI/ROC/MACD composite. Controls responsiveness to momentum shifts vs. mean-reversion setups.
Structure Sensitivity (0.5-2.0): Weight given to support/resistance positioning. Determines how much price location within swing range matters.
Probability Adjustment Genes
Probability Boost (-0.10 to +0.10): Inherent bias toward aggressive (+) or conservative (-) entries. Acts as personality trait - some strategies naturally optimistic, others pessimistic.
Trend Strength Requirement (0.3-0.8): Minimum trend conviction needed before signaling. Higher values = only trades strong trends, lower values = acts in weak/sideways markets.
Volume Filter (0.5-1.5): Strictness of volume confirmation. Higher values = requires strong volume, lower values = volume less important.
Risk Management Genes
ATR Multiplier (1.5-4.0): Base volatility scaling for all price levels. Controls whether strategy uses tight or wide stops/targets relative to ATR.
Stop Multiplier (1.0-2.5): Stop loss tightness. Lower values = aggressive profit protection, higher values = more breathing room.
Target Multiplier (1.5-4.0): Profit target ambition. Lower values = quick scalping exits, higher values = swing trading holds.
Adaptation Gene
Regime Adaptation (0.0-1.0): How much strategy adjusts behavior based on detected market regime (trending/volatile/choppy). Higher values = more reactive to regime changes.
The Magic: AGE doesn't just try random combinations. Through tournament selection and fitness-weighted crossover, successful gene combinations spread through the population while unsuccessful ones fade away. Over 50-100 bars, you'll see the population converge toward genes that work for YOUR instrument and timeframe.
📊 THE SIGNAL ENGINE: THREE-LAYER SYNTHESIS
Before any strategy generates a signal, AGE calculates probability through multi-indicator confluence:
Layer 1 - Market Entropy (Information Theory)
Measures whether price movements exhibit directional order or random walk characteristics:
The Math:
Shannon Entropy = -Σ(p × log(p))
Market Order = 1 - (Entropy / 0.693)
What It Means:
High entropy = choppy, random market → low confidence signals
Low entropy = directional market → high confidence signals
Direction determined by up-move vs down-move dominance over lookback period (default: 20 bars)
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (bearish order to bullish order)
Layer 2 - Momentum Synthesis
Combines three momentum indicators into single composite score:
Components:
RSI (40% weight): Normalized to -1/+1 scale using (RSI-50)/50
Rate of Change (30% weight): Percentage change over lookback (default: 14 bars), clamped to ±1
MACD Histogram (30% weight): Fast(12) - Slow(26), normalized by ATR
Why This Matters: RSI catches mean-reversion opportunities, ROC catches raw momentum, MACD catches momentum divergence. Weighting favors RSI for reliability while keeping other perspectives.
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (strong bearish to strong bullish)
Layer 3 - Structure Analysis
Evaluates price position within swing range (default: 50-bar lookback):
Position Classification:
Bottom 20% of range = Support Zone → bullish bounce potential
Top 20% of range = Resistance Zone → bearish rejection potential
Middle 60% = Neutral Zone → breakout/breakdown monitoring
Signal Logic:
At support + bullish candle = +0.7 (strong buy setup)
At resistance + bearish candle = -0.7 (strong sell setup)
Breaking above range highs = +0.5 (breakout confirmation)
Breaking below range lows = -0.5 (breakdown confirmation)
Consolidation within range = ±0.3 (weak directional bias)
Signal Output: -1.0 to +1.0 (bearish structure to bullish structure)
Confluence Voting System
Each layer casts a vote (Long/Short/Neutral). The system requires minimum 2-of-3 agreement (configurable 1-3) before generating a signal:
Examples:
Entropy: Bullish, Momentum: Bullish, Structure: Neutral → Signal generated (2 long votes)
Entropy: Bearish, Momentum: Neutral, Structure: Neutral → No signal (only 1 short vote)
All three bullish → Signal generated with +5% probability bonus
This is the key to quality. Single indicators give too many false signals. Triple confirmation dramatically improves accuracy.
📈 PROBABILITY CALCULATION: HOW CONFIDENCE IS MEASURED
Base Probability:
Raw_Prob = 50% + (Average_Signal_Strength × 25%)
Then AGE applies strategic adjustments:
Trend Alignment:
Signal with trend: +4%
Signal against strong trend: -8%
Weak/no trend: no adjustment
Regime Adaptation:
Trending market (efficiency >50%, moderate vol): +3%
Volatile market (vol ratio >1.5x): -5%
Choppy market (low efficiency): -2%
Volume Confirmation:
Volume > 70% of 20-bar SMA: no change
Volume below threshold: -3%
Volatility State (DVS Ratio):
High vol (>1.8x baseline): -4% (reduce confidence in chaos)
Low vol (<0.7x baseline): -2% (markets can whipsaw in compression)
Moderate elevated vol (1.0-1.3x): +2% (trending conditions emerging)
Confluence Bonus:
All 3 indicators agree: +5%
2 of 3 agree: +2%
Strategy Gene Adjustment:
Probability Boost gene: -10% to +10%
Regime Adaptation gene: scales regime adjustments by 0-100%
Final Probability: Clamped between 35% (minimum) and 88% (maximum)
Why These Ranges?
Below 35% = too uncertain, better not to signal
Above 88% = unrealistic, creates overconfidence
Sweet spot: 65-80% for quality entries
🔄 THE SHADOW PORTFOLIO SYSTEM: HOW STRATEGIES COMPETE
Each active strategy maintains a virtual trading account that executes in parallel with real-time data:
Shadow Trading Mechanics
Entry Logic:
Calculate signal direction, probability, and confluence using strategy's unique DNA
Check if signal meets quality gate:
Probability ≥ configured minimum threshold (default: 65%)
Confluence ≥ configured minimum (default: 2 of 3)
Direction is not zero (must be long or short, not neutral)
Verify signal persistence:
Base requirement: 2 bars (configurable 1-5)
Adapts based on probability: high-prob signals (75%+) enter 1 bar faster, low-prob signals need 1 bar more
Adjusts for regime: trending markets reduce persistence by 1, volatile markets add 1
Apply additional filters:
Trend strength must exceed strategy's requirement gene
Regime filter: if volatile market detected, probability must be 72%+ to override
Volume confirmation required (volume > 70% of average)
If all conditions met for required persistence bars, enter shadow position at current close price
Position Management:
Entry Price: Recorded at close of entry bar
Stop Loss: ATR-based distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Stop_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Take Profit: ATR-based distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Target_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Position: +1 (long) or -1 (short), only one at a time per strategy
Exit Logic:
Check if price hit stop (on low) or target (on high) on current bar
Record trade outcome in R-multiples (profit/loss normalized by ATR)
Update performance metrics:
Total trades counter incremented
Wins counter (if profit > 0)
Cumulative P&L updated
Peak equity tracked (for drawdown calculation)
Maximum drawdown from peak recorded
Enter cooldown period (default: 8 bars, configurable 3-20) before next entry allowed
Reset signal age counter to zero
Walk-Forward Tracking:
During position lifecycle, trades are categorized:
Training Phase (first 250 bars): Trade counted toward training metrics
Testing Phase (next 75 bars): Trade counted toward testing metrics (out-of-sample)
Live Phase (after WFO period): Trade counted toward overall metrics
Why Shadow Portfolios?
No lookahead bias (uses only data available at the bar)
Realistic execution simulation (entry on close, stop/target checks on high/low)
Independent performance tracking for true fitness comparison
Allows safe experimentation without risking capital
Each strategy learns from its own experience
🏆 FITNESS SCORING: HOW STRATEGIES ARE RANKED
Fitness is not just win rate. AGE uses a comprehensive multi-factor scoring system:
Core Metrics (Minimum 3 trades required)
Win Rate (30% of fitness):
WinRate = Wins / TotalTrades
Normalized directly (0.0-1.0 scale)
Total P&L (30% of fitness):
Normalized_PnL = (PnL + 300) / 600
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Assumes P&L range of -300R to +300R for normalization scale.
Expectancy (25% of fitness):
Expectancy = Total_PnL / Total_Trades
Normalized_Expectancy = (Expectancy + 30) / 60
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Rewards consistency of profit per trade.
Drawdown Control (15% of fitness):
Normalized_DD = 1 - (Max_Drawdown / 15)
Clamped 0.0-1.0. Penalizes strategies that suffer large equity retracements from peak.
Sample Size Adjustment
Quality Factor:
<50 trades: 1.0 (full weight, small sample)
50-100 trades: 0.95 (slight penalty for medium sample)
100 trades: 0.85 (larger penalty for large sample)
Why penalize more trades? Prevents strategies from gaming the system by taking hundreds of tiny trades to inflate statistics. Favors quality over quantity.
Bonus Adjustments
Walk-Forward Validation Bonus:
if (WFO_Validated):
Fitness += (WFO_Efficiency - 0.5) × 0.1
Strategies proven on out-of-sample data receive up to +10% fitness boost based on test/train efficiency ratio.
Signal Efficiency Bonus (if diagnostics enabled):
if (Signals_Evaluated > 10):
Pass_Rate = Signals_Passed / Signals_Evaluated
Fitness += (Pass_Rate - 0.1) × 0.05
Rewards strategies that generate high-quality signals passing the quality gate, not just profitable trades.
Final Fitness: Clamped at 0.0 minimum (prevents negative fitness values)
Result: Elite strategies typically achieve 0.50-0.75 fitness. Anything above 0.60 is excellent. Below 0.30 is prime candidate for culling.
🔬 WALK-FORWARD OPTIMIZATION: ANTI-OVERFITTING PROTECTION
This is what separates AGE from curve-fitted garbage indicators.
The Three-Phase Process
Every new strategy undergoes a rigorous validation lifecycle:
Phase 1 - Training Window (First 250 bars, configurable 100-500):
Strategy trades normally via shadow portfolio
All trades count toward training performance metrics
System learns which gene combinations produce profitable patterns
Tracks independently: Training_Trades, Training_Wins, Training_PnL
Phase 2 - Testing Window (Next 75 bars, configurable 30-200):
Strategy continues trading without any parameter changes
Trades now count toward testing performance metrics (separate tracking)
This is out-of-sample data - strategy has never seen these bars during "optimization"
Tracks independently: Testing_Trades, Testing_Wins, Testing_PnL
Phase 3 - Validation Check:
Minimum_Trades = 5 (configurable 3-15)
IF (Train_Trades >= Minimum AND Test_Trades >= Minimum):
WR_Efficiency = Test_WinRate / Train_WinRate
Expectancy_Efficiency = Test_Expectancy / Train_Expectancy
WFO_Efficiency = (WR_Efficiency + Expectancy_Efficiency) / 2
IF (WFO_Efficiency >= 0.55): // configurable 0.3-0.9
Strategy.Validated = TRUE
Strategy receives fitness bonus
ELSE:
Strategy receives 30% fitness penalty
ELSE:
Validation deferred (insufficient trades in one or both periods)
What Validation Means
Validated Strategy (Green "✓ VAL" in dashboard):
Performed at least 55% as well on unseen data compared to training data
Gets fitness bonus: +(efficiency - 0.5) × 0.1
Receives priority during tournament selection for breeding
More likely to be chosen as active trading strategy
Unvalidated Strategy (Orange "○ TRAIN" in dashboard):
Failed to maintain performance on test data (likely curve-fitted to training period)
Receives 30% fitness penalty (0.7x multiplier)
Makes strategy prime candidate for culling
Can still trade but with lower selection probability
Insufficient Data (continues collecting):
Hasn't completed both training and testing periods yet
OR hasn't achieved minimum trade count in both periods
Validation check deferred until requirements met
Why 55% Efficiency Threshold?
If a strategy earned 10R during training but only 5.5R during testing, it still proved an edge exists beyond random luck. Requiring 100% efficiency would be unrealistic - market conditions change between periods. But requiring >50% ensures the strategy didn't completely degrade on fresh data.
The Protection: Strategies that work great on historical data but fail on new data are automatically identified and penalized. This prevents the population from being polluted by overfitted strategies that would fail in live trading.
🌊 DYNAMIC VOLATILITY SCALING (DVS): ADAPTIVE STOP/TARGET PLACEMENT
AGE doesn't use fixed stop distances. It adapts to current volatility conditions in real-time.
Four Volatility Measurement Methods
1. ATR Ratio (Simple Method):
Current_Vol = ATR(14) / Close
Baseline_Vol = SMA(Current_Vol, 100)
Ratio = Current_Vol / Baseline_Vol
Basic comparison of current ATR to 100-bar moving average baseline.
2. Parkinson (High-Low Range Based):
For each bar: HL = log(High / Low)
Parkinson_Vol = sqrt(Σ(HL²) / (4 × Period × log(2)))
More stable than close-to-close volatility. Captures intraday range expansion without overnight gap noise.
3. Garman-Klass (OHLC Based):
HL_Term = 0.5 × ²
CO_Term = (2×log(2) - 1) × ²
GK_Vol = sqrt(Σ(HL_Term - CO_Term) / Period)
Most sophisticated estimator. Incorporates all four price points (open, high, low, close) plus gap information.
4. Ensemble Method (Default - Median of All Three):
Ratio_1 = ATR_Current / ATR_Baseline
Ratio_2 = Parkinson_Current / Parkinson_Baseline
Ratio_3 = GK_Current / GK_Baseline
DVS_Ratio = Median(Ratio_1, Ratio_2, Ratio_3)
Why Ensemble?
Takes median to avoid outliers and false spikes
If ATR jumps but range-based methods stay calm, median prevents overreaction
If one method fails, other two compensate
Most robust approach across different market conditions
Sensitivity Scaling
Scaled_Ratio = (Raw_Ratio) ^ Sensitivity
Sensitivity 0.3: Cube root - heavily dampens volatility impact
Sensitivity 0.5: Square root - moderate dampening
Sensitivity 0.7 (Default): Balanced response to volatility changes
Sensitivity 1.0: Linear - full 1:1 volatility impact
Sensitivity 1.5: Exponential - amplified response to volatility spikes
Safety Clamps: Final DVS Ratio always clamped between 0.5x and 2.5x baseline to prevent extreme position sizing or stop placement errors.
How DVS Affects Shadow Trading
Every strategy's stop and target distances are multiplied by the current DVS ratio:
Stop Loss Distance:
Stop_Distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Stop_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Take Profit Distance:
Target_Distance = ATR × ATR_Mult (gene) × Target_Mult (gene) × DVS_Ratio
Example Scenario:
ATR = 10 points
Strategy's ATR_Mult gene = 2.5
Strategy's Stop_Mult gene = 1.5
Strategy's Target_Mult gene = 2.5
DVS_Ratio = 1.4 (40% above baseline volatility - market heating up)
Stop = 10 × 2.5 × 1.5 × 1.4 = 52.5 points (vs. 37.5 in normal vol)
Target = 10 × 2.5 × 2.5 × 1.4 = 87.5 points (vs. 62.5 in normal vol)
Result:
During volatility spikes: Stops automatically widen to avoid noise-based exits, targets extend for bigger moves
During calm periods: Stops tighten for better risk/reward, targets compress for realistic profit-taking
Strategies adapt risk management to match current market behavior
🧬 THE EVOLUTIONARY CYCLE: SPAWN, COMPETE, CULL
Initialization (Bar 1)
AGE begins with 4 seed strategies (if evolution enabled):
Seed Strategy #0 (Balanced):
All sensitivities at 1.0 (neutral)
Zero probability boost
Moderate trend requirement (0.4)
Standard ATR/stop/target multiples (2.5/1.5/2.5)
Mid-level regime adaptation (0.5)
Seed Strategy #1 (Momentum-Focused):
Lower entropy sensitivity (0.7), higher momentum (1.5)
Slight probability boost (+0.03)
Higher trend requirement (0.5)
Tighter stops (1.3), wider targets (3.0)
Seed Strategy #2 (Entropy-Driven):
Higher entropy sensitivity (1.5), lower momentum (0.8)
Slight probability penalty (-0.02)
More trend tolerant (0.6)
Wider stops (1.8), standard targets (2.5)
Seed Strategy #3 (Structure-Based):
Balanced entropy/momentum (0.8/0.9), high structure (1.4)
Slight probability boost (+0.02)
Lower trend requirement (0.35)
Moderate risk parameters (1.6/2.8)
All seeds start with WFO validation bypassed if WFO is disabled, or must validate if enabled.
Spawning New Strategies
Timing (Adaptive):
Historical phase: Every 30 bars (configurable 10-100)
Live phase: Every 200 bars (configurable 100-500)
Automatically switches to live timing when barstate.isrealtime triggers
Conditions:
Current population < max population limit (default: 8, configurable 4-12)
At least 2 active strategies exist (need parents)
Available slot in population array
Selection Process:
Run tournament selection 3 times with different seeds
Each tournament: randomly sample active strategies, pick highest fitness
Best from 3 tournaments becomes Parent 1
Repeat independently for Parent 2
Ensures fit parents but maintains diversity
Crossover Breeding:
For each of 10 genes:
Parent1_Fitness = fitness
Parent2_Fitness = fitness
Weight1 = Parent1_Fitness / (Parent1_Fitness + Parent2_Fitness)
Gene1 = parent1's value
Gene2 = parent2's value
Child_Gene = Weight1 × Gene1 + (1 - Weight1) × Gene2
Fitness-weighted crossover ensures fitter parent contributes more genetic material.
Mutation:
For each gene in child:
IF (random < mutation_rate):
Gene_Range = GENE_MAX - GENE_MIN
Noise = (random - 0.5) × 2 × mutation_strength × Gene_Range
Mutated_Gene = Clamp(Child_Gene + Noise, GENE_MIN, GENE_MAX)
Historical mutation rate: 20% (aggressive exploration)
Live mutation rate: 8% (conservative stability)
Mutation strength: 12% of gene range (configurable 5-25%)
Initialization of New Strategy:
Unique ID assigned (total_spawned counter)
Parent ID recorded
Generation = max(parent generations) + 1
Birth bar recorded (for age tracking)
All performance metrics zeroed
Shadow portfolio reset
WFO validation flag set to false (must prove itself)
Result: New strategy with hybrid DNA enters population, begins trading in next bar.
Competition (Every Bar)
All active strategies:
Calculate their signal based on unique DNA
Check quality gate with their thresholds
Manage shadow positions (entries/exits)
Update performance metrics
Recalculate fitness score
Track WFO validation progress
Strategies compete indirectly through fitness ranking - no direct interaction.
Culling Weak Strategies
Timing (Adaptive):
Historical phase: Every 60 bars (configurable 20-200, should be 2x spawn interval)
Live phase: Every 400 bars (configurable 200-1000, should be 2x spawn interval)
Minimum Adaptation Score (MAS):
Initial MAS = 0.10
MAS decays: MAS × 0.995 every cull cycle
Minimum MAS = 0.03 (floor)
MAS represents the "survival threshold" - strategies below this fitness level are vulnerable.
Culling Conditions (ALL must be true):
Population > minimum population (default: 3, configurable 2-4)
At least one strategy has fitness < MAS
Strategy's age > culling interval (prevents premature culling of new strategies)
Strategy is not in top N elite (default: 2, configurable 1-3)
Culling Process:
Find worst strategy:
For each active strategy:
IF (age > cull_interval):
Fitness = base_fitness
IF (not WFO_validated AND WFO_enabled):
Fitness × 0.7 // 30% penalty for unvalidated
IF (Fitness < MAS AND Fitness < worst_fitness_found):
worst_strategy = this_strategy
worst_fitness = Fitness
IF (worst_strategy found):
Count elite strategies with fitness > worst_fitness
IF (elite_count >= elite_preservation_count):
Deactivate worst_strategy (set active flag = false)
Increment total_culled counter
Elite Protection:
Even if a strategy's fitness falls below MAS, it survives if fewer than N strategies are better. This prevents culling when population is generally weak.
Result: Weak strategies removed from population, freeing slots for new spawns. Gene pool improves over time.
Selection for Display (Every Bar)
AGE chooses one strategy to display signals:
Best fitness = -1
Selected = none
For each active strategy:
Fitness = base_fitness
IF (WFO_validated):
Fitness × 1.3 // 30% bonus for validated strategies
IF (Fitness > best_fitness):
best_fitness = Fitness
selected_strategy = this_strategy
Display selected strategy's signals on chart
Result: Only the highest-fitness (optionally validated-boosted) strategy's signals appear as chart markers. Other strategies trade invisibly in shadow portfolios.
🎨 PREMIUM VISUALIZATION SYSTEM
AGE includes sophisticated visual feedback that standard indicators lack:
1. Gradient Probability Cloud (Optional, Default: ON)
Multi-layer gradient showing signal buildup 2-3 bars before entry:
Activation Conditions:
Signal persistence > 0 (same directional signal held for multiple bars)
Signal probability ≥ minimum threshold (65% by default)
Signal hasn't yet executed (still in "forming" state)
Visual Construction:
7 gradient layers by default (configurable 3-15)
Each layer is a line-fill pair (top line, bottom line, filled between)
Layer spacing: 0.3 to 1.0 × ATR above/below price
Outer layers = faint, inner layers = bright
Color transitions from base to intense based on layer position
Transparency scales with probability (high prob = more opaque)
Color Selection:
Long signals: Gradient from theme.gradient_bull_mid to theme.gradient_bull_strong
Short signals: Gradient from theme.gradient_bear_mid to theme.gradient_bear_strong
Base transparency: 92%, reduces by up to 8% for high-probability setups
Dynamic Behavior:
Cloud grows/shrinks as signal persistence increases/decreases
Redraws every bar while signal is forming
Disappears when signal executes or invalidates
Performance Note: Computationally expensive due to linefill objects. Disable or reduce layers if chart performance degrades.
2. Population Fitness Ribbon (Optional, Default: ON)
Histogram showing fitness distribution across active strategies:
Activation: Only draws on last bar (barstate.islast) to avoid historical clutter
Visual Construction:
10 histogram layers by default (configurable 5-20)
Plots 50 bars back from current bar
Positioned below price at: lowest_low(100) - 1.5×ATR (doesn't interfere with price action)
Each layer represents a fitness threshold (evenly spaced min to max fitness)
Layer Logic:
For layer_num from 0 to ribbon_layers:
Fitness_threshold = min_fitness + (max_fitness - min_fitness) × (layer / layers)
Count strategies with fitness ≥ threshold
Height = ATR × 0.15 × (count / total_active)
Y_position = base_level + ATR × 0.2 × layer
Color = Gradient from weak to strong based on layer position
Line_width = Scaled by height (taller = thicker)
Visual Feedback:
Tall, bright ribbon = healthy population, many fit strategies at high fitness levels
Short, dim ribbon = weak population, few strategies achieving good fitness
Ribbon compression (layers close together) = population converging to similar fitness
Ribbon spread = diverse fitness range, active selection pressure
Use Case: Quick visual health check without opening dashboard. Ribbon growing upward over time = population improving.
3. Confidence Halo (Optional, Default: ON)
Circular polyline around entry signals showing probability strength:
Activation: Draws when new position opens (shadow_position changes from 0 to ±1)
Visual Construction:
20-segment polyline forming approximate circle
Center: Low - 0.5×ATR (long) or High + 0.5×ATR (short)
Radius: 0.3×ATR (low confidence) to 1.0×ATR (elite confidence)
Scales with: (probability - min_probability) / (1.0 - min_probability)
Color Coding:
Elite (85%+): Cyan (theme.conf_elite), large radius, minimal transparency (40%)
Strong (75-85%): Strong green (theme.conf_strong), medium radius, moderate transparency (50%)
Good (65-75%): Good green (theme.conf_good), smaller radius, more transparent (60%)
Moderate (<65%): Moderate green (theme.conf_moderate), tiny radius, very transparent (70%)
Technical Detail:
Uses chart.point array with index-based positioning
5-bar horizontal spread for circular appearance (±5 bars from entry)
Curved=false (Pine Script polyline limitation)
Fill color matches line color but more transparent (88% vs line's transparency)
Purpose: Instant visual probability assessment. No need to check dashboard - halo size/brightness tells the story.
4. Evolution Event Markers (Optional, Default: ON)
Visual indicators of genetic algorithm activity:
Spawn Markers (Diamond, Cyan):
Plots when total_spawned increases on current bar
Location: bottom of chart (location.bottom)
Color: theme.spawn_marker (cyan/bright blue)
Size: tiny
Indicates new strategy just entered population
Cull Markers (X-Cross, Red):
Plots when total_culled increases on current bar
Location: bottom of chart (location.bottom)
Color: theme.cull_marker (red/pink)
Size: tiny
Indicates weak strategy just removed from population
What It Tells You:
Frequent spawning early = population building, active exploration
Frequent culling early = high selection pressure, weak strategies dying fast
Balanced spawn/cull = healthy evolutionary churn
No markers for long periods = stable population (evolution plateaued or optimal genes found)
5. Entry/Exit Markers
Clear visual signals for selected strategy's trades:
Long Entry (Triangle Up, Green):
Plots when selected strategy opens long position (position changes 0 → +1)
Location: below bar (location.belowbar)
Color: theme.long_primary (green/cyan depending on theme)
Transparency: Scales with probability:
Elite (85%+): 0% (fully opaque)
Strong (75-85%): 10%
Good (65-75%): 20%
Acceptable (55-65%): 35%
Size: small
Short Entry (Triangle Down, Red):
Plots when selected strategy opens short position (position changes 0 → -1)
Location: above bar (location.abovebar)
Color: theme.short_primary (red/pink depending on theme)
Transparency: Same scaling as long entries
Size: small
Exit (X-Cross, Orange):
Plots when selected strategy closes position (position changes ±1 → 0)
Location: absolute (at actual exit price if stop/target lines enabled)
Color: theme.exit_color (orange/yellow depending on theme)
Transparency: 0% (fully opaque)
Size: tiny
Result: Clean, probability-scaled markers that don't clutter chart but convey essential information.
6. Stop Loss & Take Profit Lines (Optional, Default: ON)
Visual representation of shadow portfolio risk levels:
Stop Loss Line:
Plots when selected strategy has active position
Level: shadow_stop value from selected strategy
Color: theme.short_primary with 60% transparency (red/pink, subtle)
Width: 2
Style: plot.style_linebr (breaks when no position)
Take Profit Line:
Plots when selected strategy has active position
Level: shadow_target value from selected strategy
Color: theme.long_primary with 60% transparency (green, subtle)
Width: 2
Style: plot.style_linebr (breaks when no position)
Purpose:
Shows where shadow portfolio would exit for stop/target
Helps visualize strategy's risk/reward ratio
Useful for manual traders to set similar levels
Disable for cleaner chart (recommended for presentations)
7. Dynamic Trend EMA
Gradient-colored trend line that visualizes trend strength:
Calculation:
EMA(close, trend_length) - default 50 period (configurable 20-100)
Slope calculated over 10 bars: (current_ema - ema ) / ema × 100
Color Logic:
Trend_direction:
Slope > 0.1% = Bullish (1)
Slope < -0.1% = Bearish (-1)
Otherwise = Neutral (0)
Trend_strength = abs(slope)
Color = Gradient between:
- Neutral color (gray/purple)
- Strong bullish (bright green) if direction = 1
- Strong bearish (bright red) if direction = -1
Gradient factor = trend_strength (0 to 1+ scale)
Visual Behavior:
Faint gray/purple = weak/no trend (choppy conditions)
Light green/red = emerging trend (low strength)
Bright green/red = strong trend (high conviction)
Color intensity = trend strength magnitude
Transparency: 50% (subtle, doesn't overpower price action)
Purpose: Subconscious awareness of trend state without checking dashboard or indicators.
8. Regime Background Tinting (Subtle)
Ultra-low opacity background color indicating detected market regime:
Regime Detection:
Efficiency = directional_movement / total_range (over trend_length bars)
Vol_ratio = current_volatility / average_volatility
IF (efficiency > 0.5 AND vol_ratio < 1.3):
Regime = Trending (1)
ELSE IF (vol_ratio > 1.5):
Regime = Volatile (2)
ELSE:
Regime = Choppy (0)
Background Colors:
Trending: theme.regime_trending (dark green, 92-93% transparency)
Volatile: theme.regime_volatile (dark red, 93% transparency)
Choppy: No tint (normal background)
Purpose:
Subliminal regime awareness
Helps explain why signals are/aren't generating
Trending = ideal conditions for AGE
Volatile = fewer signals, higher thresholds applied
Choppy = mixed signals, lower confidence
Important: Extremely subtle by design. Not meant to be obvious, just subconscious context.
📊 ENHANCED DASHBOARD
Comprehensive real-time metrics in single organized panel (top-right position):
Dashboard Structure (5 columns × 14 rows)
Header Row:
Column 0: "🧬 AGE PRO" + phase indicator (🔴 LIVE or ⏪ HIST)
Column 1: "POPULATION"
Column 2: "PERFORMANCE"
Column 3: "CURRENT SIGNAL"
Column 4: "ACTIVE STRATEGY"
Column 0: Market State
Regime (📈 TREND / 🌊 CHAOS / ➖ CHOP)
DVS Ratio (current volatility scaling factor, format: #.##)
Trend Direction (▲ BULL / ▼ BEAR / ➖ FLAT with color coding)
Trend Strength (0-100 scale, format: #.##)
Column 1: Population Metrics
Active strategies (count / max_population)
Validated strategies (WFO passed / active total)
Current generation number
Total spawned (all-time strategy births)
Total culled (all-time strategy deaths)
Column 2: Aggregate Performance
Total trades across all active strategies
Aggregate win rate (%) - color-coded:
Green (>55%)
Orange (45-55%)
Red (<45%)
Total P&L in R-multiples - color-coded by positive/negative
Best fitness score in population (format: #.###)
MAS - Minimum Adaptation Score (cull threshold, format: #.###)
Column 3: Current Signal Status
Status indicator:
"▲ LONG" (green) if selected strategy in long position
"▼ SHORT" (red) if selected strategy in short position
"⏳ FORMING" (orange) if signal persisting but not yet executed
"○ WAITING" (gray) if no active signal
Confidence percentage (0-100%, format: #.#%)
Quality assessment:
"🔥 ELITE" (cyan) for 85%+ probability
"✓ STRONG" (bright green) for 75-85%
"○ GOOD" (green) for 65-75%
"- LOW" (dim) for <65%
Confluence score (X/3 format)
Signal age:
"X bars" if signal forming
"IN TRADE" if position active
"---" if no signal
Column 4: Selected Strategy Details
Strategy ID number (#X format)
Validation status:
"✓ VAL" (green) if WFO validated
"○ TRAIN" (orange) if still in training/testing phase
Generation number (GX format)
Personal fitness score (format: #.### with color coding)
Trade count
P&L and win rate (format: #.#R (##%) with color coding)
Color Scheme:
Panel background: theme.panel_bg (dark, low opacity)
Panel headers: theme.panel_header (slightly lighter)
Primary text: theme.text_primary (bright, high contrast)
Secondary text: theme.text_secondary (dim, lower contrast)
Positive metrics: theme.metric_positive (green)
Warning metrics: theme.metric_warning (orange)
Negative metrics: theme.metric_negative (red)
Special markers: theme.validated_marker, theme.spawn_marker
Update Frequency: Only on barstate.islast (current bar) to minimize CPU usage
Purpose:
Quick overview of entire system state
No need to check multiple indicators
Trading decisions informed by population health, regime state, and signal quality
Transparency into what AGE is thinking
🔍 DIAGNOSTICS PANEL (Optional, Default: OFF)
Detailed signal quality tracking for optimization and debugging:
Panel Structure (3 columns × 8 rows)
Position: Bottom-right corner (doesn't interfere with main dashboard)
Header Row:
Column 0: "🔍 DIAGNOSTICS"
Column 1: "COUNT"
Column 2: "%"
Metrics Tracked (for selected strategy only):
Total Evaluated:
Every signal that passed initial calculation (direction ≠ 0)
Represents total opportunities considered
✓ Passed:
Signals that passed quality gate and executed
Green color coding
Percentage of evaluated signals
Rejection Breakdown:
⨯ Probability:
Rejected because probability < minimum threshold
Most common rejection reason typically
⨯ Confluence:
Rejected because confluence < minimum required (e.g., only 1 of 3 indicators agreed)
⨯ Trend:
Rejected because signal opposed strong trend
Indicates counter-trend protection working
⨯ Regime:
Rejected because volatile regime detected and probability wasn't high enough to override
Shows regime filter in action
⨯ Volume:
Rejected because volume < 70% of 20-bar average
Indicates volume confirmation requirement
Color Coding:
Passed count: Green (success metric)
Rejection counts: Red (failure metrics)
Percentages: Gray (neutral, informational)
Performance Cost: Slight CPU overhead for tracking counters. Disable when not actively optimizing settings.
How to Use Diagnostics
Scenario 1: Too Few Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 10 (5%)
⨯ Probability: 120 (60%)
⨯ Confluence: 40 (20%)
⨯ Others: 30 (15%)
Diagnosis: Probability threshold too high for this strategy's DNA.
Solution: Lower min probability from 65% to 60%, or allow strategy more time to evolve better DNA.
Scenario 2: Too Many False Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 80 (40%)
Strategy win rate: 45%
Diagnosis: Quality gate too loose, letting low-quality signals through.
Solution: Raise min probability to 70%, or increase min confluence to 3 (all indicators must agree).
Scenario 3: Regime-Specific Issues
⨯ Regime: 90 (45% of rejections)
Diagnosis: Frequent volatile regime detection blocking otherwise good signals.
Solution: Either accept fewer trades during chaos (recommended), or disable regime filter if you want signals regardless of market state.
Optimization Workflow:
Enable diagnostics
Run 200+ bars
Analyze rejection patterns
Adjust settings based on data
Re-run and compare pass rate
Disable diagnostics when satisfied
⚙️ CONFIGURATION GUIDE
🧬 Evolution Engine Settings
Enable AGE Evolution (Default: ON):
ON: Full genetic algorithm (recommended for best results)
OFF: Uses only 4 seed strategies, no spawning/culling (static population for comparison testing)
Max Population (4-12, Default: 8):
Higher = more diversity, more exploration, slower performance
Lower = faster computation, less exploration, risk of premature convergence
Sweet spot: 6-8 for most use cases
4 = minimum for meaningful evolution
12 = maximum before diminishing returns
Min Population (2-4, Default: 3):
Safety floor - system never culls below this count
Prevents population extinction during harsh selection
Should be at least half of max population
Elite Preservation (1-3, Default: 2):
Top N performers completely immune to culling
Ensures best genes always survive
1 = minimal protection, aggressive selection
2 = balanced (recommended)
3 = conservative, slower gene pool turnover
Historical: Spawn Interval (10-100, Default: 30):
Bars between spawning new strategies during historical data
Lower = faster evolution, more exploration
Higher = slower evolution, more evaluation time per strategy
30 bars = ~1-2 hours on 15min chart
Historical: Cull Interval (20-200, Default: 60):
Bars between culling weak strategies during historical data
Should be 2x spawn interval for balanced churn
Lower = aggressive selection pressure
Higher = patient evaluation
Live: Spawn Interval (100-500, Default: 200):
Bars between spawning during live trading
Much slower than historical for stability
Prevents population chaos during live trading
200 bars = ~1.5 trading days on 15min chart
Live: Cull Interval (200-1000, Default: 400):
Bars between culling during live trading
Should be 2x live spawn interval
Conservative removal during live trading
Historical: Mutation Rate (0.05-0.40, Default: 0.20):
Probability each gene mutates during breeding (20% = 2 out of 10 genes on average)
Higher = more exploration, slower convergence
Lower = more exploitation, faster convergence but risk of local optima
20% balances exploration vs exploitation
Live: Mutation Rate (0.02-0.20, Default: 0.08):
Mutation rate during live trading
Much lower for stability (don't want population to suddenly degrade)
8% = mostly inherits parent genes with small tweaks
Mutation Strength (0.05-0.25, Default: 0.12):
How much genes change when mutated (% of gene's total range)
0.05 = tiny nudges (fine-tuning)
0.12 = moderate jumps (recommended)
0.25 = large leaps (aggressive exploration)
Example: If gene range is 0.5-2.0, 12% strength = ±0.18 possible change
📈 Signal Quality Settings
Min Signal Probability (0.55-0.80, Default: 0.65):
Quality gate threshold - signals below this never generate
0.55-0.60 = More signals, accept lower confidence (higher risk)
0.65 = Institutional-grade balance (recommended)
0.70-0.75 = Fewer but higher-quality signals (conservative)
0.80+ = Very selective, very few signals (ultra-conservative)
Min Confluence Score (1-3, Default: 2):
Required indicator agreement before signal generates
1 = Any single indicator can trigger (not recommended - too many false signals)
2 = Requires 2 of 3 indicators agree (RECOMMENDED for balance)
3 = All 3 must agree (very selective, few signals, high quality)
Base Persistence Bars (1-5, Default: 2):
Base bars signal must persist before entry
System adapts automatically:
High probability signals (75%+) enter 1 bar faster
Low probability signals (<68%) need 1 bar more
Trending regime: -1 bar (faster entries)
Volatile regime: +1 bar (more confirmation)
1 = Immediate entry after quality gate (responsive but prone to whipsaw)
2 = Balanced confirmation (recommended)
3-5 = Patient confirmation (slower but more reliable)
Cooldown After Trade (3-20, Default: 8):
Bars to wait after exit before next entry allowed
Prevents overtrading and revenge trading
3 = Minimal cooldown (active trading)
8 = Balanced (recommended)
15-20 = Conservative (position trading)
Entropy Length (10-50, Default: 20):
Lookback period for market order/disorder calculation
Lower = more responsive to regime changes (noisy)
Higher = more stable regime detection (laggy)
20 = works across most timeframes
Momentum Length (5-30, Default: 14):
Period for RSI/ROC calculations
14 = standard (RSI default)
Lower = more signals, less reliable
Higher = fewer signals, more reliable
Structure Length (20-100, Default: 50):
Lookback for support/resistance swing range
20 = short-term swings (day trading)
50 = medium-term structure (recommended)
100 = major structure (position trading)
Trend EMA Length (20-100, Default: 50):
EMA period for trend detection and direction bias
20 = short-term trend (responsive)
50 = medium-term trend (recommended)
100 = long-term trend (position trading)
ATR Period (5-30, Default: 14):
Period for volatility measurement
14 = standard ATR
Lower = more responsive to vol changes
Higher = smoother vol calculation
📊 Volatility Scaling (DVS) Settings
Enable DVS (Default: ON):
Dynamic volatility scaling for adaptive stop/target placement
Highly recommended to leave ON
OFF only for testing fixed-distance stops
DVS Method (Default: Ensemble):
ATR Ratio: Simple, fast, single-method (good for beginners)
Parkinson: High-low range based (good for intraday)
Garman-Klass: OHLC based (sophisticated, considers gaps)
Ensemble: Median of all three (RECOMMENDED - most robust)
DVS Memory (20-200, Default: 100):
Lookback for baseline volatility comparison
20 = very responsive to vol changes (can overreact)
100 = balanced adaptation (recommended)
200 = slow, stable baseline (minimizes false vol signals)
DVS Sensitivity (0.3-1.5, Default: 0.7):
How much volatility affects scaling (power-law exponent)
0.3 = Conservative, heavily dampens vol impact (cube root)
0.5 = Moderate dampening (square root)
0.7 = Balanced response (recommended)
1.0 = Linear, full 1:1 vol response
1.5 = Aggressive, amplified response (exponential)
🔬 Walk-Forward Optimization Settings
Enable WFO (Default: ON):
Out-of-sample validation to prevent overfitting
Highly recommended to leave ON
OFF only for testing or if you want unvalidated strategies
Training Window (100-500, Default: 250):
Bars for in-sample optimization
100 = fast validation, less data (risky)
250 = balanced (recommended) - about 1-2 months on daily, 1-2 weeks on 15min
500 = patient validation, more data (conservative)
Testing Window (30-200, Default: 75):
Bars for out-of-sample validation
Should be ~30% of training window
30 = minimal test (fast validation)
75 = balanced (recommended)
200 = extensive test (very conservative)
Min Trades for Validation (3-15, Default: 5):
Required trades in BOTH training AND testing periods
3 = minimal sample (risky, fast validation)
5 = balanced (recommended)
10+ = conservative (slow validation, high confidence)
WFO Efficiency Threshold (0.3-0.9, Default: 0.55):
Minimum test/train performance ratio required
0.30 = Very loose (test must be 30% as good as training)
0.55 = Balanced (recommended) - test must be 55% as good
0.70+ = Strict (test must closely match training)
Higher = fewer validated strategies, lower risk of overfitting
🎨 Premium Visuals Settings
Visual Theme:
Neon Genesis: Cyberpunk aesthetic (cyan/magenta/purple)
Carbon Fiber: Industrial look (blue/red/gray)
Quantum Blue: Quantum computing (blue/purple/pink)
Aurora: Northern lights (teal/orange/purple)
⚡ Gradient Probability Cloud (Default: ON):
Multi-layer gradient showing signal buildup
Turn OFF if chart lags or for cleaner look
Cloud Gradient Layers (3-15, Default: 7):
More layers = smoother gradient, more CPU intensive
Fewer layers = faster, blockier appearance
🎗️ Population Fitness Ribbon (Default: ON):
Histogram showing fitness distribution
Turn OFF for cleaner chart
Ribbon Layers (5-20, Default: 10):
More layers = finer fitness detail
Fewer layers = simpler histogram
⭕ Signal Confidence Halo (Default: ON):
Circular indicator around entry signals
Size/brightness scales with probability
Minimal performance cost
🔬 Evolution Event Markers (Default: ON):
Diamond (spawn) and X (cull) markers
Shows genetic algorithm activity
Minimal performance cost
🎯 Stop/Target Lines (Default: ON):
Shows shadow portfolio stop/target levels
Turn OFF for cleaner chart (recommended for screenshots/presentations)
📊 Enhanced Dashboard (Default: ON):
Comprehensive metrics panel
Should stay ON unless you want zero overlays
🔍 Diagnostics Panel (Default: OFF):
Detailed signal rejection tracking
Turn ON when optimizing settings
Turn OFF during normal use (slight performance cost)
📈 USAGE WORKFLOW - HOW TO USE THIS INDICATOR
Phase 1: Initial Setup & Learning
Add AGE to your chart
Recommended timeframes: 15min, 30min, 1H (best signal-to-noise ratio)
Works on: 5min (day trading), 4H (swing trading), Daily (position trading)
Load 1000+ bars for sufficient evolution history
Let the population evolve (100+ bars minimum)
First 50 bars: Random exploration, poor results expected
Bars 50-150: Population converging, fitness improving
Bars 150+: Stable performance, validated strategies emerging
Watch the dashboard metrics
Population should grow toward max capacity
Generation number should advance regularly
Validated strategies counter should increase
Best fitness should trend upward toward 0.50-0.70 range
Observe evolution markers
Diamond markers (cyan) = new strategies spawning
X markers (red) = weak strategies being culled
Frequent early activity = healthy evolution
Activity slowing = population stabilizing
Be patient. Evolution takes time. Don't judge performance before 150+ bars.
Phase 2: Signal Observation
Watch signals form
Gradient cloud builds up 2-3 bars before entry
Cloud brightness = probability strength
Cloud thickness = signal persistence
Check signal quality
Look at confidence halo size when entry marker appears
Large bright halo = elite setup (85%+)
Medium halo = strong setup (75-85%)
Small halo = good setup (65-75%)
Verify market conditions
Check trend EMA color (green = uptrend, red = downtrend, gray = choppy)
Check background tint (green = trending, red = volatile, clear = choppy)
Trending background + aligned signal = ideal conditions
Review dashboard signal status
Current Signal column shows:
Status (Long/Short/Forming/Waiting)
Confidence % (actual probability value)
Quality assessment (Elite/Strong/Good)
Confluence score (2/3 or 3/3 preferred)
Only signals meeting ALL quality gates appear on chart. If you're not seeing signals, population is either still learning or market conditions aren't suitable.
Phase 3: Manual Trading Execution
When Long Signal Fires:
Verify confidence level (dashboard or halo size)
Confirm trend alignment (EMA sloping up, green color)
Check regime (preferably trending or choppy, avoid volatile)
Enter long manually on your broker platform
Set stop loss at displayed stop line level (if lines enabled), or use your own risk management
Set take profit at displayed target line level, or trail manually
Monitor position - exit if X marker appears (signal reversal)
When Short Signal Fires:
Same verification process
Confirm downtrend (EMA sloping down, red color)
Enter short manually
Use displayed stop/target levels or your own
AGE tells you WHEN and HOW CONFIDENT. You decide WHETHER and HOW MUCH.
Phase 4: Set Up Alerts (Never Miss a Signal)
Right-click on indicator name in legend
Select "Add Alert"
Choose condition:
"AGE Long" = Long entry signal fired
"AGE Short" = Short entry signal fired
"AGE Exit" = Position reversal/exit signal
Set notification method:
Sound alert (popup on chart)
Email notification
Webhook to phone/trading platform
Mobile app push notification
Name the alert (e.g., "AGE BTCUSD 15min Long")
Save alert
Recommended: Set alerts for both long and short, enable mobile push notifications. You'll get alerted in real-time even if not watching charts.
Phase 5: Monitor Population Health
Weekly Review:
Check dashboard Population column:
Active count should be near max (6-8 of 8)
Validated count should be >50% of active
Generation should be advancing (1-2 per week typical)
Check dashboard Performance column:
Aggregate win rate should be >50% (target: 55-65%)
Total P&L should be positive (may fluctuate)
Best fitness should be >0.50 (target: 0.55-0.70)
MAS should be declining slowly (normal adaptation)
Check Active Strategy column:
Selected strategy should be validated (✓ VAL)
Personal fitness should match best fitness
Trade count should be accumulating
Win rate should be >50%
Warning Signs:
Zero validated strategies after 300+ bars = settings too strict or market unsuitable
Best fitness stuck <0.30 = population struggling, consider parameter adjustment
No spawning/culling for 200+ bars = evolution stalled (may be optimal or need reset)
Aggregate win rate <45% sustained = system not working on this instrument/timeframe
Health Check Pass:
50%+ strategies validated
Best fitness >0.50
Aggregate win rate >52%
Regular spawn/cull activity
Selected strategy validated
Phase 6: Optimization (If Needed)
Enable Diagnostics Panel (bottom-right) for data-driven tuning:
Problem: Too Few Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 8 (4%)
⨯ Probability: 140 (70%)
Solutions:
Lower min probability: 65% → 60% or 55%
Reduce min confluence: 2 → 1
Lower base persistence: 2 → 1
Increase mutation rate temporarily to explore new genes
Check if regime filter is blocking signals (⨯ Regime high?)
Problem: Too Many False Signals
Evaluated: 200
Passed: 90 (45%)
Win rate: 42%
Solutions:
Raise min probability: 65% → 70% or 75%
Increase min confluence: 2 → 3
Raise base persistence: 2 → 3
Enable WFO if disabled (validates strategies before use)
Check if volume filter is being ignored (⨯ Volume low?)
Problem: Counter-Trend Losses
⨯ Trend: 5 (only 5% rejected)
Losses often occur against trend
Solutions:
System should already filter trend opposition
May need stronger trend requirement
Consider only taking signals aligned with higher timeframe trend
Use longer trend EMA (50 → 100)
Problem: Volatile Market Whipsaws
⨯ Regime: 100 (50% rejected by volatile regime)
Still getting stopped out frequently
Solutions:
System is correctly blocking volatile signals
Losses happening because vol filter isn't strict enough
Consider not trading during volatile periods (respect the regime)
Or disable regime filter and accept higher risk
Optimization Workflow:
Enable diagnostics
Run 200+ bars with current settings
Analyze rejection patterns and win rate
Make ONE change at a time (scientific method)
Re-run 200+ bars and compare results
Keep change if improvement, revert if worse
Disable diagnostics when satisfied
Never change multiple parameters at once - you won't know what worked.
Phase 7: Multi-Instrument Deployment
AGE learns independently on each chart:
Recommended Strategy:
Deploy AGE on 3-5 different instruments
Different asset classes ideal (e.g., ES futures, EURUSD, BTCUSD, SPY, Gold)
Each learns optimal strategies for that instrument's personality
Take signals from all 5 charts
Natural diversification reduces overall risk
Why This Works:
When one market is choppy, others may be trending
Different instruments respond to different news/catalysts
Portfolio-level win rate more stable than single-instrument
Evolution explores different parameter spaces on each chart
Setup:
Same settings across all charts (or customize if preferred)
Set alerts for all
Take every validated signal across all instruments
Position size based on total account (don't overleverage any single signal)
⚠️ REALISTIC EXPECTATIONS - CRITICAL READING
What AGE Can Do
✅ Generate probability-weighted signals using genetic algorithms
✅ Evolve strategies in real-time through natural selection
✅ Validate strategies on out-of-sample data (walk-forward optimization)
✅ Adapt to changing market conditions automatically over time
✅ Provide comprehensive metrics on population health and signal quality
✅ Work on any instrument, any timeframe, any broker
✅ Improve over time as weak strategies are culled and fit strategies breed
What AGE Cannot Do
❌ Win every trade (typical win rate: 55-65% at best)
❌ Predict the future with certainty (markets are probabilistic, not deterministic)
❌ Work perfectly from bar 1 (needs 100-150 bars to learn and stabilize)
❌ Guarantee profits under all market conditions
❌ Replace your trading discipline and risk management
❌ Execute trades automatically (this is an indicator, not a strategy)
❌ Prevent all losses (drawdowns are normal and expected)
❌ Adapt instantly to regime changes (re-learning takes 50-100 bars)
Performance Realities
Typical Performance After Evolution Stabilizes (150+ bars):
Win Rate: 55-65% (excellent for trend-following systems)
Profit Factor: 1.5-2.5 (realistic for validated strategies)
Signal Frequency: 5-15 signals per 100 bars (quality over quantity)
Drawdown Periods: 20-40% of time in equity retracement (normal trading reality)
Max Consecutive Losses: 5-8 losses possible even with 60% win rate (probability says this is normal)
Evolution Timeline:
Bars 0-50: Random exploration, learning phase - poor results expected, don't judge yet
Bars 50-150: Population converging, fitness climbing - results improving
Bars 150-300: Stable performance, most strategies validated - consistent results
Bars 300+: Mature population, optimal genes dominant - best results
Market Condition Dependency:
Trending Markets: AGE excels - clear directional moves, high-probability setups
Choppy Markets: AGE struggles - fewer signals generated, lower win rate
Volatile Markets: AGE cautious - higher rejection rate, wider stops, fewer trades
Market Regime Changes:
When market shifts from trending to choppy overnight
Validated strategies can become temporarily invalidated
AGE will adapt through evolution, but not instantly
Expect 50-100 bar re-learning period after major regime shifts
Fitness may temporarily drop then recover
This is NOT a holy grail. It's a sophisticated signal generator that learns and adapts using genetic algorithms. Your success depends on:
Patience during learning periods (don't abandon after 3 losses)
Proper position sizing (risk 0.5-2% per trade, not 10%)
Following signals consistently (cherry-picking defeats statistical edge)
Not abandoning system prematurely (give it 200+ bars minimum)
Understanding probability (60% win rate means 40% of trades WILL lose)
Respecting market conditions (trending = trade more, choppy = trade less)
Managing emotions (AGE is emotionless, you need to be too)
Expected Drawdowns:
Single-strategy max DD: 10-20% of equity (normal)
Portfolio across multiple instruments: 5-15% (diversification helps)
Losing streaks: 3-5 consecutive losses expected periodically
No indicator eliminates risk. AGE manages risk through:
Quality gates (rejecting low-probability signals)
Confluence requirements (multi-indicator confirmation)
Persistence requirements (no knee-jerk reactions)
Regime awareness (reduced trading in chaos)
Walk-forward validation (preventing overfitting)
But it cannot prevent all losses. That's inherent to trading.
🔧 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Platform: TradingView Pine Script v5
Indicator Type: Overlay indicator (plots on price chart)
Execution Type: Signals only - no automatic order placement
Computational Load:
Moderate to High (genetic algorithms + shadow portfolios)
8 strategies × shadow portfolio simulation = significant computation
Premium visuals add additional load (gradient cloud, fitness ribbon)
TradingView Resource Limits (Built-in Caps):
Max Bars Back: 500 (sufficient for WFO and evolution)
Max Labels: 100 (plenty for entry/exit markers)
Max Lines: 150 (adequate for stop/target lines)
Max Boxes: 50 (not heavily used)
Max Polylines: 100 (confidence halos)
Recommended Chart Settings:
Timeframe: 15min to 1H (optimal signal/noise balance)
5min: Works but noisier, more signals
4H/Daily: Works but fewer signals
Bars Loaded: 1000+ (ensures sufficient evolution history)
Replay Mode: Excellent for testing without risk
Performance Optimization Tips:
Disable gradient cloud if chart lags (most CPU intensive visual)
Disable fitness ribbon if still laggy
Reduce cloud layers from 7 to 3
Reduce ribbon layers from 10 to 5
Turn off diagnostics panel unless actively tuning
Close other heavy indicators to free resources
Browser/Platform Compatibility:
Works on all modern browsers (Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Edge)
Mobile app supported (full functionality on phone/tablet)
Desktop app supported (best performance)
Web version supported (may be slower on older computers)
Data Requirements:
Real-time or delayed data both work
No special data feeds required
Works with TradingView's standard data
Historical + live data seamlessly integrated
🎓 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS
AGE synthesizes advanced concepts from multiple disciplines:
Evolutionary Computation
Genetic Algorithms (Holland, 1975): Population-based optimization through natural selection metaphor
Tournament Selection: Fitness-based parent selection with diversity preservation
Crossover Operators: Fitness-weighted gene recombination from two parents
Mutation Operators: Random gene perturbation for exploration of new parameter space
Elitism: Preservation of top N performers to prevent loss of best solutions
Adaptive Parameters: Different mutation rates for historical vs. live phases
Technical Analysis
Support/Resistance: Price structure within swing ranges
Trend Following: EMA-based directional bias
Momentum Analysis: RSI, ROC, MACD composite indicators
Volatility Analysis: ATR-based risk scaling
Volume Confirmation: Trade activity validation
Information Theory
Shannon Entropy (1948): Quantification of market order vs. disorder
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Directional information vs. random walk
Information Content: How much "information" a price move contains
Statistics & Probability
Walk-Forward Analysis: Rolling in-sample/out-of-sample optimization
Out-of-Sample Validation: Testing on unseen data to prevent overfitting
Monte Carlo Principles: Shadow portfolio simulation with realistic execution
Expectancy Theory: Win rate × avg win - loss rate × avg loss
Probability Distributions: Signal confidence quantification
Risk Management
ATR-Based Stops: Volatility-normalized risk per trade
Volatility Regime Detection: Market state classification (trending/choppy/volatile)
Drawdown Control: Peak-to-trough equity measurement
R-Multiple Normalization: Performance measurement in risk units
Machine Learning Concepts
Online Learning: Continuous adaptation as new data arrives
Fitness Functions: Multi-objective optimization (win rate + expectancy + drawdown)
Exploration vs. Exploitation: Balance between trying new strategies and using proven ones
Overfitting Prevention: Walk-forward validation as regularization
Novel Contribution:
AGE is the first TradingView indicator to apply genetic algorithms to real-time indicator parameter optimization while maintaining strict anti-overfitting controls through walk-forward validation.
Most "adaptive" indicators simply recalibrate lookback periods or thresholds. AGE evolves entirely new strategies through competitive selection - it's not parameter tuning, it's Darwinian evolution of trading logic itself.
The combination of:
Genetic algorithm population management
Shadow portfolio simulation for realistic fitness evaluation
Walk-forward validation to prevent overfitting
Multi-indicator confluence for signal quality
Dynamic volatility scaling for adaptive risk
...creates a system that genuinely learns and improves over time while avoiding the curse of curve-fitting that plagues most optimization approaches.
🏗️ DEVELOPMENT NOTES
This project represents months of intensive development, facing significant technical challenges:
Challenge 1: Making Genetics Actually Work
Early versions spawned garbage strategies that polluted the gene pool:
Random gene combinations produced nonsensical parameter sets
Weak strategies survived too long, dragging down population
No clear convergence toward optimal solutions
Solution:
Comprehensive fitness scoring (4 factors: win rate, P&L, expectancy, drawdown)
Elite preservation (top 2 always protected)
Walk-forward validation (unproven strategies penalized 30%)
Tournament selection (fitness-weighted breeding)
Adaptive culling (MAS decay creates increasing selection pressure)
Challenge 2: Balancing Evolution Speed vs. Stability
Too fast = population chaos, no convergence. Too slow = can't adapt to regime changes.
Solution:
Dual-phase timing: Fast evolution during historical (30/60 bar intervals), slow during live (200/400 bar intervals)
Adaptive mutation rates: 20% historical, 8% live
Spawn/cull ratio: Always 2:1 to prevent population collapse
Challenge 3: Shadow Portfolio Accuracy
Needed realistic trade simulation without lookahead bias:
Can't peek at future bars for exits
Must track multiple portfolios simultaneously
Stop/target checks must use bar's high/low correctly
Solution:
Entry on close (realistic)
Exit checks on current bar's high/low (realistic)
Independent position tracking per strategy
Cooldown periods to prevent unrealistic rapid re-entry
ATR-normalized P&L (R-multiples) for fair comparison across volatility regimes
Challenge 4: Pine Script Compilation Limits
Hit TradingView's execution limits multiple times:
Too many array operations
Too many variables
Too complex conditional logic
Solution:
Optimized data structures (single DNA array instead of 8 separate arrays)
Minimal visual overlays (only essential plots)
Efficient fitness calculations (vectorized where possible)
Strategic use of barstate.islast to minimize dashboard updates
Challenge 5: Walk-Forward Implementation
Standard WFO is difficult in Pine Script:
Can't easily "roll forward" through historical data
Can't re-optimize strategies mid-stream
Must work in real-time streaming environment
Solution:
Age-based phase detection (first 250 bars = training, next 75 = testing)
Separate metric tracking for train vs. test
Efficiency calculation at fixed interval (after test period completes)
Validation flag persists for strategy lifetime
Challenge 6: Signal Quality Control
Early versions generated too many signals with poor win rates:
Single indicators produced excessive noise
No trend alignment
No regime awareness
Instant entries on single-bar spikes
Solution:
Three-layer confluence system (entropy + momentum + structure)
Minimum 2-of-3 agreement requirement
Trend alignment checks (penalty for counter-trend)
Regime-based probability adjustments
Persistence requirements (signals must hold multiple bars)
Volume confirmation
Quality gate (probability + confluence thresholds)
The Result
A system that:
Truly evolves (not just parameter sweeps)
Truly validates (out-of-sample testing)
Truly adapts (ongoing competition and breeding)
Stays within TradingView's platform constraints
Provides institutional-quality signals
Maintains transparency (full metrics dashboard)
Development time: 3+ months of iterative refinement
Lines of code: ~1500 (highly optimized)
Test instruments: ES, NQ, EURUSD, BTCUSD, SPY, AAPL
Test timeframes: 5min, 15min, 1H, Daily
🎯 FINAL WORDS
The Adaptive Genesis Engine is not just another indicator - it's a living system that learns, adapts, and improves through the same principles that drive biological evolution. Every bar it observes adds to its experience. Every strategy it spawns explores new parameter combinations. Every strategy it culls removes weakness from the gene pool.
This is evolution in action on your charts.
You're not getting a static formula locked in time. You're getting a system that thinks , that competes , that survives through natural selection. The strongest strategies rise to the top. The weakest die. The gene pool improves generation after generation.
AGE doesn't claim to predict the future - it adapts to whatever the future brings. When markets shift from trending to choppy, from calm to volatile, from bullish to bearish - AGE evolves new strategies suited to the new regime.
Use it on any instrument. Any timeframe. Any market condition. AGE will adapt.
This indicator gives you the pure signal intelligence. How you choose to act on it - position sizing, risk management, execution discipline - that's your responsibility. AGE tells you when and how confident . You decide whether and how much .
Trust the process. Respect the evolution. Let Darwin work.
"In markets, as in nature, it is not the strongest strategies that survive, nor the most intelligent - but those most responsive to change."
Taking you to school. — Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
— Happy Holiday's
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) | FractalystWhat's the purpose of this strategy?
The purpose of dollar cost averaging (DCA) is to grow investments over time using a disciplined, methodical approach used by many top institutions like MicroStrategy and other institutions.
Here's how it functions:
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA): This technique involves investing a set amount of money regularly, regardless of market conditions. It helps to mitigate the risk of investing a large sum at a peak price by spreading out your investment, thus potentially lowering your average cost per share over time.
Regular Contributions: By adding money to your investments on a pre-determined frequency and dollar amount defined by the user, you take advantage of compounding. The script will remind you to contribute based on your chosen schedule, which can be weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, quarterly, or yearly. This systematic approach ensures that your returns can earn their own returns, much like interest on savings but potentially at a higher rate.
Technical Analysis: The strategy employs a market trend ratio to gauge market sentiment. It calculates the ratio of bullish vs bearish breakouts across various timeframes, assigning this ratio a percentage-based score to determine the directional bias. Once this score exceeds a user-selected percentage, the strategy looks to take buy entries, signaling a favorable time for investment based on current market trends.
Fundamental Analysis: This aspect looks at the health of the economy and companies within it to determine bullish market conditions. Specifically, we consider:
Specifically, it considers:
Interest Rate: High interest rates can affect borrowing costs, potentially slowing down economic growth or making stocks less attractive compared to fixed income.
Inflation Rate: Inflation erodes purchasing power, but moderate inflation can be a sign of a healthy economy. We look for investments that might benefit from or withstand inflation.
GDP Rate: GDP growth indicates the overall health of the economy; we aim to invest in sectors poised to grow with the economy.
Unemployment Rate: Lower unemployment typically signals consumer confidence and spending power, which can boost certain sectors.
By integrating these elements, the strategy aims to:
Reduce Investment Volatility: By spreading out your investments, you're less impacted by short-term market swings.
Enhance Growth Potential: Using both technical and fundamental filters helps in choosing investments that are more likely to appreciate over time.
Manage Risk: The strategy aims to balance the risk of market timing by investing consistently and choosing assets wisely based on both economic data and market conditions.
----
What are Regular Contributions in this strategy?
Regular Contributions involve adding money to your investments on a pre-determined frequency and dollar amount defined by the user. The script will remind you to contribute based on your chosen schedule, which can be weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, quarterly, or yearly. This systematic approach ensures that your returns can earn their own returns, much like interest on savings but potentially at a higher rate.
----
How do regular contributions enhance compounding and reduce timing risk?
Enhances Compounding: Regular contributions leverage the power of compounding, where returns on investments can generate their own returns, potentially leading to exponential growth over time.
Reduces Timing Risk: By investing regularly, the strategy minimizes the risk associated with trying to time the market, spreading out the investment cost over time and potentially reducing the impact of volatility.
Automated Reminders: The script reminds users to make contributions based on their chosen schedule, ensuring consistency and discipline in investment practices, which is crucial for long-term success.
----
How does the strategy integrate technical and fundamental analysis for investors?
A: The strategy combines technical and fundamental analysis in the following manner:
Technical Analysis: It uses a market trend ratio to determine the directional bias by calculating the ratio of bullish vs bearish breakouts. Once this ratio exceeds a user-selected percentage threshold, the strategy signals to take buy entries, optimizing the timing within the given timeframe(s).
Fundamental Analysis: This aspect assesses the broader economic environment to identify sectors or assets that are likely to benefit from current economic conditions. By understanding these fundamentals, the strategy ensures investments are made in assets with strong growth potential.
This integration allows the strategy to select investments that are both technically favorable for entry and fundamentally sound, providing a comprehensive approach to investment decisions in the crypto, stock, and commodities markets.
----
How does the strategy identify market structure? What are the underlying calculations?
Q: How does the strategy identify market structure?
A: The strategy identifies market structure by utilizing an efficient logic with for loops to pinpoint the first swing candle that features a pivot of 2. This marks the beginning of the break of structure, where the market's previous trend or pattern is considered invalidated or changed.
What are the underlying calculations for identifying market structure?
A: The underlying calculations involve:
Identifying Swing Points: The strategy looks for swing highs (marked with blue Xs) and swing lows (marked with red Xs). A swing high is identified when a candle's high is higher than the highs of the candles before and after it. Conversely, a swing low is when a candle's low is lower than the lows of the candles before and after it.
Break of Structure (BOS):
Bullish BOS: This occurs when the price breaks above the swing high level of the previous structure, indicating a potential shift to a bullish trend.
Bearish BOS: This happens when the price breaks below the swing low level of the previous structure, signaling a potential shift to a bearish trend.
Structural Liquidity and Invalidation:
Structural Liquidity: After a break of structure, liquidity levels are updated to the first swing high in a bullish BOS or the first swing low in a bearish BOS.
Structural Invalidation: If the price moves back to the level of the first swing low before the bullish BOS or the first swing high before the bearish BOS, it invalidates the break of structure, suggesting a potential reversal or continuation of the previous trend.
This method provides users with a technical approach to filter market regimes, offering an advantage by minimizing the risk of overfitting to historical data, which is often a concern with traditional indicators like moving averages.
By focusing on identifying pivotal swing points and the subsequent breaks of structure, the strategy maintains a balance between sensitivity to market changes and robustness against historical data anomalies, ensuring a more adaptable and potentially more reliable market analysis tool.
What entry criteria are used in this script?
The script uses two entry models for trading decisions: BreakOut and Fractal.
Underlying Calculations:
Breakout: The script records the most recent swing high by storing it in a variable. When the price closes above this recorded level, and all other predefined conditions are satisfied, the script triggers a breakout entry. This approach is considered conservative because it waits for the price to confirm a breakout above the previous high before entering a trade. As shown in the image, as soon as the price closes above the new candle (first tick), the long entry gets taken. The stop-loss is initially set and then moved to break-even once the price moves in favor of the trade.
Fractal: This method involves identifying a swing low with a period of 2, which means it looks for a low point where the price is lower than the two candles before and after it. Once this pattern is detected, the script executes the trade. This is an aggressive approach since it doesn't wait for further price confirmation. In the image, this is represented by the 'Fractal 2' label where the script identifies and acts on the swing low pattern.
----
How does the script calculate trend score? What are the underlying calculations?
Market Trend Ratio: The script calculates the ratio of bullish to bearish breakouts. This involves:
Counting Bullish Breakouts: A bullish breakout is counted when the price breaks above a recent swing high (as identified in the strategy's market structure analysis).
Counting Bearish Breakouts: A bearish breakout is counted when the price breaks below a recent swing low.
Percentage-Based Score: This ratio is then converted into a percentage-based score:
For example, if there are 10 bullish breakouts and 5 bearish breakouts in a given timeframe, the ratio would be 10:5 or 2:1. This could be translated into a score where 66.67% (10/(10+5) * 100) represents the bullish trend strength.
The score might be calculated as (Number of Bullish Breakouts / Total Breakouts) * 100.
User-Defined Threshold: The strategy uses this score to determine when to take buy entries. If the trend score exceeds a user-defined percentage threshold, it indicates a strong enough bullish trend to justify a buy entry. For instance, if the user sets the threshold at 60%, the script would look for a buy entry when the trend score is above this level.
Timeframe Consideration: The calculations are performed across the timeframes specified by the user, ensuring the trend score reflects the market's behavior over different periods, which could be daily, weekly, or any other relevant timeframe.
This method provides a quantitative measure of market trend strength, helping to make informed decisions based on the balance between bullish and bearish market movements.
What type of stop-loss identification method are used in this strategy?
This strategy employs two types of stop-loss methods: Initial Stop-loss and Trailing Stop-Loss.
Underlying Calculations:
Initial Stop-loss:
ATR Based: The strategy uses the Average True Range (ATR) to set an initial stop-loss, which helps in accounting for market volatility without predicting price direction.
Calculation:
- First, the True Range (TR) is calculated for each period, which is the greatest of:
- Current Period High - Current Period Low
- Absolute Value of Current Period High - Previous Period Close
- Absolute Value of Current Period Low - Previous Period Close
- The ATR is then the moving average of these TR values over a specified period, typically 14 periods by default. This ATR value can be used to set the stop-loss at a distance from the entry price that reflects the current market volatility.
Swing Low Based:
For this method, the stop-loss is set based on the most recent swing low identified in the market structure analysis. This approach uses the lowest point of the recent price action as a reference for setting the stop-loss.
Trailing Stop-Loss:
The strategy uses structural liquidity and structural invalidation levels across multiple timeframes to adjust the stop-loss once the trade is profitable. This method involves:
Detecting Structural Liquidity: After a break of structure, the liquidity levels are updated to the first swing high in a bullish scenario or the first swing low in a bearish scenario. These levels serve as potential areas where the price might find support or resistance, allowing the stop-loss to trail the price movement.
Detecting Structural Invalidation: If the price returns to the level of the first swing low before a bullish break of structure or the first swing high before a bearish break of structure, it suggests the trend might be reversing or invalidating, prompting the adjustment of the stop-loss to lock in profits or minimize losses.
By using these methods, the strategy dynamically adjusts the initial stop-loss based on market volatility, helping to protect against adverse price movements while allowing for enough room for trades to develop. The ATR-based stop-loss adapts to the current market conditions by considering the volatility, ensuring that the stop-loss is not too tight during volatile periods, which could lead to premature exits, nor too loose during calm markets, which might result in larger losses. Similarly, the swing low based stop-loss provides a logical exit point if the market structure changes unfavorably.
Each market behaves differently across various timeframes, and it is essential to test different parameters and optimizations to find out which trailing stop-loss method gives you the desired results and performance. This involves backtesting the strategy with different settings for the ATR period, the distance from the swing low, and how the trailing stop-loss reacts to structural liquidity and invalidation levels.
Through this process, you can tailor the strategy to perform optimally in different market environments, ensuring that the stop-loss mechanism supports the trade's longevity while safeguarding against significant drawdowns.
What type of break-even and take profit identification methods are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
For Break-Even:
Percentage (%) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain percentage above the entry.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price * (1 + Percentage / 100)
Example:
If the entry price is $100 and the break-even percentage is 5%, the break-even level is $100 * 1.05 = $105.
Risk-to-Reward (RR) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain RR ratio.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price + (Initial Risk * RR Ratio)
For TP
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed.
- Similar to break-even, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP1 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
What's the day filter Filter, what does it do?
The day filter allows users to customize the session time and choose the specific days they want to include in the strategy session. This helps traders tailor their strategies to particular trading sessions or days of the week when they believe the market conditions are more favorable for their trading style.
Customize Session Time:
Users can define the start and end times for the trading session.
This allows the strategy to only consider trades within the specified time window, focusing on periods of higher market activity or preferred trading hours.
Select Days:
Users can select which days of the week to include in the strategy.
This feature is useful for excluding days with historically lower volatility or unfavorable trading conditions (e.g., Mondays or Fridays).
Benefits:
Focus on Optimal Trading Periods:
By customizing session times and days, traders can focus on periods when the market is more likely to present profitable opportunities.
Avoid Unfavorable Conditions:
Excluding specific days or times can help avoid trading during periods of low liquidity or high unpredictability, such as major news events or holidays.
What tables are available in this script?
- Summary: Provides a general overview, displaying key performance parameters such as Net Profit, Profit Factor, Max Drawdown, Average Trade, Closed Trades and more.
Total Commission: Displays the cumulative commissions incurred from all trades executed within the selected backtesting window. This value is derived by summing the commission fees for each trade on your chart.
Average Commission: Represents the average commission per trade, calculated by dividing the Total Commission by the total number of closed trades. This metric is crucial for assessing the impact of trading costs on overall profitability.
Avg Trade: The sum of money gained or lost by the average trade generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the Net Profit by the overall number of closed trades. An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.
MaxDD: Displays the largest drawdown of losses, i.e., the maximum possible loss that the strategy could have incurred among all of the trades it has made. This value is calculated separately for every bar that the strategy spends with an open position.
Profit Factor: The amount of money a trading strategy made for every unit of money it lost (in the selected currency). This value is calculated by dividing gross profits by gross losses.
Avg RR: This is calculated by dividing the average winning trade by the average losing trade. This field is not a very meaningful value by itself because it does not take into account the ratio of the number of winning vs losing trades, and strategies can have different approaches to profitability. A strategy may trade at every possibility in order to capture many small profits, yet have an average losing trade greater than the average winning trade. The higher this value is, the better, but it should be considered together with the percentage of winning trades and the net profit.
Winrate: The percentage of winning trades generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the number of winning trades by the total number of closed trades generated by a strategy. Percent profitable is not a very reliable measure by itself. A strategy could have many small winning trades, making the percent profitable high with a small average winning trade, or a few big winning trades accounting for a low percent profitable and a big average winning trade. Most mean-reversion successful strategies have a percent profitability of 40-80% but are profitable due to risk management control.
BE Trades: Number of break-even trades, excluding commission/slippage.
Losing Trades: The total number of losing trades generated by the strategy.
Winning Trades: The total number of winning trades generated by the strategy.
Total Trades: Total number of taken traders visible your charts.
Net Profit: The overall profit or loss (in the selected currency) achieved by the trading strategy in the test period. The value is the sum of all values from the Profit column (on the List of Trades tab), taking into account the sign.
- Monthly: Displays performance data on a month-by-month basis, allowing users to analyze performance trends over each month and year.
- Weekly: Displays performance data on a week-by-week basis, helping users to understand weekly performance variations.
- UI Table: A user-friendly table that allows users to view and save the selected strategy parameters from user inputs. This table enables easy access to key settings and configurations, providing a straightforward solution for saving strategy parameters by simply taking a screenshot with Alt + S or ⌥ + S.
User-input styles and customizations:
Please note that all background colors in the style are disabled by default to enhance visualization.
How to Use This Strategy to Create a Profitable Edge and Systems?
Choose Your Strategy mode:
- Decide whether you are creating an investing strategy or a trading strategy.
Select a Market:
- Choose a one-sided market such as stocks, indices, or cryptocurrencies.
Historical Data:
- Ensure the historical data covers at least 10 years of price action for robust backtesting.
Timeframe Selection:
- Choose the timeframe you are comfortable trading with. It is strongly recommended to use a timeframe above 15 minutes to minimize the impact of commissions/slippage on your profits.
Set Commission and Slippage:
- Properly set the commission and slippage in the strategy properties according to your broker/prop firm specifications.
Parameter Optimization:
- Use trial and error to test different parameters until you find the performance results you are looking for in the summary table or, preferably, through deep backtesting using the strategy tester.
Trade Count:
- Ensure the number of trades is 200 or more; the higher, the better for statistical significance.
Positive Average Trade:
- Make sure the average trade is above zero.
(An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.)
Performance Metrics:
- Look for a high profit factor, and net profit with minimum drawdown.
- Ideally, aim for a drawdown under 20-30%, depending on your risk tolerance.
Refinement and Optimization:
- Try out different markets and timeframes.
- Continue working on refining your edge using the available filters and components to further optimize your strategy.
What makes this strategy original?
Incorporation of Fundamental Analysis:
This strategy integrates fundamental analysis by considering key economic indicators such as interest rates, inflation, GDP growth, and unemployment rates. These fundamentals help in assessing the broader economic health, which in turn influences sector performance and market trends. By understanding these economic conditions, the strategy can identify sectors or assets that are likely to thrive, ensuring investments are made in environments conducive to growth. This approach allows for a more informed investment decision, aligning technical entries with fundamentally strong market conditions, thus potentially enhancing the strategy's effectiveness over time.
Technical Analysis Without Classical Methods:
The strategy's technical analysis diverges from traditional methods like moving averages by focusing on market structure through a trend score system.
Instead of using lagging indicators, it employs a real-time analysis of market trends by calculating the ratio of bullish to bearish breakouts. This provides several benefits:
Immediate Market Sentiment: The trend score system reacts more dynamically to current market conditions, offering insights into the market's immediate sentiment rather than historical trends, which can often lag behind real-time changes.
Reduced Overfitting: By not relying on moving averages or similar classical indicators, the strategy avoids the common pitfall of overfitting to historical data, which can lead to poor performance in new market conditions. The trend score provides a fresh perspective on market direction, potentially leading to more robust trading signals.
Clear Entry Signals: With the trend score, entry decisions are based on a clear percentage threshold, making the strategy's decision-making process straightforward and less subjective than interpreting moving average crossovers or similar signals.
Regular Contributions and Reminders:
The strategy encourages regular investments through a system of predefined frequency and amount, which could be weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, quarterly, or yearly. This systematic approach:
Enhances Compounding: Regular contributions leverage the power of compounding, where returns on investments can generate their own returns, potentially leading to exponential growth over time.
Reduces Timing Risk: By investing regularly, the strategy minimizes the risk associated with trying to time the market, spreading out the investment cost over time and potentially reducing the impact of volatility.
Automated Reminders: The script reminds users to make contributions based on their chosen schedule, ensuring consistency and discipline in investment practices, which is crucial for long-term success.
Long-Term Wealth Building:
Focused on long-term wealth accumulation, this strategy:
Promotes Patience and Discipline: By emphasizing regular contributions and a disciplined approach to both entry and risk management, it aligns with the principles of long-term investing, discouraging impulsive decisions based on short-term market fluctuations.
Diversification Across Asset Classes: Operating across crypto, stocks, and commodities, the strategy provides diversification, which is a key component of long-term wealth building, reducing risk through varied exposure.
Growth Over Time: The strategy's design to work with the market's natural growth cycles, supported by fundamental analysis, aims for sustainable growth rather than quick profits, aligning with the goals of investors looking to build wealth over decades.
This comprehensive approach, combining fundamental insights, innovative technical analysis, disciplined investment habits, and a focus on long-term growth, offers a unique and potentially effective pathway for investors seeking to build wealth steadily over time.
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data.
Built-in components, features, and functionalities of our charting tools are the intellectual property of @Fractalyst Unauthorized use, reproduction, or distribution of these proprietary elements is prohibited.
- By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer and agrees to respect our intellectual property rights and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
Trend + Liquidity Master Trend & Liquidity Master
A Professional All-in-One Trading System combining Dynamic Trend Analysis with Smart Money Liquidity Zones
---
## 🎯 Overview
The Trend & Liquidity Master is a comprehensive trading indicator that merges institutional-grade trend detection with smart money liquidity mapping. Designed for traders who want to align with market structure while identifying high-probability entry zones, this system provides clear visual signals backed by multi-layered confirmation filters.
## ⚡ Core Features
### 📊 **Adaptive Trend Cloud**
- Multi-Algorithm Support: Choose between EMA, SMA, HMA, or RMA for trend calculation
- Volatility-Based Bands: Dynamic ATR bands that expand/contract with market conditions
- Anti-Chop Filter: Maintains trend state during consolidation to reduce false signals
- Visual Clarity: Color-coded cloud system (Green = Bullish, Red = Bearish - customisable)
### 🧱 **Smart Liquidity Zones**
- Supply & Demand Boxes: Automatically identifies institutional support/resistance levels
- Pivot-Based Detection: Uses swing high/low analysis to map liquidity pools
- Dynamic Mitigation: Zones auto-delete when price invalidates them
- Clean Visual Design: Semi-transparent boxes that don't clutter your chart
### 🎯 **Multi-Filter Signal System**
- Volume Confirmation: Optional filter to ensure signals occur on above-average volume
- RSI Screening: Avoid overbought buys and oversold sells (toggleable)
- Trend Alignment: Signals only trigger on confirmed trend changes
- Clear Entry Labels: BUY/SELL markers appear directly on the chart
### 🖥️ **Professional HUD Dashboard**
Real-time market intelligence display showing:
- Trend Bias: Current market direction (Bullish/Bearish)
- Momentum Status: Strength classification (Strong/Neutral/Weak)
- Volume State: Current volume relative to average (High/Low)
- Customizable Position & Styling: Place anywhere on your chart
---
## 🛠️ Customization Options
### **Trend Engine**
- Adjustable MA type and length
- Volatility multiplier for band sensitivity
- Source selection (Close, Open, HL2, etc.)
### **Liquidity Detection**
- Pivot lookback period (sensitivity control)
- Zone extension bars
- Toggle zones on/off independently
### **Signal Filters**
- Enable/disable volume filter
- Enable/disable RSI filter
- Fine-tune to match your trading style
### **Visual Design**
- Custom colors for bullish/bearish/neutral states
- Candle coloring option
- Dashboard styling and positioning
- Adjustable text and UI sizing
---
## 📈 How to Use
1. Identify the Trend: Wait for price to break above the upper band (Bullish) or below the lower band (Bearish)
2. Watch for Signals: BUY labels appear when trend turns bullish with confirmation; SELL labels for bearish turns
3. Confirm with Liquidity: Use Supply/Demand zones as potential entry refinement or profit targets
4. Monitor the HUD: Check momentum and volume states for additional confluence
5. Set Alerts: Built-in alert conditions for automated notifications
---
## 💡 Best Practices
- **Higher Timeframes**: Works best on 15m+ charts for reduced noise
- **Trend Following**: This is a trend-following system—avoid counter-trend trades
- **Multiple Confirmations**: Combine signals with liquidity zones for highest probability setups
- **Risk Management**: Always use proper position sizing and stop losses
---
## 🔔 Alert System
Pre-configured alerts for:
- Long entry signals (Apex Buy Alert)
- Short entry signals (Apex Sell Alert)
- Automatic ticker symbol insertion
---
## 📝 Notes
- Maximum 50 boxes and lines for optimal performance
- Liquidity zones automatically manage themselves (old zones removed)
- All components can be toggled independently
- Compatible with all markets (Forex, Crypto, Stocks, Indices)
---
## 🎨 What Makes This Different?
You get the best of both worlds: smart money zones that show where liquidity sits, combined with clear trend signals that tell you when to act.
---
Ready to trade with institutional-grade market intelligence? Add the Trend & Liquidity Master to your chart today.
---
*Disclaimer: This indicator is for educational and informational purposes only. Past performance does not guarantee future results. Always conduct your own analysis and practice proper risk management.*
JK Scalp - Nishith RajwarJK Scalp Nishith Rajwar
Multi-Stochastic Rotation & Momentum Scalping Framework
JK Scalp is a rule-based momentum and rotation oscillator designed for short-term scalping and intraday execution.
It focuses on how momentum rotates across multiple stochastic speeds, instead of relying on a single oscillator or lagging averages.
This is an execution aid, not a predictive indicator.
🧠 Concept & Originality
Unlike standard stochastic tools, JK Scalp uses four synchronized stochastic layers:
• Fast (9,3) → execution timing
• Medium (14,3) → structure confirmation
• Slow (44,3) → swing context
• Trend (60,10,10) → dominant momentum regime
The core idea is quad-rotation:
High-probability trades occur when all momentum layers rotate together after reaching an extreme.
This script combines:
• Momentum rotation
• Divergence logic
• Flag continuation logic
• Trend-state filtering
into a single cohesive framework, not a simple indicator mashup.
📊 How to Use (Step-by-Step)
1️⃣ Best Timeframes
• Scalping: 1m – 3m
• Intraday: 5m – 15m
• Avoid higher timeframes (not designed for swing holding)
Works best on:
• Index options
• Index futures
• Highly liquid stocks
• Crypto majors
2️⃣ Understanding the Signals
🔁 Quad Rotation (Core Signal)
A valid rotation requires:
• Fast, Medium, Slow, and Trend stochastic moving in the same direction
• Momentum exiting Overbought / Oversold zones
• Trend stochastic supporting the move
This filters out random oscillator noise.
3️⃣ Entry Conditions
🟢 LONG Setup
• Bullish quad rotation
• Either:
– Bullish divergence OR
– Bullish flag pullback
• Fast stochastic turning up
🔴 SHORT Setup
• Bearish quad rotation
• Either:
– Bearish divergence OR
– Bearish flag pullback
• Fast stochastic turning down
⚠️ Signals are confirmation-based, not anticipatory.
4️⃣ SUPER LONG / SUPER SHORT
These appear only when:
• Quad rotation
• Divergence confirmation
They represent high-confidence momentum inflection zones, not guaranteed reversals.
5️⃣ Stop-Loss Visualization
Optional SL zones are plotted using:
• Recent swing high / low
• ATR-based buffer (configurable)
This helps traders visualize risk, not automate exits.
🎨 Visual System (Why It Looks Different)
• Multi-layer glow effects → momentum strength
• Dynamic cloud → fast vs trend dominance
• Color-shifting fast line → acceleration vs decay
• Chart overlays → execution clarity without clutter
Everything is designed for speed and readability during live trading.
⭐ Unique Selling Points (USP)
✅ Multi-speed stochastic rotation (not single-line signals)
✅ Context-first, not signal spam
✅ Built-in divergence + continuation logic
✅ Non-repainting logic
✅ Designed for scalpers, not hindsight analysis
✅ Works across indices, options, crypto, and futures
⚠️ Important Notes
• Not a standalone trading system
• Best combined with:
– Market structure
– Key levels
– Session timing
• Avoid low-liquidity or news-spike candles
This indicator guides execution, it does not replace discretion.
👤 Who This Is For
• Scalpers & intraday traders
• Options traders needing precise timing
• Traders who understand momentum & structure
• Users who want fewer but higher-quality signals
🏁 Summary
JK Scalp helps you trade momentum rotation, not overbought/oversold myths.
Wait for alignment. Execute with discipline.
UT3T Stratejisi (Ugur Tufan Trend ve Trade Takip Stratejisi)UT3T Strategy (Trend & Trade Tracking System)
UT3T Strategy is a comprehensive, hybrid trading system designed to capture both long-term trends and short-term trade opportunities. It combines smart cost averaging (DCA), dynamic profit-taking, and Fibonacci-based trade levels into a single, powerful indicator.
This script is ideal for traders looking for a structured approach to managing positions in both trending and ranging markets.
Key Features:
Dual Strategy Engine:
Strategy 1 (Trend Following): Uses EMA crossovers (EMA9/EMA50) to identify trend direction. It includes a smart DCA (Dollar Cost Averaging) mechanism labeled as ADD-LONG to optimize entry prices during corrections.
Strategy 2 (Trade Tracking): Utilizes custom Fibonacci channels to identify potential reversal zones (LONG / SHORT) based on price action and support/resistance levels.
Smart Position Management:
Dynamic Take Profit (TP): Offers an optional "Progressive TP" mode where profit targets increase by 50% after each successful hit (e.g., 10% -> 15% -> 22.5%), allowing you to ride strong trends.
Custom Exit Logic: The SHORT signal is triggered only if a minimum profit threshold (defined by the user) is met, preventing premature exits in small pullbacks.
Visual Clarity:
Clear Labels: Distinguishes between initial entries (LONG) and averaging entries (ADD-LONG) directly on the chart.
Alert System: Includes a fully customizable alert system for every signal type (Trend Entry, DCA, Stop Loss, Take Profit, and Fib Levels).
How to Use:
Symbol Settings: Input your preferred tickers and customize TP/Cost percentages in the settings menu.
Fib Levels: Define custom High/Low prices for Strategy 2 to generate Fib channels automatically.
Alerts: Set alerts based on your trading style (Per Bar Close for trends, Once Per Bar for TP levels).
Buy the dips StrategyThis strategy getting in long position only after the price drop- Buy the dips
The % of the drop is Determined by SMA for the first trade
The inputs of SMA and % of the drop can be adjust from the User
After that Strategy start taking safe trades if not take profit from the first trade
The safe trades are Determined by step down deviation % and by quantity
There is no Stop loss is not for one with small tolerance to getting under
if any question ask
Easy Trade Pro [Buy and Sell Strategy + Backtesting System]Hello Traders,
Easy Trade Pro is a comprehensive tool that combines multiple technical indicators into a single customizable one. This tool is the culmination of an extensive trading career, it is designed to help traders navigate the markets in any timeframe and financial asset, like Equities, Futures, Crypto, Forex and Commodities.
Before we deep dive into the comprehensive guide on what Easy Trade Pro is, let's kick off by showcasing the strategy used in this example. Please note, we have adopted an extremely conservative approach strictly following the Tradingview House Rules, which you can review here: www.tradingview.com
The backtest strategy parameters:
Currency pair: EUR USD
Timeframe: 15-min chart
Market: Spot, no leverage
Broker: FXCM
Trading range: 2022-09-01 07:30 — 2023-06-26 20:00
Backtesting range: 2022-08-31 23:00 — 2023-06-26 20:00
Initial Capital: $10,000
Buy Order Size: 20% of the capital, $2,000
Stop Loss: 0.50%
Sell orders: Four different take profits where we unload the position by 25% each time
Broker Fees: Commission set at 0.08$
Slippage: 10 ticks
Understanding FXCM Commissions and Setting Realistic Slippage for EUR/USD Spot Trading:
◉I would like to provide some clarity on the commission structure and slippage setting used in the study for trading the EUR/USD pair on the FXCM spot market. Based on the information available, FXCM charges a commission of $4.00 per standard lot (100,000) on both sides of the trade (meaning at open and close) for the EUR/USD pair. Since the study involve an order size of $2,000 USD, which is equivalent to 0.02 lots, the commission fee for one side of the trade (either buying or selling) would be calculated as $4.00 multiplied by 0.02, which is $0.08. This means that for each individual trade, whether it be a buy or sell, the commission fee would be $0.08.
◉As for slippage, it is crucial to account for the inherent uncertainty in the execution price due to market fluctuations. In the forex market, the EUR/USD pair is quoted with a precision of five decimal places, with the smallest price change being a "pipette" (0.00001). Given that slippage can vary based on market conditions, it is considered fair practice to use a slippage of around 10 ticks under normal market conditions for the EUR/USD pair. This allows for a more realistic representation of the execution price, especially in a liquid and fast-moving market such as forex.
More detailed information about FXCM fees structure in the link below:
docs.fxcorporate.com
Enter a Trade conditions:
For our buy order, we utilize a custom buy signal called 'Bullish Reversal'. A detailed explanation of this and other buy orders can be found later in the guide, specifically in section 1).
To enhance realism in our trading strategy, we have implemented a confirmation mechanism. When utilizing the strategy tester, you have the option to input a value to determine the number of confirmation candles to consider.
For example, if you set the input to 1, the system will check if the next candle following the signal meets the criteria for confirmation. If set to 2, the system will evaluate the second candle, and so on for higher values. The confirmation is determined by comparing the closing or opening price of the selected buy signal candle with the corresponding closing price of the confirmation candle.
In this case we choose as buy signal: 'Bullish Reversal' + 2 candle of confirmation
Exit a trade conditions:
On the sell side, we exit a trade in four different types of sell orders where we take profits. Inside '', you will encounter unique labels attributed to our custom sell signals. A detailed explanation of these sell orders can be found later in the guide, specifically in section 1). We used custom order called:
1TP 'Good Sell'
2TP 'Good Sell'
3TP 'Good Sell'
4TP 'Bearish Reversal' + 4 confirmation candles
Our confirmation logic, for sell signals, is applied only to 'Bearish Reversal' signal. The confirmation is determined by comparing the closing or opening price of the selected 'Bearish Reversal' candle with the corresponding closing price of the confirmation candle. In this case, we wait for the fourth candle from the 'Bearish Reversal' signal to confirm the sell trade.
Protect your capital:
This super-conservative study involves a clear low risk, with the use of $2,000, 20% of our capital. If the stop loss of 0.5% were triggered, we lose 10$, equating to 0.10% of $10,000 - thus affecting only 0.10% of our capital.
Super Conservative Approach & Results:
With 353 closed trades, we achieved a net profit of 2.03%, or $203.34$ relative to our initial $10,000 capital, and a win rate of 73.37%.
Less Conservative Approach & Results:
We could also consider increasing our risk to 0.5% of our capital per trade. We would maintain our stop loss at 0.50%, but we would need to use all our capital to enter the market. If the stop loss of 0.5% will be triggered, we would lose 50$, equating to 0.5% of $10,000.
In this scenario, our net profit would have increased to 10.15%, equivalent to $1015.
Please be aware:
While fully automated strategies can bring considerable advantages, they are not without their cons. For one, relying solely on an automated system may not take into account the potential confluence of other strategies or indicators, such as the significance of support and resistance zones. These elements often require a more nuanced, human understanding of the markets and cannot always be perfectly replicated by an algorithm.
Additionally, it's essential to remember that a significant percentage of traders are not consistently profitable. As such, prudent risk management, a conservative approach, and acceptance of a reasonable profit are crucial aspects of successful trading. While the allure of high returns can be tempting, the sustainability of your trading strategy should always take precedence. Achieving steady, reliable profits over time often outweighs the appeal of a risky, high-return strategy that could potentially lead to substantial losses.
So, while automation can be a powerful tool in your trading arsenal, it's also important to consider other strategies and factors. Always ensure you're managing your risk effectively and approaching trading with a realistic and informed perspective.
------------------------------------------------------------------------ Why Easy Trade Pro is Original? ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
We developed Easy Trade Pro as a unique and comprehensive solution, and we decided to protect our code to preserve its originality. We invested significant time and effort into making it a realistic trading strategy simulator. The standout features that set Easy Trade Pro apart include:
☀ Versatile Stop Loss Mechanisms: Stop loss execution can be complex and often requires careful coding to work as intended. In most freely available open-source codes, stop losses are implemented using the Average True Range (ATR). ATR can be beneficial but has limitations:
☁ Lagging Indicator - Like most technical indicators, the ATR is a lagging indicator. This means it is based on past data, and so it may not accurately reflect future market volatility. If market conditions change rapidly, the ATR may not adjust quickly enough, potentially leading to suboptimal stop loss levels.
☁ No Directional Information - The ATR measures volatility, but it does not provide any indication of the direction of the trend. Therefore, it should not be used as a standalone tool for making trading decisions, but should be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools that can provide directional cues.
☁ Inefficiency in Trending Markets - In strongly trending markets, ATR-based stops can sometimes be too far from the current price level. This could lead to larger losses if the price moves against your trade before hitting the stop loss. On the flip side, in less volatile, sideways markets, an ATR-based stop might be set too close to the entry point, leading to premature stop outs.
☁ Overoptimization Risk - If you're backtesting a trading strategy, there's a risk of overoptimizing your stop loss settings by fine-tuning them to past data. The best ATR multiplier that worked in the past might not necessarily work in the future, leading to potential performance issues.
☀ We countered these by implementing four different types of 'protect the trade' mechanisms:
✔ Fixed Percentage Stop Loss
✔ Trailing Stop Loss
✔ Stop Loss Moved to Entry Upon Reaching Certain Gain
✔ Stop Loss Moved to Entry Upon Reaching First Take Profit Order ("Custom Order").
☀ Dual Exit Strategy: We incorporated two distinct methods of exiting a trade. The first uses our custom signals, while the second triggers exit at a certain percentage of gain.
☀ Multiple Take Profit Orders: You have the flexibility to establish up to four different sell orders. This feature enables you to fractionate your exit strategy according to your needs. You can choose to trigger these fractions based on our custom signals or determine your own exit points by setting targeted gains at a fixed percentage.
☀ Confirmation Candle System: This feature enhances trade precision by requiring confirmation candles after a buy or sell signal. This confirmation, dependent on the next candle's closing price, helps reduce false signals and improves entry and exit points. While our confirmation system is applicable to all custom buy signals, it's solely dedicated for the bearish reversal when it comes to sell signals.
☀ Universal Compatibility: Easy Trade Pro's Strategy Tester works perfectly with any asset class. The code can handle different contract types, including the SPX contracts and fractional assets like Bitcoin. It's optimized to ensure proper execution of trades without rounding issues.
☀ Bullish and Bearish Reversal candles: Our method of detecting these pivotal candles combines conditions from buy and sell signals with pertinent divergences in Price, RSI, and Volume (OBV). The distinguishing factor, however, lies in recognizing significant shifts in market structure and liquidity grabs. To further enhance the credibility of our indicator, we've incorporated Bollinger Bands, serving as an additional layer in spotting potential trend reversals, particularly when aligned with long-wick candlesticks, engulfing patterns, and morning or evening star formations.
☀ Non-Repainting Indicator: Our indicator signals are designed not to repaint. Once a signal appears, it stays fixed, offering a reliable tool for your trading decisions.
================================================== EXTENSIVE TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ====================================================
Easy Trade Pro is versatile, allowing you to analyze market trends across any financial asset. With its rigorous testing, our tool can be used confidently on any timeframe, from 1D to 1min, whether you prefer longer-term or shorter-term trades.
Although we recommend trading on timeframes between 1D and 1min, higher timeframes like 1W chart, can also provide broader insights.
Our study combines a variety of popular technical indicators, such as RSI, Stochastic RSI, MACD, DMI, Bollinger Bands as well as relevant EMAs. On the volume side OBV and MFI. Using a data-driven approach, “Easy Trade Pro” analyzes historical market trends to identify optimal ways to combine these indicators with significant divergences between price and oscillators. On top of that the code considers relevant changes in market structure and liquidity grabs, to generate reliable and accurate signals for potential buy and sell opportunities.
* ☎ --> Please not that MACD, BBs, and EMAs account for a minimal part of our script <--- ☎, If you're looking for a simpler tool, consider checking out our open-source indicator, 'RSI, SRSI, MACD, and DMI cross - Open source code'. You can find it here:
With our customizable system, traders will be able to identify:
1) Three types of buy signals🐂,💰,💎 and sell signals 🐻,🔨,💀
2) Bullish and bearish reversal candles with support and resistance lines
3) Bull and bear momentum signals
4) A function that utilizes Color bars to identify the strength of the trend
5) Three customizable moving averages
6) Alerts direct to your email or phone
7) Advanced and customizable settings menu
8) Our software also includes a backtesting system that that allows users to test their trading strategies on historical data, to check how they would have performed in real-world market conditions. This can help refine a trading strategy and make more informed decisions.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1) BUY AND SELL SIGNALS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Our buy and sell signals are generated using a custom combination of RSI, MFI, and Stochastic RSI levels, as well as relevant MACD and Stochastic RSI crosses. These indicators are carefully analyzed to identify potential trading opportunities and determine optimal entry and exit points for trades.
RSI (Relative strength index) measures the strength of a security's price action, while the SRSI (Stochastic Relative Strength Index) is a momentum oscillator that measures the current price relative to its high and low range over a set period. The Money Flow Index (MFI) is another momentum indicator that uses both price and volume data to measure buying and selling pressure. MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence) is a popular technical indicator used in financial markets to analyze price trends and momentum.
▶ With our system, you'll be able to identify three different levels of buy signals:
◉ The first level of buy signal is represented by a 🐂 emoji and is a "Good Buy". This signal indicates a possible buying opportunity. It indicates that could be a good opportunity to enter in a long trade. It's important to note that, the "Good Buy" signal can sometimes be supplemented with a green "Bull" text and a flag plotshape positioned beneath the signal. In these scenarios, we categorize this as a "Good Buy Bull" signal.
◉ The second level of buy signal is represented by a 💰 emoji and is a "Great Buy". This signal indicates a stronger buying opportunity than the "Good Buy" signal.
◉ The third and strongest buy signal is represented by a 💎 emoji and is an "Incredible Buy". This signal indicates a stronger buying opportunity than the "Good Buy" and "Great Buy" signals
▶ With our system, you'll be able to identify three different levels of sell signals:
◉ On the sell side, the first level is represented by a 🐻 emoji and is a "Good Sell". This signal indicates a possible selling opportunity. It indicates that could be a good opportunity to exit a trade or open a short position. It's important to note that, the "Good Sell" signal can occasionally be accompanied by a red "Bear" text and a flag plotshape positioned beneath the signal. In such instances, we refer to this as a "Good Sell Bear" signal.
◉ The second sell signal is represented by a 🔨 emoji and is a "Great Sell". This signal indicates a stronger selling opportunity than the "Good Sell" signal.
◉ The third and strongest sell signal is represented by a 💀 emoji and is an "Incredible Sell". This signal indicates a stronger selling opportunity than the "Good Sell" and "Great Sell" signals.
------------------------------------------2) "BULLISH AND BEARISH REVERSAL CANDLES PLUS SUPPORT AND RESISTANCE LINES" ------------------------------------------------
Bullish and bearish reversal candles are specific candles that have more probability to reverse the trend.
Our trading indicator is designed to identify bullish and bearish reversal candles. Our method of detecting these pivotal candles combines conditions from buy and sell signals with pertinent divergences in Price, RSI, and Volume (OBV). The distinguishing factor, however, lies in recognizing significant shifts in market structure and liquidity grabs. To further enhance the credibility of our indicator, we've incorporated Bollinger Bands, serving as an additional layer in spotting potential trend reversals, particularly when aligned with long-wick candlesticks, engulfing patterns, and morning or evening star formations.
These candles are represented by blue and orange colors respectively by default. Additionally, the indicator also uses lines that are drawn at either the opening or closing of candles to help identify pivot points of support or resistance. These candles, lines color or shape are customizable in the settings menu.
How can I benefit the most from bullish reversal candles? To make the most of bullish reversal candles, a powerful strategy is:
E.g, 1D chart - Wait for the next 1 or 2 candles to close above the support line linked to the bullish reversal candle. For lower timeframes, it is recommended to wait for 2 or 3 candles before making a trading decision. A good tip is also to look for other signals (confluence), like a buy signal. Traders should decide based on their risk tolerance.
Here below we can see an example of a bullish reversal candle in the BTC/USDT, 1D, chart. The system identify a bullish reversal candle (blue color), the next 2 candles are green and closed above the support blue line, in addition we have other bullish signals (confluence).
How can I benefit the most from bullish reversal lines? Bullish reversal lines can help traders to identify key level of support and maintain control of their position until a clear break below occurs.
In the example below we se how the price retrace to the support line:
After touching the price bounce up.
How can I benefit the most from bearish reversal candles? To make the most of bearish reversal candles, a powerful strategy is:
E.g, 1D chart - Wait for the next 1 or 2 candles to close below the resistance line linked to the bearish reversal candle. For lower timeframes, it is recommended to wait for 2 or 3 candles before making a trading decision. Traders should decide based on their risk tolerance.
Here below we can see an example of a bearish reversal candle in the ETH/USDT, 1D, chart. The system identify a bearish reversal candle (orange color), the next candle is red and closes below the resistance orange line. A good tip is also to look for other signals (confluence), like a sell signal.
How can I benefit the most from bearish reversal lines? Bearish reversal lines can help traders to identify key level of resistance and maintain control of their position until a clear break above occurs.
In the example below we se how the price bounce back to the resistance line and get rejected.
------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3) BULL AND BEAR MOMENTUM SIGNALS -----------------------------------------------------------------------
We analyzed factors such as buy or sell signals, long or short confirmation signals, DMI crossup or crossdown and breaks of market structure (BOS) or change of character (CHoCh) to determine the strength and direction of the trend. These study give us bull trend or bear trend signals that can help traders identify potential trading opportunities and make informed decisions.
These conditions are represented by a green word "BULL" and a flag shape below (bull momentum) and by a red word "BEAR" and a flag shape above (bear momentum) respectively by default. These plots shapes are customizable in the settings menu.
How can I benefit the most from bull momentum signals? To make the most of bull momentum signals, a powerful strategy is:
E.g, 1D chart - Look for confluence. If bull signal comes with a "Good Buy 🐂" in the same candle the signal is more strong. Another good combo is to look for a bullish reversal candle prior or after this signal, usually within a range of 1/2 candles. For lower timeframes, it is recommended to wait 2/3 candles before making a trading decision.
In the picture below we can see an example of a bull momentum signal in the US500, 1D, chart.
How can I benefit the most from bear momentum signals? To make the most of bear momentum signals, a powerful strategy is:
E.g, 1D chart - Look for confluence. If bear signal comes with a "Good Sell 🐻" in the same candle the signal is more strong. Another good combo is to look for a bearish reversal candle prior or after this signal, usually within a range of 1/2 candles. For lower timeframes, it is recommended to wait 2/3 candles before making a trading decision.
In the picture below we can see an example of a bear momentum signal in combo with a sell signal, NETFLIX, 1D, chart.
-------------------------------------------------------------- 4) "COLOR BARS THAT INDICATE THE STRENGTH OF THE TREND -----------------------------------------------------
This code is responsible for changing the color of the bars on a chart based on certain conditions. The gradient colors are defined for green and red, and the algorithm checks if the current bar is within a certain range of either a bearish reversal or bullish reversal candle and whether the price is above or below certain exponential moving averages or if important break of market structure occurs.
Ultimately, this feature helps traders visually identify potential trends and market shifts and avoid getting distracted by price fluctuations. Please note that every gradient of color can be customize by the user. We set 3 different bullish colors and 3 different bearish colors.
Below the picture of the settings menu related to the bar color.
----------------------------------------------------------------------5)THREE CUSTOMIZABLE MOVING AVERAGES ----------------------------------------------------------------------
You can choose up to three moving averages, any length and any type like SMA, EMA, WMA, HMA, RMA, SWMA and VWMA. Furthermore, you have the freedom to adjust the color and width of the lines to your preference.
Below the picture of the settings menu related to the moving averages.
----------------------------------------------------------------------6) ALERTS DIRECT TO YOUR EMAIL OR PHONE --------------------------------------------------------------------
Our alert feature sends real-time notifications directly to your email or phone when a signal is generated, allowing you to take immediate action and stay ahead of the market.
With our system, you first establish your own rules for trading in the strategy tester - this includes your criteria for entering and exiting trades.
Once you've defined these conditions, our system will start sending you alerts. These alerts will be triggered whenever your specified conditions are met. So, if the market matches your 'enter trade' conditions, you'll receive an alert prompting. Similarly, when your 'exit trade' conditions are met, you'll receive another alert.
Remember, these alerts are purely based on the conditions you set.
Once the condition is met, you will receive alerts directly to your email or phone when enter and exit a trade based on your custom conditions. To make sure you receive these notifications click on notifications tab.
---------------------------------------------------------------7) ADVANCED AND CUSTOMIZABLE SETTINGS MENU----------------------------------------------------------------------
We designed Easy Trade indicators with traders in mind, so it's user-friendly, easy to navigate and users can customize inputs, style, and colors of every feature in the indicator's settings menu.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------8) EASY TRADE PRO - BACKTESTING SYSTEM----------------------------------------------------------------------
Easy Trade Pro features a highly effective and realistic backtesting system, designed to mirror as closely as possible the real-world scenarios of entering and exiting trades.
Step 1:
Open the settings menu of the Indicator.
Once opened the settings menu click on properties.
Decide on the capital you wish to invest. Choose whether to use contracts or USD and determine the size of your orders. For the sake of realism, we recommend not exceeding 25% of your capital per order. However, if you decide to utilize your entire capital, make sure to adjust your stop loss accordingly. For instance, if you have a capital of 10K and use 10K with a stop loss at 2%, your potential loss would be $200. Conversely, if you use only 2K of your 10K capital with a stop loss at 10%, you would still lose the same 2% of your capital. To make your simulation even more authentic, consider incorporating broker fees or commissions into your calculations. For example, spot market fees are typically around 0.10%. If you're backtesting markets with low liquidity, consider factoring in slippage as well.
Step 2:
Navigate to the 'Inputs' section and scroll down until you come across 'Backtesting System - Strategy Test'. Once you locate this, click on the box and activate the 'USE STRATEGY SYSTEM' option by checking the tick box.
Also You will then need to set a 'Start Date' and 'End Date', establishing a specific time period during which you wish to test your strategy.
Otherwise you can consider to use the deep backtesting feature.
Step 3:
It's now time to establish the conditions for entering a trade. You can choose from five different types of custom buy signals: Good Buy, Good Buy Bull, Great Buy, Incredible Buy, and Bullish Reversal. Note that 'Great Buy' and 'Incredible Buy' are rare signals, so we advise against using them frequently in mechanical strategy tests; instead, consider them more for manual live tests. For more consistent results, we recommend using the other buy signals.
After determining your preferred buy signal, you can choose how many confirmation candles you wish to wait for before entering a trade. A 'confirmation' means that if the next candle closes above the opening or closing price of the chosen buy signal, it's considered a confirmation. This could be the opening or closing price, depending on whether the candle is green (close > open) or red.
You can set the number of confirmation candles in different time frames: below 2h, between 2h and 10h, and above 10h.
Step 4:
It's now time to safeguard your trade by managing risk. You can choose to implement a stop loss, expressed in percentage terms, or opt for a trailing stop. A trailing stop is a type of stop loss order that moves with the market price. It is designed to protect gains by enabling a trade to remain open and continue to profit as long as the market price is moving in a favorable direction. However, the trade closes if the market price changes direction by a specified amount (the 'trailing stop distance').
Additionally, you can minimize losses and move the stop loss to your entry point once the price reaches a certain percentage of profit. This strategy can help secure potential gains while limiting the potential for losses.
Step 5:
Now it's time to set the conditions for exiting the trade. You have the option to divide your exit into a maximum of four parts, with each part representing 25% of the position size. For each take profit point, you can choose from three different custom sell signals: Good Sell, Good Sell Bear, and Bearish Reversal.
Similarly, the concept of confirmation candles also applies here, but in this case, the candles are not closing above. A 'confirmation' for a sell signal means that if the next candle closes below the opening or closing price of the selected sell signal, it's considered a confirmation. This could be the opening or closing price, depending on whether the candle is green (open > close) or red (close < open).
So, when you're looking to sell, a confirmation would occur if the next candlestick's closing price is lower than the opening or closing price of the candlestick that triggered the sell signal. This indicates a potential bearish trend, providing the confirmation to execute the sell order.
Additionally, we've introduced a feature that allows you to move your stop loss to the entry point whenever the first take profit (1TP) is reached, which equates to hitting one custom sell signal.
Step 6:
We've also designed an alternative method for taking profits. With this approach, you can choose to exit your position once a fixed percentage gain from the entry point is reached. For instance, you might decide to exit when a 10% profit is achieved. Similarly to the previous method, this approach allows you to choose up to four exit points and determine the proportion of your position you want to close at each stage.
Conclusion:
Easy Trade Pro provides users with various options for entering and exiting trades. To effectively utilize the indicator, we strongly recommend conducting thorough backtesting and considering the results across your preferred trading pairs. It is advisable to analyze a substantial number of trades, ideally exceeding 100 trades, to obtain reliable insights into the indicator's performance. This approach will help you gain a better understanding of how Easy Trade Pro aligns with your trading strategy and objectives.
❗Keep attention❗
It is important to note that no trading indicator or strategy is foolproof, and there is always a risk of losses in trading. While this indicator may provide useful information for making conclusions, it should not be used as the sole basis for making trading decisions. Traders should always use proper risk management techniques and consider multiple factors when making trading decisions.
It is also important to be aware of the limitations of simulated performance results. Hypothetical or simulated results do not represent actual trading, and since trades have not been executed, results may be over- or under-compensated for market factors such as lack of liquidity. Simulated trading programs are also designed with the benefit of hindsight, and no representation is being made that any account will achieve profits or losses similar to those shown. Therefore, our indicators are for informative purposes only and not intended to be used as financial advice.
We encourage traders to use our indicators as part of a well-rounded trading strategy and to always be aware of the risks involved in trading. Remember that past performance is not indicative of future results and always trade responsibly.
Chartology Strategy+🔍 Chartology Strategy+
This tool provides a comprehensive way for users to analyze trend levels and access other Matrix features across selected tickers and timeframes. Results can be tailored by strategy, with the option to filter displayed tickers based on custom user‑defined rules.
Bullish & Bearish Entry Signal (Safe & Scalping).
Entry Level, SL, T-SL & Two TP Levels (Based on Possible Movement).
Dashboard Table for Easy Presentation of All Levels.
Timeframe Scanner for Current Signal (Trend) on Different Timeframes.
Gap Up & Gap Down for Untraded Price Marking.
Institutional Candles for High Volume and Big Price Movement.
Neutral Candle for Low Volume and Small Price Movement.
Supply Demand (Based on Swing High & Low).
Mega Trend Band (Based on HMA) for Overall Trend.
🟢 Bullish & Bearish Entry Signals
Shows the expected direction of the symbol. It shows Bullish and Bearish direction mark on Chart. Entry Level is Closing of the Candle.
Input Settings
Signal Type: Safe
Appears after a proper trend confirmation.
Low frequency, fewer signals, but more reliable.
Best for swing traders who want strong confirmation before entering.
Signal Type: Scalping
Appears frequently during small downward moves.
High frequency, quick signals for short-term trades.
Best for intraday
Traders who want multiple opportunities in small movements.
🎯 Entry Level, SL, T-SL & TP Levels
Generated based on price movement and trend range.
Levels on Chart
Entry Level: Closing price of the candle where the signal appears.
SL (Stop Loss): Maximum risk allowed for the trade.
TSL (Trailing SL): Dynamic SL to reduce risk and lock profits.
Level 01: First TP level with 1:1 risk-reward ratio. Used for partial booking.
Level 02: Final TP level for full exit.
Input Settings
Levels: You can Increase or Decrease Level Amount for the Level 2.
Risk: You can Increase or Decrease Stop Loss (SL).
📊 Dashboard Table for Easy Presentation of All Levels.
Displays all key levels and metrics in one place:
Metrics
Symbol Name Shows the name of the current chart (e.g., NIFTY, BANKNIFTY).
Bar Age Displays the How many candles (Bars) before Latest signal appears.
Entry Shows the entry level where the latest bullish or bearish signal was generated.
Level 1 (TP1) First target level, based on 1:1 risk-reward ratio. Used for partial booking to secure profits.
Level 2 (TP2) Final target level where you can exit the remaining position.
SL (Stop Loss) Shows the maximum risk limit for the trade. Helps you control losses.
MTM (Mark to Market) Shows the difference between CMP and Entry Level. Helps track how far price has moved since entry.
P&L (Profit & Loss) Shows the difference between Entry and Target Level achieved. Helps measure actual gain or loss.
Date & Time Displays when the latest bullish or bearish signal was generated. Helps check how old or fresh the signal is.
Timeframe Scanner or Current Signal (Trend) on Different Timeframes. Shows the current signal across multiple timeframes.
Row 1 Fixed signals for 1M and 3M.
Row 2 Any 2 Custom Timeframes chosen in input settings.
Traders use this to confirm signals across different timeframes before entering trades. Example If the Day trend is bullish but the 15M chart shows bearish, many traders avoid that trade.
🚦 Gap Up & Gap Down for Untraded Price Marking.
Marks untraded price zones where price may react.
Gap Up & Down Flag Mark
Gap Up: Bullish Bias, Marked Green flag, plotted when candle opens above previous high.
Gap Down: Bearish Bias, Marked as Red flag, plotted when candle opens below previous low.
Input Settings
Enable / Disable from Chart
Threshold: Minimum gap size Threshold to detect
🟡 Institutional Candles for High Volume and Big Price Movement
Indicate strong price movement with high volume.
Marking
Displayed as Yellow Body Candles
Helps identify zones where big players are active.
Input Settings
Enable / Disable from Chart
Body %: Compare of Open & Close with High & Low
Size %: Compare Total Candle Size from Past Range
Volume %: Compare Total Candle Volume from Past Range
⚪ Neutral Candle for Low Volume and Small Price Movement
Shows low volume and minimal price movement.
Marking
Displayed as Hollow Body Candles
Traders usually avoid trading during these candles.
Input Settings
Enable / Disable from Chart.
Candle %: Compare Size of candles.
Volume %: Compare Volume of Candles from Previous Range.
🟥🟩 Supply Demand Zones (Based on Swing High & Low).
Based on swing highs and lows to identify possible reversals.
Zones
🟥Supply Zone: Near swing high, marked with Light Red Zone.
🟩Demand Zone: Near swing low, marked with Light Green Zone.
Input Settings:
Bars Left: How many past Bars Swing will Calculate.
Bars Right: After How many Bars, Zone will plot.
Max Zones: Number of Supply or Demand Zone want to plot on Chart
Delete Breaked Zones: Want to see Disappeared Zone, Uncheck it.
Extend Right: Want to see till End of the Chart, Uncheck it.
📈 Mega Trend Band (Based on HMA) for Overall Trend
Based on HMA (Hull Moving Average) to show overall trend and Help in Filters out trades against the main trend.
Working
Price above band → Bullish trend
Price below band → Bearish trend
Input Setting
Enable / Disable from Chart
HMA Period Setting: 45
👓 How to Use All together for Better Confidence.
🔍Watch for the New Entry icon on the chart.
Find New Signals with help of Automated Alerts.
Check Entry Level, SL, Level 1 and Level 2 (TP2).
Verify Date & Time → how fresh the signal is. Signal not too old.
🧭 Signal is not Self Sufficient for Good Accuracy. So, we suggest a few rules.
Cross‑Check Current Signal with Timeframe Scanner. Trade only when smaller timeframe aligns with bigger trend. (e.g., If Day = Bullish ▲ but 15M = Bearish ▼, avoid entry. Trend may not be stronger.)
Validate with Market Context of Gap. (e.g., If new signal came on Gap Up / Gap Down, avoid entry. Price may reverse.)
Zone Awareness Use Supply Demand zones to refine entries/exits and avoid false signals. (e.g., Entry: If any zone is available between Entry and Level 01, Avoid trade until Zone breaked, Exit: If Zone create between the trade, modify SL according to T-SL and wait.
Trend Filter of overall direction. (e.g., If Mega Trend Band Bullish and Trend is Bearish, Avoid the Trade.)
🕵🏻 Quick Checklist Before Trade
Bullish or Bearish signal?
Dashboard Table shows fresh entry?
SL defined and acceptable risk?
Timeframe Scanner aligned?
No Neutral candle interference?
Institutional candle or Gap supports move?
Supply/Demand zone not against trade?
✅ All Okay - Go for the ENTRY
Set a Proper Entry Point
Always respect SL, Good Trader Never avoid it.
Book partial profits at Level 1, It secure your Trade.
Keep Modifying your SL, According to T-SL Level.
On Level 2, Exit remaining All position for full profit.
📊 Healthy Trading Tips
Risk Small: Never risk more than 1–2% per trade.
Size Smart: Adjust position size to volatility and account size.
Diversify: Don’t put all money in one asset/sector.
Plan Ahead: Set entry, exit, and stop‑loss before trading.
Trade Less: Focus on quality setups, avoid overtrading.
Use Both Analyses: Combine technical charts with fundamental news/events.
Control Emotions: Stick to strategy, avoid fear/greed.
Journal Trades: Record reasons, outcomes, and lessons.
Stay Informed: Track economic calendars and global events.
Take Breaks: Step away after wins/losses to reset.
🎯 Advanced Discipline
Partial Exit: Book profits in stages (e.g., 50% at 1:1, 50% at Final Level).
Check News: Avoid trading during major announcements.
No Tweaks: Don’t change plan mid‑trade; wait for SL/TP.
Fixed Rules: Trade with fixed risk, fixed gains.
No Averaging Losses: Close bad trades, don’t add more.
Keep Learning: Evolve strategy with market changes.
Believe: Trust your plan and process.
Backtest: Practice setups until they’re second nature.
Daily Routine: Pre‑market Preparation, post‑market review.
Optimize Setup: Clean workspace, fast platform, no distractions.
Track Metrics: Win rate, average reward, expectancy, time of day, setup performance.
Trader Identity: Follow rules; money is a byproduct.
Liquidity Check: Avoid low‑volume instruments.
Respect Trend: Trade with momentum, not against it.
Avoid Over‑Leverage: Keep leverage low, avoid margin unless planned.
Risk Disclaimer
This content, including any tools, software, datafeeds, indicators, or scanners, is provided strictly for charting, educational, informational, and paper‑trading purposes only. It does not constitute investment advice, buy/sell recommendations, or real‑money trading strategies.
Not Advisors: We are not registered as investment advisors or research analysts.
Charting Only: Use is limited to testing strategies and evaluation; any application to real trading is at the user’s sole risk.
No Liability: No liability is accepted for financial loss, trading loss, or damages arising from use of the tools or data.
Data Limitations: Market data may be delayed, inaccurate, or incomplete. Past or hypothetical performance is not indicative of future results.
Signals Disclaimer: Automated signals are for evaluation only and should not be treated as accurate or real trading instructions.
High Risk: Trading and investing involve substantial risk and can result in losses beyond the initial capital.
Independent Judgment: Users must exercise independent judgment and consult licensed professionals before making financial decisions
⚠️ Final Note: Trading is speculative and may not be suitable for all investors. Use only risk capital and never invest money you cannot afford to lose.
✅ Always remember🧠 my 3R Rule💡: If the money💰 is yours then, RISK⚖️, REWARD🏆 and REGRET😔 are solely yours. 🔥
PSE, Practical Strategy EnginePSE, Practical Strategy Engine
A ready-to-use engine that is simple to connect your indicator to, simple to use, and effective at generating alerts for order-filled events during the real-time candle.
Great for
• Evaluating indicators on important metrics without the need to write a strategy script for backtesting.
• Using indicators with built-in risk management.
About The PSE
This engine accepts entry and exit signals from your indicator to provide trade signals for both long and short positions. The PSE was written for trading Funds (e.g. ETF’s), Stocks, Forex, Futures, and Cryptocurrencies. The trades on the chart indicate market, limit, and stop orders. The PSE allows for backtesting of trades along with metrics of performance based on trade-groups with many great features.
Note: A link to a video of how to connect your indicator(s) to the PSE is provided below.
Key Features
Trade-Grp’s
A Trade-Grp makes up one or more trade positions from the first position entering to the last position exiting. Using Trade-Grp’s instead of positions should help you better assess if the metric results fit your trading style.
Below are two (2) examples of a Trade-Grp with three (3) positions.
Metrics
A table of metrics is available if the “Show Metrics Table” checkbox is enabled on the Inputs tab, but metrics always show in the Data Window.
Examples of the Metrics Table are shown below.
• ROI (Return on Investment) and CAGR (Compound Annual Growth Rate) are based on the Avg Invest/Trade-Grp and are adjusted for dividends if the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox is enabled.
• Profit/Risked is based on Trade-Grp’s. Also known as reward/risk, as well as expectancy per amount risked. It determines the effectiveness of your strategy and provides a measure of comparison between your strategies. This is adjusted for dividends if the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox is enabled. In the Data Window the color is green when above the breakeven point of making a profit and red when below the breakeven point. In the Table the color is red if below the breakeven point, otherwise it is the default color. For example, using the 3 metrics tables above:
For every USD risked the profit is 1.709 USD.
For every BTC risked the profit is 0.832 BTC.
For every JPY risked the profit is 0.261 JPY.
• Winning % is based on Trade-Grp’s. In the Data Window the color is green when above the breakeven point of making a profit and red when below the breakeven point. In the Table the color is red if below the breakeven point, otherwise it is the default color.
The breakeven point is a relationship between the Profit/Risked and Winning % to indicate system profitability potential. Another way to assess trading system performance. For example, for a low Winning % a high Profit/Risked is needed for the system to be potentially profitable.
• Profit Factor (PF) is based on Trade-Grp’s. The dividend payment, if any, is not considered in the calculation of a win or loss. The “Include Dividends in Profit Factor” checkbox allows you the option to either include or not include dividends in the calculation of Profit Factor. The default is enabled.
Must enable the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox to include dividends in PF.
Including dividends in PF evaluates the trading strategy with a more overall profitability performance view.
Enable/Disable “Include Dividends in Profit Factor” checkbox also affects the Avg Trade-Grp Loss, and thus Equity Loss from ECL and % Equity Loss from ECL.
• Max Consecutive Losses are based on Trade-Grp’s.
• Nbr of Trade-Grp’s and Nbr of Positions.
These help you to determine if enough trades have occurred to validate your strategy. The Nbr of Positions is the count of positions on the chart. The TV list of trades in the Strategy Tester may indicate more than what is actually shown on the chart. The Data Window includes 'Nbr Strat Tester Trades', which equals the TV listing trades, to help you locate specific trades on the chart.
• Time in Market (%) is based on Trade-Grp’s and date range selected.
• Avg Invest/Trade-Grp will indicate the average amount of money invested in a Trade-Grp. This is adjusted for dividends if the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox is enabled.
• Equivalent Consecutive Losses, labeled as Equiv. Cons. Losses (ECL).
This value is determined by the Winning % and Nbr of Trade-Grp’s. This simulates the more likely case of a series of losses, then a small win, then another series of losses to form an equivalent consecutive losing streak. To lower the value, increase the Winning %.
• Equity Loss from ECL is the equity loss from the equivalent consecutive losses.
• % Equity Loss from ECL is the percent of equity loss from the equivalent consecutive losses.
Risk Management
• Pyramid rules enforce and maintain position sizing designated by you on the Inputs tab (% Equity to Risk, Up/Dwn Gap) & Properties tab (number of pyramids, slippage, and commission).
A pyramid position will not occur unless both its stop covers the last entry price with gap/slippage and commission cost of previous trade is covered. If take profit is enabled, a pyramid position will not occur unless commission cost of the trade is covered when take profit target is reached.
• Position sizing, stop-loss (SL), trailing stop-loss (TSL), and take profit (TP) are used.
• Wash sale prevention for applicable assets is enforced. Wash sale assets include stock and fund (e.g. ETF’s).
• No more than one entry position per candle is enforced .
Other Great Features
• Losing Trade-Grp’s indicated at the exit with label text in the color blue. Used to easily find consecutive losses affecting your strategy’s performance. The dividend payment, if any, is not considered in the calculation of a win or loss.
• Position values can be displayed on the chart. The number format is based on the min tick value, but is limited to 8 decimal places only for display purposes.
• Dividends per share and the amount can be displayed on the chart.
• Hold Days . This is the number of days to hold before allowing the next Trade-Grp. Can be a decimal number. This feature may help those trading on a cash account to avoid any settlement violations when trading the same asset.
• Date Filter. Partition the time when trading is allowed to see if the strategy works well across the date range selected. The metrics should be acceptable across all four (4) time ranges: entire range, 1st half, IQR (inter-quartile range), and 2nd half.
• Price gap amount identification. Used in determining if a pyramid entry may be profitable, and may be used in determining slippage amount to use.
• When TP is enabled, the PSE will only allow a pyramid position if the potential is profitable based on commission and price gap selected.
• Trade-Grp’s shown in background color: green for long positions and red for short positions.
• The PSE will alert you to update your stop-loss as the market changes if your exchange/broker does not allow for trailing stop-loss orders. Enable this option on the Inputs tab with Alert Chg TSL.
• The PSE will alert you if your drawdown exceeds Max % Equity Drawdown set on the Inputs tab.
• The PSE will send an alert to warn you of an expiring GTC order.
Some brokers will indicate the order is GTC, Good 'Till Cancelled, but there really is a time limit on the order and is typically 60-120 days. Therefore, the PSE will alert you if you've been in position for close to 60 days so you can refresh your order. The alert is typically a few days before the 60-day time period.
• For order fill alerts just use a {{placeholder}} in the Message of the alert. Details on how to enter placeholders is explained below.
• Identify same bar enter/exit for first entries and pyramids. This is shown in the Data Window as well. This can help you determine what stop-loss % works best for your trading style.
• Leverage trading information is displayed in the Data Window and applies to Trade-Grps.
Failed PosSize or Margin (%): Shows a zero if the failed-to-trade position size was less than 1 or shows the margin % which failed to meet the margin requirement set in the Properties tab. A flag will show on the bar where a failed-to-trade occurred. This is only applicable to the first position of a Trade-Grp. Position the cursor over the flag for the value to show in the Data Window.
Notional Value: total Trade-Grp position size x latest entry price x point value. The equity must be > notional value x margin requirement for a trade to occur.
Current Margin (%): must be greater than margin requirement set on the Properties tab in order for a trade to occur.
Margin Call Price: when enabled on the Style tab is displayed on both the chart and the Data Window as shown below.
PSE Settings
Pyramids
• Pyramiding requires the Stop Method to be set to either TSL or Both (meaning SL & TSL).
• The maximum number of pyramids is determined by the value entered in the Properties tab.
• Pyramid orders require the enter price to be higher than the previous close for Longs and lower than the previous close for Shorts.
• Pyramids also require the stop with gap/slippage to be higher than the last entry price for Longs, and lower than the last entry price for Shorts. This covers all previous positions and maintains position sizing.
• When take profit, TP, is enabled, the pyramids also require that they will be profitable when opening a position assuming they will reach TP. This is automatically adjusted by you with the Dwn Gap/Up Gap, Slippage, and Commission settings.
Inputs Tab
General Settings
Color Traded Background
Enable to change background color where in a trade. Green for long positions and red for short positions.
Show Losing Trade-Grp
Enable to show if losing Trade-Grp and is indicated by text in blue color. The last position may be at a loss, but if there was profit for the Trade-Grp, then it will not be shown as a loss .
Show Position Values
Enable to show the currency value of each position in gold color.
Include Dividends in Profit
This feature is only applicable if the asset pays dividends and the time frame period of the chart is 1D or less, otherwise ignored. The PSE assumes dividends are taken as cash and not reinvested.
Enable to adjust ROI, CAGR, Profit/Risked, Avg Invest/Trade-Grp, and Equity to include dividend payments. This feature considers if you were in position at least one day prior to the ex-dividend date and had not exited until after the ex-dividend date.
When Show Dividends is enabled it will display the payout in currency/share, as well as the total amount based on the number of shares the position(s) of the Trade-Grp are currently holding.
Include Dividends in Profit Factor
This checkbox allows you the option to either include or not include dividends in the calculation of Profit Factor. Must enable the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox to include dividends in PF. The dividend payment, if any, is not considered in the calculation of a win or loss.
Show Metrics Table
Options are font size and table location.
Alert Failed to Trade
Enable for the strategy to alert you when a trade did not happen due to low equity or low order size. Applicable only for the first position of a Trade-Grp.
Trade Direction
Options are 'Longs Only', 'Both', 'Shorts Only'.
Hold Days
This is the number of days to hold before allowing the next Trade-Grp. Applies only to the first trade position of a Trade-Grp. Where a Trade-Grp consists of the first position plus any pyramid positions.
The value entered will be overwritten to >= 31 to prevent wash sale for applicable assets in the event the last Trade-Grp was a loss. Wash sale assets include stock and fund (i.e. ETF’s).
The minimum value is the equivalent of 1 candle and is automatically assigned by the PSE if the entered value is equivalent to less than one candle. To calculate Hold Days in # of candles on the Hour chart divide the chart period by 24 x #candles. On the Minute chart divide the chart period by 60 then by 24 x #candles.
Show Vertical Lines at From Date & To Date
Shows a vertical dotted line at the From Date and To Date for visual inspection of the setting.
Date Filter
When enabled, trades are allowed between the From Date and To Date, i.e., the date range.
When disabled, trades are allowed for all candles.
Partition the time when trading is allowed to see if your indicator settings work well across the date range. Click 1st Half, IQR (inter-quartile range), or 2nd Half buttons to trade a portion of the date range.
Select only one at-a-time to partition the time when trading is allowed.
When 1st Half is enabled only trades for the 1st half of the date range are allowed.
When IQR is enabled only trades for the inter-quartile date range are allowed.
When 2nd Half is enabled only trades for the 2nd half of the date range are allowed.
Position Sizing
The % of Equity to Risk has been separated into two (2) areas: for initial trades and for pyramid trades. This allows for greater ability to maximize profits within your acceptable drawdown. A variation of the Anti-Martingale method from the initial trade if you choose to use it in that manner.
% Equity to Risk for Initial Trades: enter the percent of equity you want to risk per position for the initial trades of each Trade-Grp. For example, for 1% enter 1.
% Equity to Risk for Pyramid Trades: enter the percent of equity you want to risk per position for the pyramid trades of each Trade-Grp. For example, for 2% enter 2.
% Equity for Max Position Size: the position size will not exceed this amount. For example, for 25% enter 25.
Max % Equity Drawdown Warning: an alert will be triggered if the maximum drawdown exceeds this v alue. For example, for 10% enter 10.
Stop Methods
NOTE: The Stop Method must be either Both or TSL in order for the pyramids to work. This feature enforces position sizing.
Stop-loss, SL, and trailing stop-loss, TSL, are other features that enforce risk management.
The trailing stop-loss, TSL, is activated immediately if Stop Method = TSL. If Stop Method = Both, then the TSL is activated when its value is above stop-loss, SL, for Longs and below the SL for Shorts.
The calculated TSL value (shown on the chart by + symbol) of the previous bar is used for the current bar and the plot value is off by default, but you can it turn on via the Style tab. This is available so you can better understand how the TSL value used was calculated from. It is beneficial to show when monitoring the real-time candle.
Alert Chg TSL
When enabled, this feature will alert you to update your stop price if it moves greater than the change amount in %. The amount is the absolute % so will work for both Longs and Shorts. For example, for 1% enter 1 . This is provided since some exchanges/brokers do not offer TSL orders and you must manually adjust as price action plays out.
The alert will also suggest a stop limit price based on the gap selected and explained below.
The alert will occur at the close of the candle at the calculated TSL value of the candle just prior to the real-time candle.
Dwn Gap/Up Gap Input Settings
A price gap is the difference between the closing price of the previous candle and the opening price of the current candle. Dwn Gap and Up Gap are illustrated here.
The values of the Dwn Gap and Up Gap can be seen in the Data Window and are based on the settings of the Date Filter.
The options are “zero gap”, "median gap", "avg gap", "80 pct gap", "90 pct gap". The X pct gap stands for X percentile rank. For example, "80 pct gap" means that 80% of the gaps are less than or equal to the value shown in the Data Window. Select “zero gap” to disable this feature.
If Show Stop Limit is enabled, it will show a dotted-line below or above the current stop price where a stop-limit order should be taken. It is shown based on the gap option selected. Again, the PSE trades market, limit, and stop orders, but a stop-limit may be shown if you wanted to see where one would be set using the Up/Dwn Gap.
Dwn Gap: Affects Short Take Profit, Long Pyramid Entries, and to show the Long Stop Limit.
Up Gap : Affects Long Take Profit, Short Pyramid Entries, and to show the Short Stop Limit.
Fixed Take Profit (TP)
When take profit (TP) is enabled, the PSE will determine if opening a pyramid position will be in profit assuming the TP will be hit while considering commission costs (on Properties tab).
The larger of Up Gap or Slippage value is used with Long positions regarding TP.
The larger of Dwn Gap or Slippage value is used with Short positions regarding TP.
Properties Tab
• Initial Capital: Set as desired.
• Base Currency: Leave as Default. The PSE is designed to use the instrument’s currency, therefore leave as Default.
• Order Size: Leave as default. This setting has been disabled and position sizing is handled on the Inputs tab and is based on % of equity.
• Pyramiding: Set as desired.
• Commission: Set as number %. The PSE is designed to only work with commission as a percent of the position value.
• Verify Price for Limit Orders: Set as desired.
Slippage
Adjust Slippage on the Properties tab to account for a realistic bid-ask spread. You can use one of Dwn/Up Gap values or other guidelines. Again, the Dwn/Up Gap values are based on the Date Filter input settings.
Heed warnings from the TradingView Pine Script™ manual about values entered into the Slippage field.
The Slippage (ticks) have a noticeable influence on entry price and exit price especially at the beginning when the date range includes prices from $0.01 to $100,000.00 like that for BTC-USD INDEX. When this is the case, it is best to use different slippage values when partitioning time with the Date Filter.
To minimize the effects of slippage, yet account for it select ‘median gap’ on the Input Tab and use that value for slippage on the Properties tab.
The slippage value is included in the placeholder {{strategy.order.price}}.
Leverage Trading
The PSE is designed to be used both without leverage (the default) and with leverage.
These two settings apply to Trade-Grps. For example, for 5x leverage enter 20 (1/5x100=20).
Margin for Long Positions: Set as desired. The default is 100%.
Margin for Short Positions: Set as desired. The default is 100%.
This setting on the Inputs tab applies to each trade position within a Trade-Grp.
Max % Equity per Position: Set as desired. The default is 20% and intended for non-leverage trading. For leverage trading set as desired. For example, for 3x leverage enter 300 (3x100=300).
Recalculate After Order Is Filled
The PSE uses the strategy parameter calc_on_order_fills=true to allow for enter/exit on the same bar and generate alerts immediately after an order is filled. This parameter is on the Properties tab and is named ‘Recalculate After order is filled’ and is enabled by default.
Disabling this feature will cause the PSE to not work as intended.
You will see the following Caution! on the TV Strategy Tester
This occurs because the PSE has the strategy parameter calc_on_order_fills = true.
Again, the PSE will only work as intended if this parameter is enabled and set to true.
Therefore, you can close the caution sign and be confident of receiving realistic results.
Recalculate On every tick: Disable.
Fill Orders
• Using bar magnifier: Set as desired.
• On Bar Close: Disable. The PSE will not work as intended if this is enabled.
• Using Standard OHLC: Set as desired.
Using The Alert Message Box From TV Strategy Alert
Set alerts to gain access to all the alerts from PSE. This allows for both order filled alerts, as well as the alert function calls related to refresh GTC orders, drawdown exceeded, update stop-loss order, and Failed to Trade.
Example Message for Manual Trading Alerts
(This is just an example. Consult TV manual for possible placeholders to use.)
{
Alert for {{plot("position_for_alert")}} position. (long = 1; short = -1)
{{exchange}}:{{ticker}} on TF of {{interval}} at Broker Name
{{strategy.order.action}} Equity x Equity_Multiplier USD in shares at price = {{strategy.order.price}},
where Equity_Multiplier = {{strategy.order.contracts}} x {{strategy.order.price}} / {{plot("Equity")}}
or {{strategy.order.action}} {{strategy.order.contracts}} shares at price = {{strategy.order.price}}.
}
Note: Use the Equity x Equity_Multiplier method if you have several accounts with different initial capital.
Example Message for Bot Trading Alerts
(You must consult your specific bot for configuring the alert message. This is just an example.)
{
"action": "{{strategy.order.action}}",
“price”: {{strategy.order.price}}
"amount": {{strategy.order.contracts}},
"botId": "1234"
}
Connecting to the PSE
The diagram below illustrates how to connect indicators to the PSE.
The Aroon and MACD indicators are only used here as an example. Substitute your own indicators and add as many as you like.
Connection Indicator for the PSE
A video of how to connect your indicator(s) to the PSE is below.
The Connection Indicator for the PSE, also called here the connection-indicator.
Below is a description of how to connect your chosen indicators to the connection-indicator. Two (2) indicators were chosen for the example, but you may have one (1) or many indicators.
If you have source code access to your indicators you can paste the code directly into the connection-indicator to eliminate the need to have those indicators on the chart and the additional connection of them to the connection-indicator. Below will assume source code to the indicators are not available.
The MACD and Aroon Oscillator are from TV built standard indicators and are shown here just as an example for inputs (i.e. source) to the connection-indicator. They were configured as follows:
The source code for the connection-indicator is shown below. Substitute your own chosen indicators and add as many as you like to create your connection-indicator that feeds into the PSE. The MACD and Aroon Oscillator were simply chosen as an example. Configure your connection-indicator in the manner shown below.
// This Pine Script™ code is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public License 2.0 at mozilla.org
// This is just an example Indicator to show how to interface with the PSE.
// The indicators used in the example are standard TV built indicators.
//@version=5
indicator(title="Connection Indicator for the PSE", overlay=false, max_lines_count=500, max_labels_count=500, max_boxes_count=500)
// Ind_1 INDICATOR ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
// This is just and example and used MACD histogram as the source.
Filter_Ind_1 = input.bool(false, 'Ind_1', group='Ind_1 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~', tooltip='Click ON to enable the indicator')
input_Ind_1 = input.source(title = "input_Ind_1", defval = close, group='Ind_1 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~')
Entry_Ind_1_Long = Filter_Ind_1 ? input_Ind_1 > 0 ? 1 : 0 : 0
Entry_Ind_1_Short = Filter_Ind_1 ? input_Ind_1 < 0 ? 1 : 0 : 0
Exit_Ind_1_Long = Entry_Ind_1_Short
Exit_Ind_1_Short = Entry_Ind_1_Long
// Ind_2 INDICATOR ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
// This is just an example and used Aroon Oscillator as the source. Included limits to use with the oscillator to determine enter and exit.
Filter_Ind_2 = input.bool(false, "Ind_2", group='Ind_2 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~', tooltip='Click ON to enable the indicator')
Filter_Ind_2_Limit = input.int(35, minval=0, step=5, group='Ind_2 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~')
Filter_Ind_2_UL = Filter_Ind_2_Limit
Filter_Ind_2_LL = -Filter_Ind_2_Limit
up = input.source(title = "input_Ind_2A Up", defval = close, group='Ind_2 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~')
down = input.source(title = "input_Ind_2B Down", defval = close, group='Ind_2 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~')
oscillator = up - down
Entry_Ind_2_Long = Filter_Ind_2? oscillator > Filter_Ind_2_UL ? 1 : 0 : 0
Entry_Ind_2_Short = Filter_Ind_2? oscillator < Filter_Ind_2_LL ? 1 : 0 : 0
Exit_Ind_2_Long = Entry_Ind_2_Short
Exit_Ind_2_Short = Entry_Ind_2_Long
//#region ~~~~~~~ASSEMBLY OF FILTERS ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~}
// You may have as many indicators as you like. Assemble them in similar fashion as below.
// ——————— Assembly of Entry Filters
Nbr_Entries = input.int(1, minval=1, title='Min Nbr Entries', inline='nbr_in_out', group='Assembly of Indicators')
// Update the assembly based on the number of indicators connected.
EntryLongOK = Entry_Ind_1_Long + Entry_Ind_2_Long >= Nbr_Entries? true: false
EntryShortOK = Entry_Ind_1_Short + Entry_Ind_2_Short >= Nbr_Entries? true: false
entry_signal = EntryLongOK ? 1 : EntryShortOK ? -1 : 0
plot(entry_signal, title="Entry_Signal", color=color.new(color.blue, 0))
// ——————— Assembly of Exit Filters
Nbr_Exits = input.int(1, minval=1, title='Min Nbr of Exits', inline='nbr_in_out', group='Assembly of Indicators', tooltip='Enter the minimum number of entries & exits
required for a signal.')
// Update the assembly based on the number of indicators connected.
ExitLongOK = Exit_Ind_1_Long + Exit_Ind_2_Long >= Nbr_Exits? true: false
ExitShortOK = Exit_Ind_1_Short + Exit_Ind_2_Short >= Nbr_Exits? true: false
exit_signal = ExitLongOK ? 1 : ExitShortOK ? -1 : 0
plot(exit_signal, title="Exit_Signal", color=color.new(color.red, 0))
//#endregion ~~~~~~~END OF ASSEMBLY OF FILTERS ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~}
The input box for the connection-indicator is shown below. The default for input source is “close”. For Input_Ind_1 click the dropdown and select the MACD Histogram. For Input_Ind_2 click the dropdown and select Aroon Up and Aroon Down as shown.
Signal Connection Section of PSE
Below is a description of how to connect your chosen indicators to the PSE from the connection-indicator.
At the PSE Input tab, the Signal Connection Section is where you select the source of the Entry and Exit Signal to the PSE. These are the outputs from connection-indicator.
The default source is “close”. Click the dropdown and select the entry and exit signal to establish a connection as shown below.
AlgoBuilder [Trend-Following] | FractalystWhat's the strategy's purpose and functionality?
This strategy is designed for both traders and investors looking to rely on and trade based on historical and backtested data using automation. The main goal is to build profitable trend-following strategies that outperform the underlying asset in terms of returns while minimizing drawdown. For example, as for a benchmark, if the S&P 500 (SPX) has achieved an estimated 10% annual return with a maximum drawdown of -57% over the past 20 years, using this strategy with different entry and exit techniques, users can potentially seek ways to achieve a higher Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) while maintaining a lower maximum drawdown.
Although the strategy can be applied to all markets and timeframes, it is most effective on stocks, indices, future markets, cryptocurrencies, and commodities and JPY currency pairs given their trending behaviors.
In trending market conditions, the strategy employs a combination of moving averages and diverse entry models to identify and capitalize on upward market movements. It integrates market structure-based trailing stop-loss mechanisms across different timeframes and provides exit techniques, including percentage-based and risk-reward (RR) based take profit levels.
Additionally, the strategy has also a feature that includes a built-in probability and sentiment function for traders who want to implement probabilities and market sentiment right into their trading strategies.
Performance summary, weekly, and monthly tables enable quick visualization of performance metrics like net profit, maximum drawdown, compound annual growth rate (CAGR), profit factor, average trade, average risk-reward ratio (RR), and more. This aids optimization to meet specific goals and risk tolerance levels effectively.
-----
How does the strategy perform for both investors and traders?
The strategy has two main modes, tailored for different market participants: Traders and Investors.
Trading:
1. Trading (1x):
- Designed for traders looking to capitalize on bullish trending markets.
- Utilizes a percentage risk per trade to manage risk and optimize returns.
- Suitable for active trading with a focus on trend-following and risk management.
- (1x) This mode ensures no stacking of positions, allowing for only one running position or trade at a time.
◓: Mode | %: Risk percentage per trade
2. Trading (2x):
Similar to the 1x mode but allows for two pyramiding entries.
This approach enables traders to increase their position size as the trade moves in their favor, potentially enhancing profits during strong bullish trends.
◓: Mode | %: Risk percentage per trade
3. Investing:
- Geared towards investors who aim to capitalize on bullish trending markets without using leverage while mitigating the asset's maximum drawdown.
- Utilizes 100% of the equity to buy, hold, and manage the asset.
- Focuses on long-term growth and capital appreciation by fully investing in the asset during bullish conditions.
- ◓: Mode | %: Risk not applied (In investing mode, the strategy uses 100% of equity to buy the asset)
-----
What's the purpose of using moving averages in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Using moving averages is a widely-used technique to trade with the trend.
The main purpose of using moving averages in this strategy is to filter out bearish price action and to only take trades when the price is trading ABOVE specified moving averages.
The script uses different types of moving averages with user-adjustable timeframes and periods/lengths, allowing traders to try out different variations to maximize strategy performance and minimize drawdowns.
By applying these calculations, the strategy effectively identifies bullish trends and avoids market conditions that are not conducive to profitable trades.
The MA filter allows traders to choose whether they want a specific moving average above or below another one as their entry condition.
This comparison filter can be turned on (>/<) or off.
For example, you can set the filter so that MA#1 > MA#2, meaning the first moving average must be above the second one before the script looks for entry conditions. This adds an extra layer of trend confirmation, ensuring that trades are only taken in more favorable market conditions.
MA #1: Fast MA | MA #2: Medium MA | MA #3: Slow MA
⍺: MA Period | Σ: MA Timeframe
-----
What entry modes are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
The strategy by default uses two different techniques for the entry criteria with user-adjustable left and right bars: Breakout and Fractal.
1. Breakout Entries :
- The strategy looks for pivot high points with a default period of 3.
- It stores the most recent high level in a variable.
- When the price crosses above this most recent level, the strategy checks if all conditions are met and the bar is closed before taking the buy entry.
◧: Pivot high left bars period | ◨: Pivot high right bars period
2. Fractal Entries :
- The strategy looks for pivot low points with a default period of 3.
- When a pivot low is detected, the strategy checks if all conditions are met and the bar is closed before taking the buy entry.
◧: Pivot low left bars period | ◨: Pivot low right bars period
By utilizing these entry modes, the strategy aims to capitalize on bullish price movements while ensuring that the necessary conditions are met to validate the entry points.
-----
What type of stop-loss identification method are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Initial Stop-Loss:
1. ATR Based:
The Average True Range (ATR) is a method used in technical analysis to measure volatility. It is not used to indicate the direction of price but to measure volatility, especially volatility caused by price gaps or limit moves.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ATR, the True Range (TR) first needs to be identified. The TR takes into account the most current period high/low range as well as the previous period close.
The True Range is the largest of the following:
- Current Period High minus Current Period Low
- Absolute Value of Current Period High minus Previous Period Close
- Absolute Value of Current Period Low minus Previous Period Close
- The ATR is then calculated as the moving average of the TR over a specified period. (The default period is 14).
Example - ATR (14) * 1.5
⍺: ATR period | Σ: ATR Multiplier
2. ADR Based:
The Average Day Range (ADR) is an indicator that measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ADR for a particular day:
- Calculate the average of the high prices over a specified number of days.
- Calculate the average of the low prices over the same number of days.
- Find the difference between these average values.
- The default period for calculating the ADR is 14 days. A shorter period may introduce more noise, while a longer period may be slower to react to new market movements.
Example - ADR (14) * 1.5
⍺: ADR period | Σ: ADR Multiplier
Application in Strategy:
- The strategy calculates the current bar's ADR/ATR with a user-defined period.
- It then multiplies the ADR/ATR by a user-defined multiplier to determine the initial stop-loss level.
By using these methods, the strategy dynamically adjusts the initial stop-loss based on market volatility, helping to protect against adverse price movements while allowing for enough room for trades to develop.
Trailing Stop-Loss:
One of the key elements of this strategy is its ability to detec buyside and sellside liquidity levels across multiple timeframes to trail the stop-loss once the trade is in running profits.
By utilizing this approach, the strategy allows enough room for price to run.
There are two built-in trailing stop-loss (SL) options you can choose from while in a trade:
1. External Trailing Stop-Loss:
- Uses sell-side liquidity to trail your stop-loss, allowing price to consolidate before continuation. This method is less aggressive and provides more room for price fluctuations.
Example - External - Wick below the trailing SL - 12H trailing timeframe
⍺: Exit type | Σ: Trailing stop-loss timeframe
2. Internal Trailing Stop-Loss:
- Uses the most recent swing low with a period of 2 to trail your stop-loss. This method is more aggressive compared to the external trailing stop-loss, as it tightens the stop-loss closer to the current price action.
Example - Internal - Close below the trailing SL - 6H trailing timeframe
⍺: Exit type | Σ: Trailing stop-loss timeframe
Each market behaves differently across various timeframes, and it is essential to test different parameters and optimizations to find out which trailing stop-loss method gives you the desired results and performance.
-----
What type of break-even and take profit identification methods are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
For Break-Even:
- You can choose to set a break-even level at which your initial stop-loss moves to the entry price as soon as it hits, and your trailing stop-loss gets activated (if enabled).
- You can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based break-even, allowing you to set your break-even level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
For TP1 (Take Profit 1):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed or 50% if the TP2 boolean is enabled.
- Similar to break-even, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP1 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
For TP2 (Take Profit 2):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed.
- As with break-even and TP1, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP2 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
The underlying calculations involve determining the price levels at which these actions are triggered. For break-even, it moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price and activate the trailing stop-loss once the break-even level is reached.
For TP1 and TP2, it's specifying the price levels at which the position is partially or fully closed based on the chosen method (percentage or RR) above the entry price.
These calculations are crucial for managing risk and optimizing profitability in the strategy.
⍺: BE/TP type (%/RR) | Σ: how many RR/% above the current price
-----
What's the ADR filter? What does it do? What are the underlying calculations?
The Average Day Range (ADR) measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
The period of the ADR filter used in this strategy is tied to the same period you've used for your initial stop-loss.
Users can define the minimum ADR they want to be met before the script looks for entry conditions.
ADR Bias Filter:
- Compares the current bar ADR with the ADR (Defined by user):
- If the current ADR is higher, it indicates that volatility has increased compared to ADR (DbU).(⬆)
- If the current ADR is lower, it indicates that volatility has decreased compared to ADR (DbU).(⬇)
Calculations:
1. Calculate ADR:
- Average the high prices over the specified period.
- Average the low prices over the same period.
- Find the difference between these average values in %.
2. Current ADR vs. ADR (DbU):
- Calculate the ADR for the current bar.
- Calculate the ADR (DbU).
- Compare the two values to determine if volatility has increased or decreased.
By using the ADR filter, the strategy ensures that trades are only taken in favorable market conditions where volatility meets the user's defined threshold, thus optimizing entry conditions and potentially improving the overall performance of the strategy.
>: Minimum required ADR for entry | %: Current ADR comparison to ADR of 14 days ago.
-----
What's the probability filter? What are the underlying calculations?
The probability filter is designed to enhance trade entries by using buyside liquidity and probability analysis to filter out unfavorable conditions.
This filter helps in identifying optimal entry points where the likelihood of a profitable trade is higher.
Calculations:
1. Understanding Swing highs and Swing Lows
Swing High: A Swing High is formed when there is a high with 2 lower highs to the left and right.
Swing Low: A Swing Low is formed when there is a low with 2 higher lows to the left and right.
2. Understanding the purpose and the underlying calculations behind Buyside, Sellside and Equilibrium levels.
3. Understanding probability calculations
1. Upon the formation of a new range, the script waits for the price to reach and tap into equilibrium or the 50% level. Status: "⏸" - Inactive
2. Once equilibrium is tapped into, the equilibrium status becomes activated and it waits for either liquidity side to be hit. Status: "▶" - Active
3. If the buyside liquidity is hit, the script adds to the count of successful buyside liquidity occurrences. Similarly, if the sellside is tapped, it records successful sellside liquidity occurrences.
5. Finally, the number of successful occurrences for each side is divided by the overall count individually to calculate the range probabilities.
Note: The calculations are performed independently for each directional range. A range is considered bearish if the previous breakout was through a sellside liquidity. Conversely, a range is considered bullish if the most recent breakout was through a buyside liquidity.
Example - BSL > 50%
-----
What's the sentiment Filter? What are the underlying calculations?
Sentiment filter aims to calculate the percentage level of bullish or bearish fluctuations within equally divided price sections, in the latest price range.
Calculations:
This filter calculates the current sentiment by identifying the highest swing high and the lowest swing low, then evenly dividing the distance between them into percentage amounts. If the price is above the 50% mark, it indicates bullishness, whereas if it's below 50%, it suggests bearishness.
Sentiment Bias Identification:
Bullish Bias: The current price is trading above the 50% daily range.
Bearish Bias: The current price is trading below the 50% daily range.
Example - Sentiment Enabled | Bullish degree above 50% | Bullish sentimental bias
>: Minimum required sentiment for entry | %: Current sentimental degree in a (Bullish/Bearish) sentimental bias
-----
What's the range length Filter? What are the underlying calculations?
The range length filter identifies the price distance between buyside and sellside liquidity levels in percentage terms. When enabled, the script only looks for entries when the minimum range length is met. This helps ensure that trades are taken in markets with sufficient price movement.
Calculations:
Range Length (%) = ( ( Buyside Level − Sellside Level ) / Current Price ) ×100
Range Bias Identification:
Bullish Bias: The current range price has broken above the previous external swing high.
Bearish Bias: The current range price has broken below the previous external swing low.
Example - Range length filter is enabled | Range must be above 5% | Price must be in a bearish range
>: Minimum required range length for entry | %: Current range length percentage in a (Bullish/Bearish) range
-----
What's the day filter Filter, what does it do?
The day filter allows users to customize the session time and choose the specific days they want to include in the strategy session. This helps traders tailor their strategies to particular trading sessions or days of the week when they believe the market conditions are more favorable for their trading style.
Customize Session Time:
Users can define the start and end times for the trading session.
This allows the strategy to only consider trades within the specified time window, focusing on periods of higher market activity or preferred trading hours.
Select Days:
Users can select which days of the week to include in the strategy.
This feature is useful for excluding days with historically lower volatility or unfavorable trading conditions (e.g., Mondays or Fridays).
Benefits:
Focus on Optimal Trading Periods:
By customizing session times and days, traders can focus on periods when the market is more likely to present profitable opportunities.
Avoid Unfavorable Conditions:
Excluding specific days or times can help avoid trading during periods of low liquidity or high unpredictability, such as major news events or holidays.
Increased Flexibility: The filter provides increased flexibility, allowing traders to adapt the strategy to their specific needs and preferences.
Example - Day filter | Session Filter
θ: Session time | Exchange time-zone
-----
What tables are available in this script?
Table Type:
- Summary: Provides a general overview, displaying key performance parameters such as Net Profit, Profit Factor, Max Drawdown, Average Trade, Closed Trades, Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR), MAR and more.
CAGR: It calculates the 'Compound Annual Growth Rate' first and last taken trades on your chart. The CAGR is a notional, annualized growth rate that assumes all profits are reinvested. It only takes into account the prices of the two end points — not drawdowns, so it does not calculate risk. It can be used as a yardstick to compare the performance of two strategies. Since it annualizes values, it requires a minimum 4H timeframe to display the CAGR value. annualizing returns over smaller periods of times doesn't produce very meaningful figures.
MAR: Measure of return adjusted for risk: CAGR divided by Max Drawdown. Indicates how comfortable the system might be to trade. Higher than 0.5 is ideal, 1.0 and above is very good, and anything above 3.0 should be considered suspicious and you need to make sure the total number of trades are high enough by running a Deep Backtest in strategy tester. (available for TradingView Premium users.)
Avg Trade: The sum of money gained or lost by the average trade generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the Net Profit by the overall number of closed trades. An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.
MaxDD: Displays the largest drawdown of losses, i.e., the maximum possible loss that the strategy could have incurred among all of the trades it has made. This value is calculated separately for every bar that the strategy spends with an open position.
Profit Factor: The amount of money a trading strategy made for every unit of money it lost (in the selected currency). This value is calculated by dividing gross profits by gross losses.
Avg RR: This is calculated by dividing the average winning trade by the average losing trade. This field is not a very meaningful value by itself because it does not take into account the ratio of the number of winning vs losing trades, and strategies can have different approaches to profitability. A strategy may trade at every possibility in order to capture many small profits, yet have an average losing trade greater than the average winning trade. The higher this value is, the better, but it should be considered together with the percentage of winning trades and the net profit.
Winrate: The percentage of winning trades generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the number of winning trades by the total number of closed trades generated by a strategy. Percent profitable is not a very reliable measure by itself. A strategy could have many small winning trades, making the percent profitable high with a small average winning trade, or a few big winning trades accounting for a low percent profitable and a big average winning trade. Most trend-following successful strategies have a percent profitability of 15-40% but are profitable due to risk management control.
BE Trades: Number of break-even trades, excluding commission/slippage.
Losing Trades: The total number of losing trades generated by the strategy.
Winning Trades: The total number of winning trades generated by the strategy.
Total Trades: Total number of taken traders visible your charts.
Net Profit: The overall profit or loss (in the selected currency) achieved by the trading strategy in the test period. The value is the sum of all values from the Profit column (on the List of Trades tab), taking into account the sign.
- Monthly: Displays performance data on a month-by-month basis, allowing users to analyze performance trends over each month.
- Weekly: Displays performance data on a week-by-week basis, helping users to understand weekly performance variations.
- OFF: Hides the performance table.
Labels:
- OFF: Hides labels in the performance table.
- PnL: Shows the profit and loss of each trade individually, providing detailed insights into the performance of each trade.
- Range: Shows the range length and Average Day Range (ADR), offering additional context about market conditions during each trade.
Profit Color:
- Allows users to set the color for representing profit in the performance table, helping to quickly distinguish profitable periods.
Loss Color:
- Allows users to set the color for representing loss in the performance table, helping to quickly identify loss-making periods.
These customizable tables provide traders with flexible and detailed performance analysis, aiding in better strategy evaluation and optimization.
-----
User-input styles and customizations:
To facilitate studying historical data, all conditions and rules can be applied to your charts. By plotting background colors on your charts, you'll be able to identify what worked and what didn't in certain market conditions.
Please note that all background colors in the style are disabled by default to enhance visualization.
-----
How to Use This Algobuilder to Create a Profitable Edge and System:
Choose Your Strategy mode:
- Decide whether you are creating an investing strategy or a trading strategy.
Select a Market:
- Choose a one-sided market such as stocks, indices, or cryptocurrencies.
Historical Data:
- Ensure the historical data covers at least 10 years of price action for robust backtesting.
Timeframe Selection:
- Choose the timeframe you are comfortable trading with. It is strongly recommended to use a timeframe above 15 minutes to minimize the impact of commissions on your profits.
Set Commission and Slippage:
- Properly set the commission and slippage in the strategy properties according to your broker or prop firm specifications.
Parameter Optimization:
- Use trial and error to test different parameters until you find the performance results you are looking for in the summary table or, preferably, through deep backtesting using the strategy tester.
Trade Count:
- Ensure the number of trades is 100 or more; the higher, the better for statistical significance.
Positive Average Trade:
- Make sure the average trade value is above zero.
(An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.)
Performance Metrics:
- Look for a high profit factor, MAR (Mar Ratio), CAGR (Compound Annual Growth Rate), and net profit with minimum drawdown. Ideally, aim for a drawdown under 20-30%, depending on your risk tolerance.
Refinement and Optimization:
- Try out different markets and timeframes.
- Continue working on refining your edge using the available filters and components to further optimize your strategy.
Automation:
- Once you’re confident in your strategy, you can use the automation section to connect the algorithm to your broker or prop firm.
- Trade a fully automated and backtested trading strategy, allowing for hands-free execution and management.
-----
What makes this strategy original?
1. Incorporating direct integration of probabilities into the strategy.
2. Leveraging market sentiment to construct a profitable approach.
3. Utilizing built-in market structure-based trailing stop-loss mechanisms across various timeframes.
4. Offering both investing and trading strategies, facilitating optimization from different perspectives.
5. Automation for efficient execution.
6. Providing a summary table for instant access to key parameters of the strategy.
-----
How to use automation?
For Traders:
1. Ensure the strategy parameters are properly set based on your optimized parameters.
2. Enter your PineConnector License ID in the designated field.
3. Specify the desired risk level.
4. Provide the Metatrader symbol.
5. Check for chart updates to ensure the automation table appears on the top right corner, displaying your License ID, risk, and symbol.
6. Set up an alert with the strategy selected as Condition and the Message as {{strategy.order.alert_message}}.
7. Activate the Webhook URL in the Notifications section, setting it as the official PineConnector webhook address.
8. Double-check all settings on PineConnector to ensure the connection is successful.
9. Create the alert for entry/exit automation.
For Investors:
1. Ensure the strategy parameters are properly set based on your optimized parameters.
2. Choose "Investing" in the user-input settings.
3. Create an alert with a specified name.
4. Customize the notifications tab to receive alerts via email.
5. Buying/selling alerts will be triggered instantly upon entry or exit order execution.
----
Strategy Properties
This script backtest is done on 4H COINBASE:BTCUSD , using the following backtesting properties:
Balance: $5000
Order Size: 10% of the equity
Risk % per trade: 1%
Commission: 0.04% (Default commission percentage according to TradingView competitions rules)
Slippage: 75 ticks
Pyramiding: 2
-----
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data.
Built-in components, features, and functionalities of our charting tools are the intellectual property of @Fractalyst Unauthorized use, reproduction, or distribution of these proprietary elements is prohibited.
By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer and agrees to respect our intellectual property rights and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
Supertrend Advance Pullback StrategyHandbook for the Supertrend Advance Strategy
1. Introduction
Purpose of the Handbook:
The main purpose of this handbook is to serve as a comprehensive guide for traders and investors who are looking to explore and harness the potential of the Supertrend Advance Strategy. In the rapidly changing financial market, having the right tools and strategies at one's disposal is crucial. Whether you're a beginner hoping to dive into the world of trading or a seasoned investor aiming to optimize and diversify your portfolio, this handbook offers the insights and methodologies you need. By the end of this guide, readers should have a clear understanding of how the Supertrend Advance Strategy works, its benefits, potential pitfalls, and practical application in various trading scenarios.
Overview of the Supertrend Advance Pullback Strategy:
At its core, the Supertrend Advance Strategy is an evolution of the popular Supertrend Indicator. Designed to generate buy and sell signals in trending markets, the Supertrend Indicator has been a favorite tool for many traders around the world. The Advance Strategy, however, builds upon this foundation by introducing enhanced mechanisms, filters, and methodologies to increase precision and reduce false signals.
1. Basic Concept:
The Supertrend Advance Strategy relies on a combination of price action and volatility to determine the potential trend direction. By assessing the average true range (ATR) in conjunction with specific price points, this strategy aims to highlight the potential starting and ending points of market trends.
2. Methodology:
Unlike the traditional Supertrend Indicator, which primarily focuses on closing prices and ATR, the Advance Strategy integrates other critical market variables, such as volume, momentum oscillators, and perhaps even fundamental data, to validate its signals. This multidimensional approach ensures that the generated signals are more reliable and are less prone to market noise.
3. Benefits:
One of the main benefits of the Supertrend Advance Strategy is its ability to filter out false breakouts and minor price fluctuations, which can often lead to premature exits or entries in the market. By waiting for a confluence of factors to align, traders using this advanced strategy can increase their chances of entering or exiting trades at optimal points.
4. Practical Applications:
The Supertrend Advance Strategy can be applied across various timeframes, from intraday trading to swing trading and even long-term investment scenarios. Furthermore, its flexible nature allows it to be tailored to different asset classes, be it stocks, commodities, forex, or cryptocurrencies.
In the subsequent sections of this handbook, we will delve deeper into the intricacies of this strategy, offering step-by-step guidelines on its application, case studies, and tips for maximizing its efficacy in the volatile world of trading.
As you journey through this handbook, we encourage you to approach the Supertrend Advance Strategy with an open mind, testing and tweaking it as per your personal trading style and risk appetite. The ultimate goal is not just to provide you with a new tool but to empower you with a holistic strategy that can enhance your trading endeavors.
2. Getting Started
Navigating the financial markets can be a daunting task without the right tools. This section is dedicated to helping you set up the Supertrend Advance Strategy on one of the most popular charting platforms, TradingView. By following the steps below, you'll be able to integrate this strategy into your charts and start leveraging its insights in no time.
Setting up on TradingView:
TradingView is a web-based platform that offers a wide range of charting tools, social networking, and market data. Before you can apply the Supertrend Advance Strategy, you'll first need a TradingView account. If you haven't set one up yet, here's how:
1. Account Creation:
• Visit TradingView's official website.
• Click on the "Join for free" or "Sign up" button.
• Follow the registration process, providing the necessary details and setting up your login credentials.
2. Navigating the Dashboard:
• Once logged in, you'll be taken to your dashboard. Here, you'll see a variety of tools, including watchlists, alerts, and the main charting window.
• To begin charting, type in the name or ticker of the asset you're interested in the search bar at the top.
3. Configuring Chart Settings:
• Before integrating the Supertrend Advance Strategy, familiarize yourself with the chart settings. This can be accessed by clicking the 'gear' icon on the top right of the chart window.
• Adjust the chart type, time intervals, and other display settings to your preference.
Integrating the Strategy into a Chart:
Now that you're set up on TradingView, it's time to integrate the Supertrend Advance Strategy.
1. Accessing the Pine Script Editor:
• Located at the top-center of your screen, you'll find the "Pine Editor" tab. Click on it.
• This is where custom strategies and indicators are scripted or imported.
2. Loading the Supertrend Advance Strategy Script:
• Depending on whether you have the script or need to find it, there are two paths:
• If you have the script: Copy the Supertrend Advance Strategy script, and then paste it into the Pine Editor.
• If searching for the script: Click on the “Indicators” icon (looks like a flame) at the top of your screen, and then type “Supertrend Advance Strategy” in the search bar. If available, it will show up in the list. Simply click to add it to your chart.
3. Applying the Strategy:
• After pasting or selecting the Supertrend Advance Strategy in the Pine Editor, click on the “Add to Chart” button located at the top of the editor. This will overlay the strategy onto your main chart window.
4. Configuring Strategy Settings:
• Once the strategy is on your chart, you'll notice a small settings ('gear') icon next to its name in the top-left of the chart window. Click on this to access settings.
• Here, you can adjust various parameters of the Supertrend Advance Strategy to better fit your trading style or the specific asset you're analyzing.
5. Interpreting Signals:
• With the strategy applied, you'll now see buy/sell signals represented on your chart. Take time to familiarize yourself with how these look and behave over various timeframes and market conditions.
3. Strategy Overview
What is the Supertrend Advance Strategy?
The Supertrend Advance Strategy is a refined version of the classic Supertrend Indicator, which was developed to aid traders in spotting market trends. The strategy utilizes a combination of data points, including average true range (ATR) and price momentum, to generate buy and sell signals.
In essence, the Supertrend Advance Strategy can be visualized as a line that moves with the price. When the price is above the Supertrend line, it indicates an uptrend and suggests a potential buy position. Conversely, when the price is below the Supertrend line, it hints at a downtrend, suggesting a potential selling point.
Strategy Goals and Objectives:
1. Trend Identification: At the core of the Supertrend Advance Strategy is the goal to efficiently and consistently identify prevailing market trends. By recognizing these trends, traders can position themselves to capitalize on price movements in their favor.
2. Reducing Noise: Financial markets are often inundated with 'noise' - short-term price fluctuations that can mislead traders. The Supertrend Advance Strategy aims to filter out this noise, allowing for clearer decision-making.
3. Enhancing Risk Management: With clear buy and sell signals, traders can set more precise stop-loss and take-profit points. This leads to better risk management and potentially improved profitability.
4. Versatility: While primarily used for trend identification, the strategy can be integrated with other technical tools and indicators to create a comprehensive trading system.
Type of Assets/Markets to Apply the Strategy:
1. Equities: The Supertrend Advance Strategy is highly popular among stock traders. Its ability to capture long-term trends makes it particularly useful for those trading individual stocks or equity indices.
2. Forex: Given the 24-hour nature of the Forex market and its propensity for trends, the Supertrend Advance Strategy is a valuable tool for currency traders.
3. Commodities: Whether it's gold, oil, or agricultural products, commodities often move in extended trends. The strategy can help in identifying and capitalizing on these movements.
4. Cryptocurrencies: The volatile nature of cryptocurrencies means they can have pronounced trends. The Supertrend Advance Strategy can aid crypto traders in navigating these often tumultuous waters.
5. Futures & Options: Traders and investors in derivative markets can utilize the strategy to make more informed decisions about contract entries and exits.
It's important to note that while the Supertrend Advance Strategy can be applied across various assets and markets, its effectiveness might vary based on market conditions, timeframe, and the specific characteristics of the asset in question. As always, it's recommended to use the strategy in conjunction with other analytical tools and to backtest its effectiveness in specific scenarios before committing to trades.
4. Input Settings
Understanding and correctly configuring input settings is crucial for optimizing the Supertrend Advance Strategy for any specific market or asset. These settings, when tweaked correctly, can drastically impact the strategy's performance.
Grouping Inputs:
Before diving into individual input settings, it's important to group similar inputs. Grouping can simplify the user interface, making it easier to adjust settings related to a specific function or indicator.
Strategy Choice:
This input allows traders to select from various strategies that incorporate the Supertrend indicator. Options might include "Supertrend with RSI," "Supertrend with MACD," etc. By choosing a strategy, the associated input settings for that strategy become available.
Supertrend Settings:
1. Multiplier: Typically, a default value of 3 is used. This multiplier is used in the ATR calculation. Increasing it makes the Supertrend line further from prices, while decreasing it brings the line closer.
2. Period: The number of bars used in the ATR calculation. A common default is 7.
EMA Settings (Exponential Moving Average):
1. Period: Defines the number of previous bars used to calculate the EMA. Common periods are 9, 21, 50, and 200.
2. Source: Allows traders to choose which price (Open, Close, High, Low) to use in the EMA calculation.
RSI Settings (Relative Strength Index):
1. Length: Determines how many periods are used for RSI calculation. The standard setting is 14.
2. Overbought Level: The threshold at which the asset is considered overbought, typically set at 70.
3. Oversold Level: The threshold at which the asset is considered oversold, often at 30.
MACD Settings (Moving Average Convergence Divergence):
1. Short Period: The shorter EMA, usually set to 12.
2. Long Period: The longer EMA, commonly set to 26.
3. Signal Period: Defines the EMA of the MACD line, typically set at 9.
CCI Settings (Commodity Channel Index):
1. Period: The number of bars used in the CCI calculation, often set to 20.
2. Overbought Level: Typically set at +100, denoting overbought conditions.
3. Oversold Level: Usually set at -100, indicating oversold conditions.
SL/TP Settings (Stop Loss/Take Profit):
1. SL Multiplier: Defines the multiplier for the average true range (ATR) to set the stop loss.
2. TP Multiplier: Defines the multiplier for the average true range (ATR) to set the take profit.
Filtering Conditions:
This section allows traders to set conditions to filter out certain signals. For example, one might only want to take buy signals when the RSI is below 30, ensuring they buy during oversold conditions.
Trade Direction and Backtest Period:
1. Trade Direction: Allows traders to specify whether they want to take long trades, short trades, or both.
2. Backtest Period: Specifies the time range for backtesting the strategy. Traders can choose from options like 'Last 6 months,' 'Last 1 year,' etc.
It's essential to remember that while default settings are provided for many of these tools, optimal settings can vary based on the market, timeframe, and trading style. Always backtest new settings on historical data to gauge their potential efficacy.
5. Understanding Strategy Conditions
Developing an understanding of the conditions set within a trading strategy is essential for traders to maximize its potential. Here, we delve deep into the logic behind these conditions, using the Supertrend Advance Strategy as our focal point.
Basic Logic Behind Conditions:
Every strategy is built around a set of conditions that provide buy or sell signals. The conditions are based on mathematical or statistical methods and are rooted in the study of historical price data. The fundamental idea is to recognize patterns or behaviors that have been profitable in the past and might be profitable in the future.
Buy and Sell Conditions:
1. Buy Conditions: Usually formulated around bullish signals or indicators suggesting upward price momentum.
2. Sell Conditions: Centered on bearish signals or indicators indicating downward price momentum.
Simple Strategy:
The simple strategy could involve using just the Supertrend indicator. Here:
• Buy: When price closes above the Supertrend line.
• Sell: When price closes below the Supertrend line.
Pullback Strategy:
This strategy capitalizes on price retracements:
• Buy: When the price retraces to the Supertrend line after a bullish signal and is supported by another bullish indicator.
• Sell: When the price retraces to the Supertrend line after a bearish signal and is confirmed by another bearish indicator.
Indicators Used:
EMA (Exponential Moving Average):
• Logic: EMA gives more weight to recent prices, making it more responsive to current price movements. A shorter-period EMA crossing above a longer-period EMA can be a bullish sign, while the opposite is bearish.
RSI (Relative Strength Index):
• Logic: RSI measures the magnitude of recent price changes to analyze overbought or oversold conditions. Values above 70 are typically considered overbought, and values below 30 are considered oversold.
MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence):
• Logic: MACD assesses the relationship between two EMAs of a security’s price. The MACD line crossing above the signal line can be a bullish signal, while crossing below can be bearish.
CCI (Commodity Channel Index):
• Logic: CCI compares a security's average price change with its average price variation. A CCI value above +100 may mean the price is overbought, while below -100 might signify an oversold condition.
And others...
As the strategy expands or contracts, more indicators might be added or removed. The crucial point is to understand the core logic behind each, ensuring they align with the strategy's objectives.
Logic Behind Each Indicator:
1. EMA: Emphasizes recent price movements; provides dynamic support and resistance levels.
2. RSI: Indicates overbought and oversold conditions based on recent price changes.
3. MACD: Showcases momentum and direction of a trend by comparing two EMAs.
4. CCI: Measures the difference between a security's price change and its average price change.
Understanding strategy conditions is not just about knowing when to buy or sell but also about comprehending the underlying market dynamics that those conditions represent. As you familiarize yourself with each condition and indicator, you'll be better prepared to adapt and evolve with the ever-changing financial markets.
6. Trade Execution and Management
Trade execution and management are crucial aspects of any trading strategy. Efficient execution can significantly impact profitability, while effective management can preserve capital during adverse market conditions. In this section, we'll explore the nuances of position entry, exit strategies, and various Stop Loss (SL) and Take Profit (TP) methodologies within the Supertrend Advance Strategy.
Position Entry:
Effective trade entry revolves around:
1. Timing: Enter at a point where the risk-reward ratio is favorable. This often corresponds to confirmatory signals from multiple indicators.
2. Volume Analysis: Ensure there's adequate volume to support the movement. Volume can validate the strength of a signal.
3. Confirmation: Use multiple indicators or chart patterns to confirm the entry point. For instance, a buy signal from the Supertrend indicator can be confirmed with a bullish MACD crossover.
Position Exit Strategies:
A successful exit strategy will lock in profits and minimize losses. Here are some strategies:
1. Fixed Time Exit: Exiting after a predetermined period.
2. Percentage-based Profit Target: Exiting after a certain percentage gain.
3. Indicator-based Exit: Exiting when an indicator gives an opposing signal.
Percentage-based SL/TP:
• Stop Loss (SL): Set a fixed percentage below the entry price to limit potential losses.
• Example: A 2% SL on an entry at $100 would trigger a sell at $98.
• Take Profit (TP): Set a fixed percentage above the entry price to lock in gains.
• Example: A 5% TP on an entry at $100 would trigger a sell at $105.
Supertrend-based SL/TP:
• Stop Loss (SL): Position the SL at the Supertrend line. If the price breaches this line, it could indicate a trend reversal.
• Take Profit (TP): One could set the TP at a point where the Supertrend line flattens or turns, indicating a possible slowdown in momentum.
Swing high/low-based SL/TP:
• Stop Loss (SL): For a long position, set the SL just below the recent swing low. For a short position, set it just above the recent swing high.
• Take Profit (TP): For a long position, set the TP near a recent swing high or resistance. For a short position, near a swing low or support.
And other methods...
1. Trailing Stop Loss: This dynamic SL adjusts with the price movement, locking in profits as the trade moves in your favor.
2. Multiple Take Profits: Divide the position into segments and set multiple TP levels, securing profits in stages.
3. Opposite Signal Exit: Exit when another reliable indicator gives an opposite signal.
Trade execution and management are as much an art as they are a science. They require a blend of analytical skill, discipline, and intuition. Regularly reviewing and refining your strategies, especially in light of changing market conditions, is crucial to maintaining consistent trading performance.
7. Visual Representations
Visual tools are essential for traders, as they simplify complex data into an easily interpretable format. Properly analyzing and understanding the plots on a chart can provide actionable insights and a more intuitive grasp of market conditions. In this section, we’ll delve into various visual representations used in the Supertrend Advance Strategy and their significance.
Understanding Plots on the Chart:
Charts are the primary visual aids for traders. The arrangement of data points, lines, and colors on them tell a story about the market's past, present, and potential future moves.
1. Data Points: These represent individual price actions over a specific timeframe. For instance, a daily chart will have data points showing the opening, closing, high, and low prices for each day.
2. Colors: Used to indicate the nature of price movement. Commonly, green is used for bullish (upward) moves and red for bearish (downward) moves.
Trend Lines:
Trend lines are straight lines drawn on a chart that connect a series of price points. Their significance:
1. Uptrend Line: Drawn along the lows, representing support. A break below might indicate a trend reversal.
2. Downtrend Line: Drawn along the highs, indicating resistance. A break above might suggest the start of a bullish trend.
Filled Areas:
These represent a range between two values on a chart, usually shaded or colored. For instance:
1. Bollinger Bands: The area between the upper and lower band is filled, giving a visual representation of volatility.
2. Volume Profile: Can show a filled area representing the amount of trading activity at different price levels.
Stop Loss and Take Profit Lines:
These are horizontal lines representing pre-determined exit points for trades.
1. Stop Loss Line: Indicates the level at which a trade will be automatically closed to limit losses. Positioned according to the trader's risk tolerance.
2. Take Profit Line: Denotes the target level to lock in profits. Set according to potential resistance (for long trades) or support (for short trades) or other technical factors.
Trailing Stop Lines:
A trailing stop is a dynamic form of stop loss that moves with the price. On a chart:
1. For Long Trades: Starts below the entry price and moves up with the price but remains static if the price falls, ensuring profits are locked in.
2. For Short Trades: Starts above the entry price and moves down with the price but remains static if the price rises.
Visual representations offer traders a clear, organized view of market dynamics. Familiarity with these tools ensures that traders can quickly and accurately interpret chart data, leading to more informed decision-making. Always ensure that the visual aids used resonate with your trading style and strategy for the best results.
8. Backtesting
Backtesting is a fundamental process in strategy development, enabling traders to evaluate the efficacy of their strategy using historical data. It provides a snapshot of how the strategy would have performed in past market conditions, offering insights into its potential strengths and vulnerabilities. In this section, we'll explore the intricacies of setting up and analyzing backtest results and the caveats one must be aware of.
Setting Up Backtest Period:
1. Duration: Determine the timeframe for the backtest. It should be long enough to capture various market conditions (bullish, bearish, sideways). For instance, if you're testing a daily strategy, consider a period of several years.
2. Data Quality: Ensure the data source is reliable, offering high-resolution and clean data. This is vital to get accurate backtest results.
3. Segmentation: Instead of a continuous period, sometimes it's helpful to backtest over distinct market phases, like a particular bear or bull market, to see how the strategy holds up in different environments.
Analyzing Backtest Results:
1. Performance Metrics: Examine metrics like the total return, annualized return, maximum drawdown, Sharpe ratio, and others to gauge the strategy's efficiency.
2. Win Rate: It's the ratio of winning trades to total trades. A high win rate doesn't always signify a good strategy; it should be evaluated in conjunction with other metrics.
3. Risk/Reward: Understand the average profit versus the average loss per trade. A strategy might have a low win rate but still be profitable if the average gain far exceeds the average loss.
4. Drawdown Analysis: Review the periods of losses the strategy could incur and how long it takes, on average, to recover.
9. Tips and Best Practices
Successful trading requires more than just knowing how a strategy works. It necessitates an understanding of when to apply it, how to adjust it to varying market conditions, and the wisdom to recognize and avoid common pitfalls. This section offers insightful tips and best practices to enhance the application of the Supertrend Advance Strategy.
When to Use the Strategy:
1. Market Conditions: Ideally, employ the Supertrend Advance Strategy during trending market conditions. This strategy thrives when there are clear upward or downward trends. It might be less effective during consolidative or sideways markets.
2. News Events: Be cautious around significant news events, as they can cause extreme volatility. It might be wise to avoid trading immediately before and after high-impact news.
3. Liquidity: Ensure you are trading in assets/markets with sufficient liquidity. High liquidity ensures that the price movements are more reflective of genuine market sentiment and not due to thin volume.
Adjusting Settings for Different Markets/Timeframes:
1. Markets: Each market (stocks, forex, commodities) has its own characteristics. It's essential to adjust the strategy's parameters to align with the market's volatility and liquidity.
2. Timeframes: Shorter timeframes (like 1-minute or 5-minute charts) tend to have more noise. You might need to adjust the settings to filter out false signals. Conversely, for longer timeframes (like daily or weekly charts), you might need to be more responsive to genuine trend changes.
3. Customization: Regularly review and tweak the strategy's settings. Periodic adjustments can ensure the strategy remains optimized for the current market conditions.
10. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Given the complexities and nuances of the Supertrend Advance Strategy, it's only natural for traders, both new and seasoned, to have questions. This section addresses some of the most commonly asked questions regarding the strategy.
1. What exactly is the Supertrend Advance Strategy?
The Supertrend Advance Strategy is an evolved version of the traditional Supertrend indicator. It's designed to provide clearer buy and sell signals by incorporating additional indicators like EMA, RSI, MACD, CCI, etc. The strategy aims to capitalize on market trends while minimizing false signals.
2. Can I use the Supertrend Advance Strategy for all asset types?
Yes, the strategy can be applied to various asset types like stocks, forex, commodities, and cryptocurrencies. However, it's crucial to adjust the settings accordingly to suit the specific characteristics and volatility of each asset type.
3. Is this strategy suitable for day trading?
Absolutely! The Supertrend Advance Strategy can be adjusted to suit various timeframes, making it versatile for both day trading and long-term trading. Remember to fine-tune the settings to align with the timeframe you're trading on.
4. How do I deal with false signals?
No strategy is immune to false signals. However, by combining the Supertrend with other indicators and adhering to strict risk management protocols, you can minimize the impact of false signals. Always use stop-loss orders and consider filtering trades with additional confirmation signals.
5. Do I need any prior trading experience to use this strategy?
While the Supertrend Advance Strategy is designed to be user-friendly, having a foundational understanding of trading and market analysis can greatly enhance your ability to employ the strategy effectively. If you're a beginner, consider pairing the strategy with further education and practice on demo accounts.
6. How often should I review and adjust the strategy settings?
There's no one-size-fits-all answer. Some traders adjust settings weekly, while others might do it monthly. The key is to remain responsive to changing market conditions. Regular backtesting can give insights into potential required adjustments.
7. Can the Supertrend Advance Strategy be automated?
Yes, many traders use algorithmic trading platforms to automate their strategies, including the Supertrend Advance Strategy. However, always monitor automated systems regularly to ensure they're operating as intended.
8. Are there any markets or conditions where the strategy shouldn't be used?
The strategy might generate more false signals in markets that are consolidative or range-bound. During significant news events or times of unexpected high volatility, it's advisable to tread with caution or stay out of the market.
9. How important is backtesting with this strategy?
Backtesting is crucial as it allows traders to understand how the strategy would have performed in the past, offering insights into potential profitability and areas of improvement. Always backtest any new setting or tweak before applying it to live trades.
10. What if the strategy isn't working for me?
No strategy guarantees consistent profits. If it's not working for you, consider reviewing your settings, seeking expert advice, or complementing the Supertrend Advance Strategy with other analysis methods. Remember, continuous learning and adaptation are the keys to trading success.
Other comments
Value of combining several indicators in this script and how they work together
Diversification of Signals: Just as diversifying an investment portfolio can reduce risk, using multiple indicators can offer varied perspectives on potential price movements. Each indicator can capture a different facet of the market, ensuring that traders are not overly reliant on a single data point.
Confirmation & Reduced False Signals: A common challenge with many indicators is the potential for false signals. By requiring confirmation from multiple indicators before acting, the chances of acting on a false signal can be significantly reduced.
Flexibility Across Market Conditions: Different indicators might perform better under different market conditions. For example, while moving averages might excel in trending markets, oscillators like RSI might be more useful during sideways or range-bound conditions. A mashup strategy can potentially adapt better to varying market scenarios.
Comprehensive Analysis: With multiple indicators, traders can gauge trend strength, momentum, volatility, and potential market reversals all at once, providing a holistic view of the market.
How do the different indicators in the Supertrend Advance Strategy work together?
Supertrend: This is primarily a trend-following indicator. It provides traders with buy and sell signals based on the volatility of the price. When combined with other indicators, it can filter out noise and give more weight to strong, confirmed trends.
EMA (Exponential Moving Average): EMA gives more weight to recent price data. It can be used to identify the direction and strength of a trend. When the price is above the EMA, it's generally considered bullish, and vice versa.
RSI (Relative Strength Index): An oscillator that measures the magnitude of recent price changes to evaluate overbought or oversold conditions. By cross-referencing with other indicators like EMA or MACD, traders can spot potential reversals or confirmations of a trend.
MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence): This indicator identifies changes in the strength, direction, momentum, and duration of a trend in a stock's price. When the MACD line crosses above the signal line, it can be a bullish sign, and when it crosses below, it can be bearish. Pairing MACD with Supertrend can provide dual confirmation of a trend.
CCI (Commodity Channel Index): Initially developed for commodities, CCI can indicate overbought or oversold conditions. It can be used in conjunction with other indicators to determine entry and exit points.
In essence, the synergy of these indicators provides a balanced, comprehensive approach to trading. Each indicator offers its unique lens into market conditions, and when they align, it can be a powerful indication of a trading opportunity. This combination not only reduces the potential drawbacks of each individual indicator but leverages their strengths, aiming for more consistent and informed trading decisions.
Backtesting and Default Settings
• This indicator has been optimized to be applied for 1 hour-charts. However, the underlying principles of this strategy are supply and demand in the financial markets and the strategy can be applied to all timeframes. Daytraders can use the 1min- or 5min charts, swing-traders can use the daily charts.
• This strategy has been designed to identify the most promising, highest probability entries and trades for each stock or other financial security.
• The combination of the qualifiers results in a highly selective strategy which only considers the most promising swing-trading entries. As a result, you will normally only find a low number of trades for each stock or other financial security per year in case you apply this strategy for the daily charts. Shorter timeframes will result in a higher number of trades / year.
• Consequently, traders need to apply this strategy for a full watchlist rather than just one financial security.
• Default properties: RSI on (length 14, RSI buy level 50, sell level 50), EMA, RSI, MACD on, type of strategy pullback, SL/TP type: ATR (length 10, factor 3), trade direction both, quantity 5, take profit swing hl 5.1, highest / lowest lookback 2, enable ATR trail (ATR length 10, SL ATR multiplier 1.4, TP multiplier 2.1, lookback = 4, trade direction = both).
[3Commas] Alligator StrategyThe Alligator Strategy
🔷 What it does: This script implements the Alligator Strategy, a trend-following method created by Bill Williams. It uses three customizable moving averages (SMMAs or RMAs) "Jaws," "Teeth," and "Lips" to identify market trends and potential trade opportunities. Additionally, it includes built-in stop-loss and take-profit options for enhanced risk management.
🔷 Who is it for:
Trend Traders: Those who prefer trading in markets with clear directional movement.
Advanced Users: Traders who require customizable tools and dynamic risk management features.
Beginners: Accessible to those new to trading, thanks to its intuitive visual representation of trends and pre-configured settings.
Bot Users: Supports direct signal integration for bot automation, including entries, take-profits, and stop-losses.
🔷 How does it work: The Alligator Jaws, Teeth, and Lips are smoothed moving averages (SMA, EMA, RMA, or WMA) calculated based on the selected source price ( hl2 = (high+low)/2 by default). Their lengths and offsets are customizable:
Jaws: Length 21 , offset 13.
Teeth: Length 13, offset 8.
Lips: Length 8 , offset 5.
When the lines align and spread apart (e.g., Lips > Teeth > Jaws for an uptrend), the strategy identifies a trending market.
Entry Conditions:
Long Trades: Triggered when Close > Lips > Teeth > Jaws.
Short Trades: Triggered when Close < Lips < Teeth < Jaws.
🔷 Why it’s unique:
Customization: Flexible settings for moving average types and lengths to adapt to different market conditions and strategy tester configurations.
Built-in Filters: Trend filters that can reduce false signals in certain scenarios, making it more reliable for trending markets.
Take Profit and Stop Loss:
Configurable as either percentage-based or dynamic.
Stop-loss levels adjust dynamically using the Alligator lines.
Fast exit logic moves the stop-loss closer to the price when trades are in profit.
3Commas Bot Compatibility: Designed for automated trading, allowing traders to configure and execute the strategy seamlessly.
🔷 Considerations Before Using the Indicator
🔸Why the Forward Offset: By shifting the averages forward, the Alligator helps traders focus on established trends while filtering out short-term market noise.
The standard configurations of 13-8, 8-5, and 5-3 were selected based on Bill Williams’ studies of market behavior. However, these values can be adjusted to suit different market conditions:
Volatile Markets: Faster settings (e.g., 10-6, 6-4, 3-2) may provide earlier signals.
Less Volatile Markets: Slower settings (e.g., 21-13, 13-8, 8-5) can help avoid noise and reduce false signals.
🔸Best Timeframes to Use: The Alligator can be applied across all timeframes, but certain timeframes offer better reliability.
Higher Timeframes (H4, D1, W1): Ideal for identifying significant trends and for swing or position trading.
Lower Timeframes: Not recommended due to increased noise but may work for scalping with additional confirmation tools.
🔸Disadvantages of the Alligator Strategy:
Exhausted Entry Levels: High buying levels or low selling levels can lead to momentum exhaustion and potential pullbacks.
False Signals in Ranges: Consolidating markets can produce unreliable signals.
Lagging Indicator: As it is based on moving averages, it may delay reacting to sudden price changes.
🔸Advantages of the Alligator Strategy:
Trend Focused: Simplifies the identification of trending markets.
Noise Reduction: Forward shifts and smoothed averages help filter out short-term price fluctuations.
Broad Applicability: Suitable for forex, crypto, stocks, and commodities.
🔸Important Considerations:
While the Alligator Strategy provides a systematic way to analyze markets, it does not guarantee successful outcomes. Results in trading depend on multiple factors, including market conditions, trader discipline, and risk management. Past performance of the strategy does not ensure future success, and traders should always approach the market with caution.
Risk Management: Define stop-loss levels, position size, and profit targets before entering any trade. Be prepared for the possibility of losses and ensure that your approach aligns with your overall trading plan.
🔷 STRATEGY PROPERTIES
Symbol: BINANCE:BTCUSDT (Spot).
Timeframe: 1D (Daily Timeframe).
Test Period: All historical data available.
Initial Capital: 10000 USDT.
Order Size per Trade: 1% of Capital, you can use a higher value e.g. 5%, be cautious that the Max Drawdown does not exceed 10%, as it would indicate a very risky trading approach.
Commission: Binance commission 0.1%, adjust according to the exchange being used, lower numbers will generate unrealistic results. By using low values e.g. 5%, it allows us to adapt over time and check the functioning of the strategy.
Slippage: 5 ticks, for pairs with low liquidity or very large orders, this number should be increased as the order may not be filled at the desired level.
Margin for Long and Short Positions: 100%.
Indicator Settings: Default Configuration.
Alligator: Source hl2 | Calculation RMA | Jaw 21-13, Teeth 13-8, Lips 8-5.
Strategy: Long & Short.
Max Stop Loss per Trade: 10% of Trade Size.
Exit trades on opposite signal: Enable.
Alligator Stop Loss: Enable.
Alligator Fast Exit: Enable.
🔷 STRATEGY RESULTS
⚠️ Remember, past results do not guarantee future performance.
Net Profit: +355.68 USDT (+3.56%).
Total Closed Trades: 103.
Percent Profitable: 47.57%.
Profit Factor: 1.927.
Max Drawdown: -57.99 USDT (-0.56%).
Average Trade: +3.45 USDT (+3.41%).
Average # Bars in Trades: 16.
🔷 HOW TO USE
🔸Adjust the Alligator Settings:
The default values generally work well: Source hl2 | Calculation RMA | Jaw 21-13, Teeth 13-8, Lips 8-5. However, if you want to use it on timeframes smaller than 4H (4 hours), consider increasing the values to better filter market noise.
Please review the "Indicator Settings" section for configuration.
🔸Choose a Symbol that Typically Trends:
Select an asset that tends to create trends. However, the Strategy Tester results may display poor performance, making it less suitable for sending signals to bots.
🔸Add Trend Filters:
You can enable trend filters like MA and SuperTrend. By default, these are disabled as they are often unnecessary, but you can experiment with their configuration to see if they optimize the strategy's results.
Please review the "Indicator Settings" section for configuration.
🔸Enable Stop Loss Levels:
Activate Stop Loss features, such as Stop Loss % or Alligator Stop Loss. If both are enabled, the one closest to the price during the trade will be applied.
Please review the "Indicator Settings" section for configuration.
🔸Enable Take Profit Levels:
Activate Take Profit options, such as Take Profit % or Alligator Fast Exit. If both are enabled, the one that triggers first will be executed.
Please review the "Indicator Settings" section for configuration.
This is an example with the default settings and how Alligator Stop Loss and Alligator Fast Exit are activated:
In this example, we additionally enable the Take Profit at 10%. We can observe that the Alligator Stop Loss is the active one since it is closer to the price. When the price moves 10% in favor or against the trade, the position is closed. Although the Alligator Fast Exit is enabled, it does not activate because the trades are closed beforehand.
🔸Results Review:
It is important to check the Max Drawdown. This value should ideally not exceed 10% of your capital. Consider adjusting the trade size to ensure this threshold is not surpassed.
Remember to include the correct values for commission and slippage according to the symbol and exchange where you are conducting the tests. Otherwise, the results will not be realistic.
If you are satisfied with the results, you may consider automating your trades. However, it is strongly recommended to use a small amount of capital or a demo account to test proper execution before committing real funds.
🔸Create alerts to trigger the DCA Bot
Verify Messages: Ensure the message matches the one specified by the DCA Bot.
Multi-Pair Configuration: For multi-pair setups, enable the option to add the symbol in the correct format.
Signal Settings: Enable whether you want to receive long or short signals (Entry | TP | SL), copy and paste the the messages for the DCA Bots configured in 3Commas.
Alert Setup:
When creating an alert, set the condition to the indicator and choose "alert() function call only.
Enter any desired Alert Name.
Open the Notifications tab, enable Webhook URL, and paste the Webhook URL from 3Commas.
For more details, refer to the 3Commas section: "How to use TradingView Custom Signals.
Finalize Alerts: Click Create, you're done! Alerts will now be sent automatically in the correct format to 3Commas.
🔷 INDICATOR SETTINGS
🔸Alligator Settings
MA's source: Source price for Alligator moving averages.
MA's Type: Type of calculation for MA's.
Jaw and Offset: Jaw length and offset to the right.
Teeth and Offset: Teethlength and offset to the right.
Lips and Offset: Lips length and offset to the right.
🔸Alligator Style
Plot Alligator: Show Alligator Ribbon.
Plot MA's: Show Alligator MA's.
Colors: Main and Gradient Colors for Bullish Alligator, Berish Alligator, Neutral Alligator. For gradient colors it is recommended to use an opacity of 15.
🔸MA & SuperTrend Filters
MA & Plot: Activate MA Filter and Plot MA on the chart.
Long Entries: When activated, it will only execute entries if the price is above the MA
Short Entries: When activated, it will only execute entries if the price is below the MA.
Source: Source price for moving average calculations.
Length: Candles to be used by the MA calculations.
Type: Type of calculation for MA.
Timeframe: Here you can select a larger timeframe for the filter.
ST & Plot: Activate SuperTrend Filter and Plot SuperTrend on the chart.
Long Entries: When activated, it will only execute entries if the price is above the SuperTrend.
Short Entries: When activated, it will only execute entries if the price is below the SuperTrend.
Source: Source price for SuperTrend calculations.
Length: Candles to be used by the SuperTrend calculations.
Factor: ATR multiplier of the SuperTrend.
Timeframe: Here you can select a larger timeframe for the filter.
🔸Strategy Tester
Strategy: Order Type direction in which trades are executed.
Take Profit %: When activated, the entered value will be used as the Take Profit in percentage from the entry price level.
Stop Loss %: When activated, the entered value will be used as the Stop Loss in percentage from the entry price level. If Alligator Stop Loss is activated, the closest one to the price will be used.
Exit trades on opposite signal: This option closes the trade if the opposite condition is met. For instance, if we are in a long position and a sell signal is triggered, the long position will be closed, and a short position will be opened. The same applies inversely.
Alligator Stop Loss: In a long trade, the lower part of the Alligator indicator will be used as a dynamic stop loss. Similarly, in a short trade, the upper part of the indicator will be used.
Alligator Fast Exit: Its purpose is to attempt to protect movements in favor of the trade's direction. In the case of long trades, once the price and the upper part of the Alligator indicator are above the trade's entry price, the stop loss will be moved to the upper part. For short trades, once the price and the lower part of the Alligator indicator are below the trade's entry price, the stop loss will be moved to the lower part of the Alligator indicator.
Alligator Squeeze Entry: When activated, entries will only be executed if they meet the condition after a neutral zone of the Alligator indicator.
Alligator Squeeze Exit: When this option is activated, any open trades will be closed when the Alligator indicator enters a neutral mode.
Use Custom Test Period: When enabled signals only works in the selected time window. If disabled it will use all historical data available on the chart.
Test Start and End: Once the Custom Test Period is enabled, here you select the start and end date that you want to analyze.
🔸3Commas DCA Bot Signals
Check Messages: Enable the table to review the messages to be sent to the bot.
Entry | TP | SL: Enable this options to send Buy Entry, Take Profit (TP), and Stop Loss (SL) signals to 3Commas.
Deal Entry and Deal Exit : Copy and paste the message for the deal start signal and close order at Market Price of the DCA Bot you created in 3Commas. This is the message that will be sent with the alert to the Bot, you must verify that it is the same as the 3Commas bot so that it can process properly so that it executes and starts the trade.
DCA Bot Multi-Pair: You must activate it if you want to use the signals in a DCA Bot Multi-pair in the text box you must enter (using the 3Commas format) the symbol in which you are creating the alert, you can check the format of each symbol when you create the bot.
🔷 CONCLUSION
The Alligator Strategy is a valuable tool for identifying potential trends and improving decision-making. However, no trading strategy is foolproof. Careful consideration of market conditions, proper risk management, and personal trading goals are essential. Use the Alligator as part of a broader trading system, and remember that consistent learning and discipline are key to success in trading.
👨🏻💻💭 We hope this tool helps enhance your trading. Your feedback is invaluable, so feel free to share any suggestions for improvements or new features you'd like to see implemented.
____________________________________________________________________
The information and publications within the 3Commas TradingView account are not meant to be and do not constitute financial, investment, trading, or other types of advice or recommendations supplied or endorsed by 3Commas and any of the parties acting on behalf of 3Commas, including its employees, contractors, ambassadors, etc.
AutoPilot | FractalystWhat’s the purpose of this indicator?
The AutoPilot indicator automates the management of your active trades by:
Breaks Even: Moves the stop-loss to the entry price once the trade reaches a 1:1 risk-reward ratio.
Closes Trades: Automatically exits trades when trailing stop-losses are triggered.
This automation is facilitated through PineConnector and TradingView webhook integration, allowing traders to manage multiple positions across various markets effortlessly without any manual intervention.
----
How does this indicator trail stop-loss using market structure?
The AutoPilot indicator utilizes an advanced market structure trailing stop-loss mechanism to manage trades based on market dynamics and probabilities.
Here's how it works:
Market Structure Identification: The indicator first identifies key market structures such as higher highs, lower lows.
These structures are pivotal points where the market has shown a change in direction or momentum.
Probability-Based Trailing: Once a trade is active, the stop-loss isn't just set at a fixed distance or percentage but is dynamically adjusted based on the probability of the market structure holding or breaking.
This involves:
Trend Continuation Probability: If the market structure suggests a strong trend continuation (e.g., a series of higher highs in an uptrend), the stop-loss might trail closer to the price, but with a buffer calculated by the probability of the trend continuing versus reversing.
Reversal Probability: Conversely, if there's a high probability of a trend reversal based on recent market structures (like a significant lower high in an uptrend), the stop-loss might be adjusted to a point where the market structure would need to break to confirm the reversal, thus protecting potential profits or minimizing losses.
Dynamic Adjustment: The trailing stop-loss adjusts in real-time as new market structures form. For instance, if a new higher high is formed in an uptrend, the stop-loss might move up but not necessarily to the exact previous swing low. Instead, it's placed at a level where the probability of the next swing low not breaking this level is high, based on historical price action.
Risk Management: By using market structure and probabilities, the indicator aims to balance between giving the trade room to breathe (allowing for normal market fluctuations) and tightening the stop-loss when the market behavior suggests a potential trend change or continuation with high confidence.
This approach ensures that the stop-loss isn't just a static or simple trailing mechanism but a sophisticated tool that adapts to the evolving market conditions, aiming to maximize profit while minimizing the risk of being stopped out prematurely due to market noise.
----
How are the probabilities calculated? What are the underlying calculations?
The probability is designed to enhance trade management by using buyside liquidity and probability analysis to filter out low/high probability conditions.
This helps in identifying optimal trailing points where the likelihood of a price continuation is higher.
Calculations:
1. Understanding Swing highs and Swing Lows
Swing High: A Swing High is formed when there is a high with 2 lower highs to the left and right.
Swing Low: A Swing Low is formed when there is a low with 2 higher lows to the left and right.
2. Understanding the purpose and the underlying calculations behind Buyside, Sellside and Equilibrium levels.
3. Understanding probability calculations
1. Upon the formation of a new range, the script waits for the price to reach and tap into equilibrium or the 50% level. Status: "⏸" - Inactive
2. Once equilibrium is tapped into, the equilibrium status becomes activated and it waits for either liquidity side to be hit. Status: "▶" - Active
3. If the buyside liquidity is hit, the script adds to the count of successful buyside liquidity occurrences. Similarly, if the sellside is tapped, it records successful sellside liquidity occurrences.
5. Finally, the number of successful occurrences for each side is divided by the overall count individually to calculate the range probabilities.
Note: The calculations are performed independently for each directional range. A range is considered bearish if the previous breakout was through a sellside liquidity. Conversely, a range is considered bullish if the most recent breakout was through a buyside liquidity.
----
What does the automation table display?
The automation table in the AutoPilot indicator provides a summary of user-defined settings crucial for automated trade management through PineConnector and TradingView integration. It displays:
PineConnector License ID: This ensures that the indicator is linked to your specific PineConnector account, allowing for personalized and secure automation of your trades.
Order Type (Buy/Sell): Indicates whether the automation is set for buying or selling, which is essential for correctly executing your trading strategy.
Chosen Symbol: Specifies the trading pair or symbol in your broker's platform where the trade management commands (like closing orders) will be executed. This ensures that the automation targets the correct market or asset.
Risk Per Trade: Shows the percentage or amount of your capital you're willing to risk on each trade, helping you maintain consistent risk management across different trades.
Comment: A field for you to input notes or identifiers, particularly useful when trading across multiple markets or instruments. This helps in tracking and managing trades across different assets or strategies.
Comment: A field for you to input identifiers, particularly useful when trading across multiple timeframes or different enries.
Allowing users to manage specific comments for each previously taken entry, facilitating precise management of multiple trades with unique identifiers.
This table serves as a quick reference for your current settings, ensuring you're always aware of how your trades are being managed automatically before any adjustments are made or alerts are triggered.
----
How to use the indicator?
To use the AutoPilot indicator:
Purchase a License ID: Acquire a license ID from PineConnector.
Setup PineConnector EA: Install and configure the PineConnector Expert Advisor on your MetaTrader platform.
Input Settings: Enter your PineConnector license ID, choose the order type, set your risk per trade, add the order comment, and select the trading symbol in the indicator's settings.
Create Alert: Right-click on the automation table, and set up an alert with the provided webhook to connect with PineConnector.
Automatic Management: Once set, your active trades will be automatically managed according to the alert conditions you've set.
This setup ensures your trades are managed seamlessly without constant manual intervention.
----
What makes this indicator original?
Integration with PineConnector: The AutoPilot indicator's originality lies in its integration with PineConnector, which allows for real-time trade management directly from TradingView to your MetaTrader platform. This setup is unique as it combines the analytical capabilities of TradingView with the execution capabilities of MetaTrader through a custom indicator, providing a seamless bridge between analysis and action.
Market Structure-Based Trailing Stop-Loss: Unlike many indicators that might use fixed percentages or ATR (Average True Range) for stop-loss adjustments, the AutoPilot indicator uses market structure (higher highs, lower lows) to dynamically adjust the stop-loss.
Probability-Based Adjustments: The indicator doesn't just trail stop-losses based on price but incorporates the probability of market structure holding or breaking. This probability-based trailing mechanism is innovative, aiming to balance between giving trades room to breathe and tightening when market behavior suggests a potential reversal or continuation.
Customizable Automation Table: The automation table within the indicator allows for detailed customization, including setting specific comments for trades. This feature, while perhaps not unique in concept, is original in its implementation within trading indicators, providing users with a high degree of control and personalization over trade management.
Real-Time Trade Management Alerts: The ability to set up alerts directly from the indicator to manage trades in real-time via webhooks to PineConnector adds a layer of automation that's not commonly found in standard trading indicators. This real-time connection for trade management enhances its originality by reducing the lag between analysis and trade execution.
User-Centric Design: The design of the AutoPilot indicator focuses heavily on user interaction, allowing for inputs like risk per trade, specific order types, and comments. This user-centric approach, where the indicator adapts to the trader's strategy rather than the trader adapting to the tool, sets it apart.
External Integration for Enhanced Functionality: By leveraging external services like PineConnector for execution, the indicator extends its functionality beyond what's typically possible within TradingView alone, making it original in its ecosystem integration for trading purposes.
Practical Implication: This means if you're in a trade and the market structure suggests the trend is continuing (e.g., making higher highs in an uptrend), your stop-loss might trail closer to the price but not too close to avoid being stopped out by normal fluctuations. If the structure breaks (e.g., a lower high in an uptrend), the stop-loss could adjust more aggressively to protect profits or minimize losses, anticipating a potential trend change.
This combination of features creates an original tool that not only analyzes market conditions but actively manages trades based on sophisticated market structure analysis.
----
User-input settings and customizations
----
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data. By utilizing our charting tools, the buyer acknowledges that neither the seller nor the creator assumes responsibility for decisions made using the information provided. The buyer assumes full responsibility and liability for any actions taken and their consequences, including potential financial losses. Therefore, by purchasing these charting tools, the customer acknowledges that neither the seller nor the creator is liable for any unfavorable outcomes resulting from the development, sale, or use of the products.
The buyer is responsible for canceling their subscription if they no longer wish to continue at the full retail price. Our policy does not include reimbursement, refunds, or chargebacks once the Terms and Conditions are accepted before purchase.
By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer.
Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs (Hurst, CVaR, Fractal) // AlgoFyreThe Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs (Hurst, CVaR, Fractal) indicator adjusts moving averages based on market conditions, using Hurst Exponent for trend persistence, CVaR for extreme risk assessment, and Fractal Dimension for market complexity. It enhances trend detection and risk management across various timeframes.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
🔶 ORIGINALITY 🔸Adaptive Mechanisms
🔸Multi-Faceted Analysis
🔸Versatility Across Timeframes
🔸Multi-Scale Combination
🔶 FUNCTIONALITY 🔸Hurst Exponent (H)
🞘 How it works
🞘 How to calculate
🞘 Code extract
🔸Conditional Value at Risk (CVaR)
🞘 How it works
🞘 How to calculate
🞘 Code extract
🔸Fractal Dimension (FD)
🞘 How it works
🞘 How to calculate
🞘 Code extract
🔶 INSTRUCTIONS 🔸Step-by-Step Guidelines
🞘 Setting Up the Indicator
🞘 Understanding What to Look For on the Chart
🞘 Possible Entry Signals
🞘 Possible Take Profit Strategies
🞘 Possible Stop-Loss Levels
🞘 Additional Tips
🔸Customize settings
🔶 CONCLUSION
▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅▅
🔶 ORIGINALITY The Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs (Hurst, CVaR, Fractal) indicator stands out due to its unique approach of dynamically adjusting moving averages based on advanced statistical measures, making it highly responsive to varying market conditions. Unlike traditional moving averages that rely on static periods, this indicator adapts in real-time using three distinct adaptive methods: Hurst Exponent, CVaR, and Fractal Dimension.
🔸Adaptive Mechanisms
Traditional MA indicators use fixed lengths, which can lead to lagging signals or over-sensitivity in volatile markets. The Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs employ adaptive methods to adjust the MA length dynamically, providing a more accurate reflection of current market conditions.
🔸Multi-Faceted Analysis
By integrating Hurst Exponent, CVaR, and Fractal Dimension, the indicator offers a comprehensive market analysis. It captures different aspects of market behavior, including trend persistence, risk of extreme movements, and complexity, which are often missed by standard MAs.
🔸Versatility Across Timeframes
The indicator’s ability to switch between different adaptive methods based on market conditions allows traders to analyze short-term, medium-term, and long-term trends with enhanced precision.
🔸Multi-Scale Combination
Utilizing multiple adaptive MAs in combination provides a more nuanced view of the market, allowing traders to see how short, medium, and long-term trends interact. This layered approach helps in identifying the strength and consistency of trends across different scales, offering more reliable signals and aiding in complex decision-making processes. When combined, these MAs can also signal key market shifts when they converge or diverge, offering deeper insights than a single MA could provide.
🔶 FUNCTIONALITY The indicator adjusts moving averages based on a variety of different choosable adaptives. The Hurst Exponent to identify trend persistence or mean reversion, adapting to market conditions for both short-term and long-term trends. Using CVaR, it evaluates the risk of extreme price movements, ensuring the moving average is more conservative during high-risk periods, protecting against potential large losses. By incorporating the Fractal Dimension, the indicator adapts to market complexity, adjusting to varying levels of price roughness and volatility, which allows it to respond more accurately to different market structures and patterns.
Let's dive into the details:
🔸Hurst Exponent (H)
Measures the degree of trend persistence or mean reversion.
By using the Hurst Exponent, the indicator adjusts to capture the strength and duration of trends, helping traders to stay in profitable trades longer and avoid false reversals in ranging markets.
It enhances the detection of trends, making it suitable for both short-term scalping and identifying long-term trends.
🞘 How it works Rescaled Range (R/S) Analysis Calculate the mean of the closing prices over a set window.
Determine the deviation of each price from the mean.
Compute the cumulative sum of these deviations over the window.
Calculate the range (R) of the cumulative deviations (maximum minus minimum).
Compute the standard deviation (S) of the price series over the window.
Obtain the R/S ratio as R/S.
Linear Regression for Hurst Exponent Calculate the logarithm of multiple window sizes and their corresponding R/S values.
Use linear regression to determine the slope of the line fitting the log(R/S) against log(window size).
The slope of this line is an estimate of the Hurst Exponent.
🞘 How to calculate Range (R)
Calculate the maximum cumulative deviation:
R=max(sum(deviation))−min(sum(deviation))
Where deviation is the difference between each price and the mean.
Standard Deviation (S)
Calculate the standard deviation of the price series:
S=sqrt((1/(n−1))∗sum((Xi−mean)2))
Rescaled Range (R/S)
Divide the range by the standard deviation:
R/S=R/S
Hurst Exponent
Perform linear regression to estimate the slope of:
log(R/S) versus log(windowsize)
The slope of this line is the Hurst Exponent.
🞘 Code extract // Hurst Exponent
calc_hurst(source_, adaptive_window_) =>
window_sizes = array.from(adaptive_window_/10, adaptive_window_/5, adaptive_window_/2, adaptive_window_)
float hurst_exp = 0.5
// Calculate Hurst Exponent proxy
rs_list = array.new_float()
log_length_list = array.new_float()
for i = 0 to array.size(window_sizes) - 1
len = array.get(window_sizes, i)
// Ensure we have enough data
if bar_index >= len * 2
mean = adaptive_sma(source_, len)
dev = source_ - mean
// Calculate cumulative deviations over the window
cum_dev = ta.cum(dev) - ta.cum(dev )
r = ta.highest(cum_dev, len) - ta.lowest(cum_dev, len)
s = ta.stdev(source_, len)
if s != 0
rs = r / s
array.push(rs_list, math.log(rs))
array.push(log_length_list, math.log(len))
// Linear regression to estimate Hurst Exponent
n = array.size(log_length_list)
if n > 1
mean_x = array.sum(log_length_list) / n
mean_y = array.sum(rs_list) / n
sum_num = 0.0
sum_den = 0.0
for i = 0 to n - 1
x = array.get(log_length_list, i)
y = array.get(rs_list, i)
sum_num += (x - mean_x) * (y - mean_y)
sum_den += (x - mean_x) * (x - mean_x)
hurst_exp := sum_den != 0 ? sum_num / sum_den : 0.5
else
hurst_exp := 0.5 // Default to 0.5 if not enough data
hurst_exp
🔸Conditional Value at Risk (CVaR)
Assesses the risk of extreme losses by focusing on tail risk.
This method adjusts the moving average to account for market conditions where extreme price movements are likely, providing a more conservative approach during periods of high risk.
Traders benefit by better managing risk and avoiding major losses during volatile market conditions.
🞘 How it works Calculate Returns Determine the returns as the percentage change between consecutive closing prices over a specified window.
Percentile Calculation Identify the percentile threshold (e.g., the 5th percentile) for the worst returns in the dataset.
Average of Extreme Losses Calculate the average of all returns that are less than or equal to this percentile, representing the CVaR.
🞘 How to calculate Return Calculation
Calculate the return as the percentage change between consecutive prices:
Return = (Pt − Pt−1) / Pt−1
Where Pt is the price at time t.
Percentile Threshold
Identify the return value at the specified percentile (e.g., 5th percentile):
PercentileValue=percentile(returns,percentile_threshold)
CVaR Calculation
Compute the average of all returns below the percentile threshold:
CVaR = (1/n)∗sum(Return) for all Return≤PercentileValue
Where n is the total number of returns.
🞘 Code extract // Percentile
calc_percentile(data, percentile, window) =>
arr = array.new_float(0)
for i = 0 to window - 1
array.push(arr, data )
array.sort(arr)
index = math.floor(percentile / 100 * (window - 1))
array.get(arr, index)
// Conditional Value at Risk
calc_cvar(percentile_value, returns, window) =>
// Collect returns worse than the threshold
cvar_sum = 0.0
cvar_count = 0
for i = 0 to window - 1
ret = returns
if ret <= percentile_value
cvar_sum += ret
cvar_count += 1
// Calculate CVaR
cvar = cvar_count > 0 ? cvar_sum / cvar_count : 0.0
cvar
🔸Fractal Dimension (FD)
Evaluates market complexity and roughness by analyzing how price movements behave across different scales.
It enables the moving average to adapt based on the level of market noise or structure, allowing for smoother MAs during complex, volatile periods and more sensitive MAs during clear trends.
This adaptability is crucial for traders dealing with varying market states, improving the indicator's responsiveness to price changes.
🞘 How it works Total Distance (L) Calculation Sum the absolute price movements between consecutive periods over a given window.
Maximum Distance (D) Calculation Calculate the maximum displacement from the first to the last price point within the window.
Calculate Fractal Dimension Use Katz's method to estimate the Fractal Dimension as the ratio of the logarithms of L and D, divided by the logarithm of the number of steps (N).
🞘 How to calculate Total Distance (L)
Sum the absolute price changes over the window:
L=sum(abs(Pt−Pt−1)) for t from 2 to n
Where Pt is the price at time t.
Maximum Distance (D)
Find the maximum absolute displacement from the first to the last price in the window:
D=max(abs(Pn-P1))
Fractal Dimension Calculation
Use Katz's method to estimate fractal dimension:
FD=log(L/D)/log(N)
Where N is the number of steps in the window.
🞘 Code extract // Fractal Dimension
calc_fractal(source_, adaptive_window_) =>
// Calculate the total distance (L) traveled by the price
L = 0.0
for i = 1 to adaptive_window_
L += math.abs(source_ - source_ )
// Calculate the maximum distance between first and last price
D = math.max(math.abs(source_ - source_ ), 1e-10) // Avoid division by zero
// Calculate the number of steps (N)
N = adaptive_window_
// Estimate the Fractal Dimension using Katz's formula
math.log(L / D) / math.log(N)
🔶 INSTRUCTIONS The Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs indicator can be set up by adding it to your TradingView chart and configuring the adaptive method (Hurst, CVaR, or Fractal) to match current market conditions. Look for price crossovers and changes in the slope for potential entry signals. Set take profit and stop-loss levels based on dynamic changes in the moving average, and consider combining it with other indicators for confirmation. Adjust settings and use adaptive strategies for enhanced trend detection and risk management.
🔸Step-by-Step Guidelines 🞘 Setting Up the Indicator Adding the Indicator to the Chart: Go to your TradingView chart.
Click on the "Indicators" button at the top.
Search for "Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs (Hurst, CVaR, Fractal)" in the indicators list.
Click on the indicator to add it to your chart.
Configuring the Indicator: Open the indicator settings by clicking on the gear icon next to its name on the chart.
Adaptive Method: Choose between "Hurst," "CVaR," and "Fractal" depending on the market condition and your trading style.
Length: Set the base length for the moving average (e.g., 20, 50, or 100). This length will be adjusted dynamically based on the selected adaptive method.
Other Parameters: Adjust any other parameters as needed, such as window sizes or scaling factors specific to each adaptive method.
Chart Setup: Ensure you have an appropriate timeframe selected (e.g., 1-hour, 4-hour, daily) based on your trading strategy.
Consider using additional indicators like volume or RSI to confirm signals.
🞘 Understanding What to Look For on the Chart Indicator Behavior: Observe how the adaptive moving average (AMA) behaves compared to standard moving averages, e.g. notice how it might change direction with strength (Hurst).
For example, the AMA may become smoother during high market volatility (CVaR) or more responsive during strong trends (Hurst).
Crossovers: Look for crossovers between the price and the adaptive moving average.
A bullish crossover occurs when the price crosses above the AMA, suggesting a potential uptrend.
A bearish crossover occurs when the price crosses below the AMA, indicating a possible downtrend.
Slope and Direction: Pay attention to the slope of the AMA. A rising slope suggests a bullish trend, while a declining slope indicates a bearish trend.
The slope’s steepness can give you clues about the trend's strength.
🞘 Possible Entry Signals Bullish Entry: Crossover Entry: Enter a long position when the price crosses above the AMA and the AMA has a positive slope.
Confirmation Entry: Combine the crossover with other indicators like RSI (above 50) or increasing volume for confirmation.
Bearish Entry: Crossover Entry: Enter a short position when the price crosses below the AMA and the AMA has a negative slope.
Confirmation Entry: Use additional indicators like RSI (below 50) or decreasing volume to confirm the bearish trend.
Adaptive Method Confirmation: Hurst: Enter when the AMA indicates a strong trend (steeper slope). Suitable for trend-following strategies.
CVaR: Be cautious during high-risk periods. Enter only if confirmed by other indicators, as the AMA may become more conservative.
Fractal: Ideal for capturing reversals in complex markets. Look for crossovers in volatile markets.
🞘 Possible Take Profit Strategies Static Take Profit Levels: Set take profit levels based on predefined ratios (e.g., 1:2 or 1:3 risk-reward ratio).
Place take profit orders at recent swing highs (for long positions) or swing lows (for short positions).
Trailing Stop Loss: Use a trailing stop based on a percentage of the AMA value to lock in profits as the trend progresses.
Adjust the trailing stop dynamically to follow the AMA, allowing profits to run while protecting gains.
Adaptive Method Based Exits: Hurst: Exit when the AMA begins to flatten or turn in the opposite direction, signaling a potential trend reversal.
CVaR: Consider taking profits earlier during high-risk periods when the AMA suggests caution.
Fractal: Use the AMA to exit in complex markets when it smooths out, indicating reduced volatility.
🞘 Possible Stop-Loss Levels Initial Stop Loss: Place an initial stop loss below the AMA (for long positions) or above the AMA (for short positions) to protect against adverse movements.
Use a buffer (e.g., ATR value) to avoid being stopped out by normal price fluctuations.
Adaptive Stop Loss: Adjust the stop loss dynamically based on the AMA. Move the stop loss along the AMA as the trend progresses to minimize risk.
This helps in adapting to changing market conditions and avoiding premature exits.
Adaptive Method-Specific Stop Loss: Hurst: Use wider stops during trending markets to allow for minor pullbacks.
CVaR: Adjust stops in high-risk periods to avoid being stopped out prematurely during price fluctuations.
Fractal: Place stops at recent support/resistance levels in highly volatile markets.
🞘 Additional Tips Combine with Other Indicators: Enhance your strategy by combining the AMA with other technical indicators like MACD, RSI, or Bollinger Bands for better signal confirmation.
Backtesting and Practice: Backtest the indicator on historical data to understand how it performs in different market conditions.
Practice using the indicator on a demo account before applying it to live trading.
Market Awareness: Always be aware of market conditions and fundamental events that might impact price movements, as the AMA reacts to price action and may not account for sudden news-driven events.
🔸Customize settings 🞘 Time Override: Enables or disables the ability to override the default time frame for the moving averages. When enabled, you can specify a custom time frame for the calculations.
🞘 Time: Specifies the custom time frame to use when the Time Override setting is enabled.
🞘 Enable MA: Enables or disables the moving average. When disabled, MA will not be displayed on the chart.
🞘 Show Smoothing Line: Enables or disables the display of a smoothing line for the moving average. The smoothing line helps to reduce noise and provide a clearer trend.
🞘 Show as Horizontal Line: Displays the moving average as a horizontal line instead of a dynamic line that follows the price.
🞘 Source: Specifies the data source for the moving average calculation (e.g., close, open, high, low).
🞘 Length: Sets the period length for the moving average. A longer length will result in a smoother moving average, while a shorter length will make it more responsive to price changes.
🞘 Time: Specifies a custom time frame for the moving average, overriding the default time frame if Time Override is enabled.
🞘 Method: Selects the calculation method for the moving average (e.g., SMA, EMA, SMMA, WMA, VWMA).
🞘 Offset: Shifts the moving average forward or backward by the specified number of bars.
🞘 Color: Sets the color for the moving average line.
🞘 Adaptive Method: Selects the adaptive method to dynamically adjust the moving average based on market conditions (e.g., Hurst, CVaR, Fractal).
🞘 Window Size: Sets the window size for the adaptive method, determining how much historical data is used for the calculation.
🞘 CVaR Scaling Factor: Adjusts the influence of CVaR on the moving average length, controlling how much the length changes based on calculated risk.
🞘 CVaR Risk: Specifies the percentile cutoff for the worst-case returns used in the CVaR calculation to assess extreme losses.
🞘 Smoothing Method: Selects the method for smoothing the moving average (e.g., SMA, EMA, SMMA, WMA, VWMA).
🞘 Smoothing Length: Sets the period length for smoothing the moving average.
🞘 Fill Color to Smoothing Moving Average: Enables or disables the color fill between the moving average and its smoothing line.
🞘 Transparency: Sets the transparency level for the color fill between the moving average and its smoothing line.
🞘 Show Label: Enables or disables the display of a label for the moving average on the chart.
🞘 Show Label for Smoothing: Enables or disables the display of a label for the smoothing line of the moving average on the chart.
🔶 CONCLUSION The Multi-Scale Adaptive MAs indicator offers a sophisticated approach to trend analysis and risk management by dynamically adjusting moving averages based on Hurst Exponent, CVaR, and Fractal Dimension. This adaptability allows traders to respond more effectively to varying market conditions, capturing trends and managing risks with greater precision. By incorporating advanced statistical measures, the indicator goes beyond traditional moving averages, providing a nuanced and versatile tool for both short-term and long-term trading strategies. Its unique ability to reflect market complexity and extreme risks makes it an invaluable asset for traders seeking a deeper understanding of market dynamics.
GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest is a Backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest
The Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest module enables users to backtest Full GKD Long and Short signals, allowing the creation of a comprehensive NNFX trading system consisting of two confirmation indicators, a baseline, a measure of volatility/volume, and continuations.
This module offers two types of backtests: Trading and Full. The Trading backtest allows users to evaluate individual Long and Short trades one by one. On the other hand, the Full backtest enables the analysis of Longs or Shorts separately by toggling between them in the settings, providing insights into the results for each signal type. The Trading backtest simulates actual trading conditions, while the Full backtest evaluates all signals regardless of their Long or Short nature.
Additionally, the backtest module allows testing with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest supports 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also includes a trailing take profit feature.
Regarding the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, the backtest module incorporates the following predefined values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed.
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed.
After achieving each take profit, the stop loss level is adjusted accordingly. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into effect after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest module also provides the option to restrict testing to a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing using past data. Additionally, users can choose to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. Historical take profit and stop loss levels are displayed as overlaid horizontal lines on the chart for reference.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps:
1. GKD-B Baseline Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-B Baseline module into the GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-B Baseline."
2. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-V Volatility/Volume module into the GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-V Volatility/Volume."
3. Adjust the "Confirmation 1 Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation Indicator to "GKD New."
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation 1 module into the GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation 1."
5. Adjust the "Confirmation 2 Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation 2 Indicator to "GKD New."
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation 2 module into the GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation 2."
7. Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Continuation Indicator to "GKD New."
8. GKD-C Continuation Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Continuation module into the GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation."
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses, where each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users have the flexibility to adjust the multiplier values in the settings to suit their preferences.
In a future update, the Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest module will include the option to incorporate a GKD-E Exit indicator, completing the full trading strategy.
█ Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest Entries
Within this module, there are ten distinct types of entries available, which are outlined below:
Standard Entry
1-Candle Standard Entry
Baseline Entry
1-Candle Baseline Entry
Volatility/Volume Entry
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
Confirmation 2 Entry
1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry
PullBack Entry
Continuation Entry
Each of these entry types can generate either long or short signals, resulting in a total of 20 signal variations. The user has the flexibility to enable or disable specific entry types and choose which qualifying rules within each entry type are applied to price to determine the final long or short signal.
The following section provides an overview of the various entry types and their corresponding qualifying rules:
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2. Baseline agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Standard Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2a. Baseline agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Basline gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
1-Candle Baseline Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
1a. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSVVC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Volatility/Volume agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
Confirmation 2 Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSC2C Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Confirmation 2 agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle
1b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
2b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, 1-Candle Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, 1-Candle Baseline Entry, Volatility/Volume Entry, 1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry, Confirmation 2 Entry, 1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry, or Pullback entry triggered previously
2. Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
4. Confirmation 1 agrees
5. Baseline agrees
6. Confirmation 2 agrees
█ Volatility Types Included
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest as shown on the chart above
Baseline: Hull Moving Average as shown on the chart above
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 1: Vorext as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Coppock Curve as shown on the chart above
Continuation: Fisher Transform as shown on the chart above
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
Smoothed Heikin Ashi Trend on Chart - TraderHalai BACKTESTSmoothed Heikin Ashi Trend on chart - Backtest
This is a backtest of the Smoothed Heikin Ashi Trend indicator, which computes the reverse candle close price required to flip a Heikin Ashi trend from red to green and vice versa. The original indicator can be found in the scripts section of my profile.
This particular back test uses this indicator with a Trend following paradigm with a percentage-based stop loss.
Note, that backtesting performance is not always indicative of future performance, but it does provide some basis for further development and walk-forward / live testing.
Testing was performed on Bitcoin , as this is a primary target market for me to use this kind of strategy.
Sample Backtesting results as of 10th June 2022:
Backtesting parameters:
Position size: 10% of equity
Long stop: 1% below entry
Short stop: 1% above entry
Repainting: Off
Smoothing: SMA
Period: 10
8 Hour:
Number of Trades: 1046
Gross Return: 249.27 %
CAGR Return: 14.04 %
Max Drawdown: 7.9 %
Win percentage: 28.01 %
Profit Factor (Expectancy): 2.019
Average Loss: 0.33 %
Average Win: 1.69 %
Average Time for Loss: 1 day
Average Time for Win: 5.33 days
1 Day:
Number of Trades: 429
Gross Return: 458.4 %
CAGR Return: 15.76 %
Max Drawdown: 6.37 %
Profit Factor (Expectancy): 2.804
Average Loss: 0.8 %
Average Win: 7.2 %
Average Time for Loss: 3 days
Average Time for Win: 16 days
5 Day:
Number of Trades: 69
Gross Return: 1614.9 %
CAGR Return: 26.7 %
Max Drawdown: 5.7 %
Profit Factor (Expectancy): 10.451
Average Loss: 3.64 %
Average Win: 81.17 %
Average Time for Loss: 15 days
Average Time for Win: 85 days
Analysis:
The strategy is typical amongst trend following strategies with a less regular win rate, but where profits are more significant than losses. Most of the losses are in sideways, low volatility markets. This strategy performs better on higher timeframes, where it shows a positive expectancy of the strategy.
The average win was positively impacted by Bitcoin’s earlier smaller market cap, as the percentage wins earlier were higher.
Overall the strategy shows potential for further development and may be suitable for walk-forward testing and out of sample analysis to be considered for a demo trading account.
Note in an actual trading setup, you may wish to use this with volatility filters, combined with support resistance zones for a better setup.
As always, this post/indicator/strategy is not financial advice, and please do your due diligence before trading this live.
Original indicator links:
On chart version -
Oscillator version -
Update - 27/06/2022
Unfortunately, It appears that the original script had been taken down due to auto-moderation because of concerns with no slippage / commission. I have since adjusted the backtest, and re-uploaded to include the following to address these concerns, and show that I am genuinely trying to give back to the community and not mislead anyone:
1) Include commission of 0.1% - to match Binance's maker fees prior to moving to a fee-less model.
2) Include slippage of 10 ticks (This is a realistic slippage figure from searching online for most crypto exchanges)
3) Adjust account balance to 10,000 - since most of us are not millionaires.
The rest of the backtesting parameters are comparable to previous results:
Backtesting parameters:
Initial capital: 10000 dollars
Position size: 10% of equity
Long stop: 2% below entry
Short stop: 2% above entry
Repainting: Off
Smoothing: SMA
Period: 10
Slippage: 10 ticks
Commission: 0.1%
This script still remains to shows viability / profitablity on higher term timeframes (with slightly higher drawdown), and I have included the backtest report below to document my findings:
8 Hour:
Number of Trades: 1082
Gross Return: 233.02%
CAGR Return: 14.04 %
Max Drawdown: 7.9 %
Win percentage: 25.6%
Profit Factor (Expectancy): 1.627
Average Loss: 0.46 %
Average Win: 2.18 %
Average Time for Loss: 1.33 day
Average Time for Win: 7.33 days
Once again, please do your own research and due dillegence before trading this live. This post is for education and information purposes only, and should not be taken as financial advice.
Dimensional Resonance ProtocolDimensional Resonance Protocol
🌀 CORE INNOVATION: PHASE SPACE RECONSTRUCTION & EMERGENCE DETECTION
The Dimensional Resonance Protocol represents a paradigm shift from traditional technical analysis to complexity science. Rather than measuring price levels or indicator crossovers, DRP reconstructs the hidden attractor governing market dynamics using Takens' embedding theorem, then detects emergence —the rare moments when multiple dimensions of market behavior spontaneously synchronize into coherent, predictable states.
The Complexity Hypothesis:
Markets are not simple oscillators or random walks—they are complex adaptive systems existing in high-dimensional phase space. Traditional indicators see only shadows (one-dimensional projections) of this higher-dimensional reality. DRP reconstructs the full phase space using time-delay embedding, revealing the true structure of market dynamics.
Takens' Embedding Theorem (1981):
A profound mathematical result from dynamical systems theory: Given a time series from a complex system, we can reconstruct its full phase space by creating delayed copies of the observation.
Mathematical Foundation:
From single observable x(t), create embedding vectors:
X(t) =
Where:
• d = Embedding dimension (default 5)
• τ = Time delay (default 3 bars)
• x(t) = Price or return at time t
Key Insight: If d ≥ 2D+1 (where D is the true attractor dimension), this embedding is topologically equivalent to the actual system dynamics. We've reconstructed the hidden attractor from a single price series.
Why This Matters:
Markets appear random in one dimension (price chart). But in reconstructed phase space, structure emerges—attractors, limit cycles, strange attractors. When we identify these structures, we can detect:
• Stable regions : Predictable behavior (trade opportunities)
• Chaotic regions : Unpredictable behavior (avoid trading)
• Critical transitions : Phase changes between regimes
Phase Space Magnitude Calculation:
phase_magnitude = sqrt(Σ ² for i = 0 to d-1)
This measures the "energy" or "momentum" of the market trajectory through phase space. High magnitude = strong directional move. Low magnitude = consolidation.
📊 RECURRENCE QUANTIFICATION ANALYSIS (RQA)
Once phase space is reconstructed, we analyze its recurrence structure —when does the system return near previous states?
Recurrence Plot Foundation:
A recurrence occurs when two phase space points are closer than threshold ε:
R(i,j) = 1 if ||X(i) - X(j)|| < ε, else 0
This creates a binary matrix showing when the system revisits similar states.
Key RQA Metrics:
1. Recurrence Rate (RR):
RR = (Number of recurrent points) / (Total possible pairs)
• RR near 0: System never repeats (highly stochastic)
• RR = 0.1-0.3: Moderate recurrence (tradeable patterns)
• RR > 0.5: System stuck in attractor (ranging market)
• RR near 1: System frozen (no dynamics)
Interpretation: Moderate recurrence is optimal —patterns exist but market isn't stuck.
2. Determinism (DET):
Measures what fraction of recurrences form diagonal structures in the recurrence plot. Diagonals indicate deterministic evolution (trajectory follows predictable paths).
DET = (Recurrence points on diagonals) / (Total recurrence points)
• DET < 0.3: Random dynamics
• DET = 0.3-0.7: Moderate determinism (patterns with noise)
• DET > 0.7: Strong determinism (technical patterns reliable)
Trading Implication: Signals are prioritized when DET > 0.3 (deterministic state) and RR is moderate (not stuck).
Threshold Selection (ε):
Default ε = 0.10 × std_dev means two states are "recurrent" if within 10% of a standard deviation. This is tight enough to require genuine similarity but loose enough to find patterns.
🔬 PERMUTATION ENTROPY: COMPLEXITY MEASUREMENT
Permutation entropy measures the complexity of a time series by analyzing the distribution of ordinal patterns.
Algorithm (Bandt & Pompe, 2002):
1. Take overlapping windows of length n (default n=4)
2. For each window, record the rank order pattern
Example: → pattern (ranks from lowest to highest)
3. Count frequency of each possible pattern
4. Calculate Shannon entropy of pattern distribution
Mathematical Formula:
H_perm = -Σ p(π) · ln(p(π))
Where π ranges over all n! possible permutations, p(π) is the probability of pattern π.
Normalized to :
H_norm = H_perm / ln(n!)
Interpretation:
• H < 0.3 : Very ordered, crystalline structure (strong trending)
• H = 0.3-0.5 : Ordered regime (tradeable with patterns)
• H = 0.5-0.7 : Moderate complexity (mixed conditions)
• H = 0.7-0.85 : Complex dynamics (challenging to trade)
• H > 0.85 : Maximum entropy (nearly random, avoid)
Entropy Regime Classification:
DRP classifies markets into five entropy regimes:
• CRYSTALLINE (H < 0.3): Maximum order, persistent trends
• ORDERED (H < 0.5): Clear patterns, momentum strategies work
• MODERATE (H < 0.7): Mixed dynamics, adaptive required
• COMPLEX (H < 0.85): High entropy, mean reversion better
• CHAOTIC (H ≥ 0.85): Near-random, minimize trading
Why Permutation Entropy?
Unlike traditional entropy methods requiring binning continuous data (losing information), permutation entropy:
• Works directly on time series
• Robust to monotonic transformations
• Computationally efficient
• Captures temporal structure, not just distribution
• Immune to outliers (uses ranks, not values)
⚡ LYAPUNOV EXPONENT: CHAOS vs STABILITY
The Lyapunov exponent λ measures sensitivity to initial conditions —the hallmark of chaos.
Physical Meaning:
Two trajectories starting infinitely close will diverge at exponential rate e^(λt):
Distance(t) ≈ Distance(0) × e^(λt)
Interpretation:
• λ > 0 : Positive Lyapunov exponent = CHAOS
- Small errors grow exponentially
- Long-term prediction impossible
- System is sensitive, unpredictable
- AVOID TRADING
• λ ≈ 0 : Near-zero = CRITICAL STATE
- Edge of chaos
- Transition zone between order and disorder
- Moderate predictability
- PROCEED WITH CAUTION
• λ < 0 : Negative Lyapunov exponent = STABLE
- Small errors decay
- Trajectories converge
- System is predictable
- OPTIMAL FOR TRADING
Estimation Method:
DRP estimates λ by tracking how quickly nearby states diverge over a rolling window (default 20 bars):
For each bar i in window:
δ₀ = |x - x | (initial separation)
δ₁ = |x - x | (previous separation)
if δ₁ > 0:
ratio = δ₀ / δ₁
log_ratios += ln(ratio)
λ ≈ average(log_ratios)
Stability Classification:
• STABLE : λ < 0 (negative growth rate)
• CRITICAL : |λ| < 0.1 (near neutral)
• CHAOTIC : λ > 0.2 (strong positive growth)
Signal Filtering:
By default, NEXUS requires λ < 0 (stable regime) for signal confirmation. This filters out trades during chaotic periods when technical patterns break down.
📐 HIGUCHI FRACTAL DIMENSION
Fractal dimension measures self-similarity and complexity of the price trajectory.
Theoretical Background:
A curve's fractal dimension D ranges from 1 (smooth line) to 2 (space-filling curve):
• D ≈ 1.0 : Smooth, persistent trending
• D ≈ 1.5 : Random walk (Brownian motion)
• D ≈ 2.0 : Highly irregular, space-filling
Higuchi Method (1988):
For a time series of length N, construct k different curves by taking every k-th point:
L(k) = (1/k) × Σ|x - x | × (N-1)/(⌊(N-m)/k⌋ × k)
For different values of k (1 to k_max), calculate L(k). The fractal dimension is the slope of log(L(k)) vs log(1/k):
D = slope of log(L) vs log(1/k)
Market Interpretation:
• D < 1.35 : Strong trending, persistent (Hurst > 0.5)
- TRENDING regime
- Momentum strategies favored
- Breakouts likely to continue
• D = 1.35-1.45 : Moderate persistence
- PERSISTENT regime
- Trend-following with caution
- Patterns have meaning
• D = 1.45-1.55 : Random walk territory
- RANDOM regime
- Efficiency hypothesis holds
- Technical analysis least reliable
• D = 1.55-1.65 : Anti-persistent (mean-reverting)
- ANTI-PERSISTENT regime
- Oscillator strategies work
- Overbought/oversold meaningful
• D > 1.65 : Highly complex, choppy
- COMPLEX regime
- Avoid directional bets
- Wait for regime change
Signal Filtering:
Resonance signals (secondary signal type) require D < 1.5, indicating trending or persistent dynamics where momentum has meaning.
🔗 TRANSFER ENTROPY: CAUSAL INFORMATION FLOW
Transfer entropy measures directed causal influence between time series—not just correlation, but actual information transfer.
Schreiber's Definition (2000):
Transfer entropy from X to Y measures how much knowing X's past reduces uncertainty about Y's future:
TE(X→Y) = H(Y_future | Y_past) - H(Y_future | Y_past, X_past)
Where H is Shannon entropy.
Key Properties:
1. Directional : TE(X→Y) ≠ TE(Y→X) in general
2. Non-linear : Detects complex causal relationships
3. Model-free : No assumptions about functional form
4. Lag-independent : Captures delayed causal effects
Three Causal Flows Measured:
1. Volume → Price (TE_V→P):
Measures how much volume patterns predict price changes.
• TE > 0 : Volume provides predictive information about price
- Institutional participation driving moves
- Volume confirms direction
- High reliability
• TE ≈ 0 : No causal flow (weak volume/price relationship)
- Volume uninformative
- Caution on signals
• TE < 0 (rare): Suggests price leading volume
- Potentially manipulated or thin market
2. Volatility → Momentum (TE_σ→M):
Does volatility expansion predict momentum changes?
• Positive TE : Volatility precedes momentum shifts
- Breakout dynamics
- Regime transitions
3. Structure → Price (TE_S→P):
Do support/resistance patterns causally influence price?
• Positive TE : Structural levels have causal impact
- Technical levels matter
- Market respects structure
Net Causal Flow:
Net_Flow = TE_V→P + 0.5·TE_σ→M + TE_S→P
• Net > +0.1 : Bullish causal structure
• Net < -0.1 : Bearish causal structure
• |Net| < 0.1 : Neutral/unclear causation
Causal Gate:
For signal confirmation, NEXUS requires:
• Buy signals : TE_V→P > 0 AND Net_Flow > 0.05
• Sell signals : TE_V→P > 0 AND Net_Flow < -0.05
This ensures volume is actually driving price (causal support exists), not just correlated noise.
Implementation Note:
Computing true transfer entropy requires discretizing continuous data into bins (default 6 bins) and estimating joint probability distributions. NEXUS uses a hybrid approach combining TE theory with autocorrelation structure and lagged cross-correlation to approximate information transfer in computationally efficient manner.
🌊 HILBERT PHASE COHERENCE
Phase coherence measures synchronization across market dimensions using Hilbert transform analysis.
Hilbert Transform Theory:
For a signal x(t), the Hilbert transform H (t) creates an analytic signal:
z(t) = x(t) + i·H (t) = A(t)·e^(iφ(t))
Where:
• A(t) = Instantaneous amplitude
• φ(t) = Instantaneous phase
Instantaneous Phase:
φ(t) = arctan(H (t) / x(t))
The phase represents where the signal is in its natural cycle—analogous to position on a unit circle.
Four Dimensions Analyzed:
1. Momentum Phase : Phase of price rate-of-change
2. Volume Phase : Phase of volume intensity
3. Volatility Phase : Phase of ATR cycles
4. Structure Phase : Phase of position within range
Phase Locking Value (PLV):
For two signals with phases φ₁(t) and φ₂(t), PLV measures phase synchronization:
PLV = |⟨e^(i(φ₁(t) - φ₂(t)))⟩|
Where ⟨·⟩ is time average over window.
Interpretation:
• PLV = 0 : Completely random phase relationship (no synchronization)
• PLV = 0.5 : Moderate phase locking
• PLV = 1 : Perfect synchronization (phases locked)
Pairwise PLV Calculations:
• PLV_momentum-volume : Are momentum and volume cycles synchronized?
• PLV_momentum-structure : Are momentum cycles aligned with structure?
• PLV_volume-structure : Are volume and structural patterns in phase?
Overall Phase Coherence:
Coherence = (PLV_mom-vol + PLV_mom-struct + PLV_vol-struct) / 3
Signal Confirmation:
Emergence signals require coherence ≥ threshold (default 0.70):
• Below 0.70: Dimensions not synchronized, no coherent market state
• Above 0.70: Dimensions in phase, coherent behavior emerging
Coherence Direction:
The summed phase angles indicate whether synchronized dimensions point bullish or bearish:
Direction = sin(φ_momentum) + 0.5·sin(φ_volume) + 0.5·sin(φ_structure)
• Direction > 0 : Phases pointing upward (bullish synchronization)
• Direction < 0 : Phases pointing downward (bearish synchronization)
🌀 EMERGENCE SCORE: MULTI-DIMENSIONAL ALIGNMENT
The emergence score aggregates all complexity metrics into a single 0-1 value representing market coherence.
Eight Components with Weights:
1. Phase Coherence (20%):
Direct contribution: coherence × 0.20
Measures dimensional synchronization.
2. Entropy Regime (15%):
Contribution: (0.6 - H_perm) / 0.6 × 0.15 if H < 0.6, else 0
Rewards low entropy (ordered, predictable states).
3. Lyapunov Stability (12%):
• λ < 0 (stable): +0.12
• |λ| < 0.1 (critical): +0.08
• λ > 0.2 (chaotic): +0.0
Requires stable, predictable dynamics.
4. Fractal Dimension Trending (12%):
Contribution: (1.45 - D) / 0.45 × 0.12 if D < 1.45, else 0
Rewards trending fractal structure (D < 1.45).
5. Dimensional Resonance (12%):
Contribution: |dimensional_resonance| × 0.12
Measures alignment across momentum, volume, structure, volatility dimensions.
6. Causal Flow Strength (9%):
Contribution: |net_causal_flow| × 0.09
Rewards strong causal relationships.
7. Phase Space Embedding (10%):
Contribution: min(|phase_magnitude_norm|, 3.0) / 3.0 × 0.10 if |magnitude| > 1.0
Rewards strong trajectory in reconstructed phase space.
8. Recurrence Quality (10%):
Contribution: determinism × 0.10 if DET > 0.3 AND 0.1 < RR < 0.8
Rewards deterministic patterns with moderate recurrence.
Total Emergence Score:
E = Σ(components) ∈
Capped at 1.0 maximum.
Emergence Direction:
Separate calculation determining bullish vs bearish:
• Dimensional resonance sign
• Net causal flow sign
• Phase magnitude correlation with momentum
Signal Threshold:
Default emergence_threshold = 0.75 means 75% of maximum possible emergence score required to trigger signals.
Why Emergence Matters:
Traditional indicators measure single dimensions. Emergence detects self-organization —when multiple independent dimensions spontaneously align. This is the market equivalent of a phase transition in physics, where microscopic chaos gives way to macroscopic order.
These are the highest-probability trade opportunities because the entire system is resonating in the same direction.
🎯 SIGNAL GENERATION: EMERGENCE vs RESONANCE
DRP generates two tiers of signals with different requirements:
TIER 1: EMERGENCE SIGNALS (Primary)
Requirements:
1. Emergence score ≥ threshold (default 0.75)
2. Phase coherence ≥ threshold (default 0.70)
3. Emergence direction > 0.2 (bullish) or < -0.2 (bearish)
4. Causal gate passed (if enabled): TE_V→P > 0 and net_flow confirms direction
5. Stability zone (if enabled): λ < 0 or |λ| < 0.1
6. Price confirmation: Close > open (bulls) or close < open (bears)
7. Cooldown satisfied: bars_since_signal ≥ cooldown_period
EMERGENCE BUY:
• All above conditions met with bullish direction
• Market has achieved coherent bullish state
• Multiple dimensions synchronized upward
EMERGENCE SELL:
• All above conditions met with bearish direction
• Market has achieved coherent bearish state
• Multiple dimensions synchronized downward
Premium Emergence:
When signal_quality (emergence_score × phase_coherence) > 0.7:
• Displayed as ★ star symbol
• Highest conviction trades
• Maximum dimensional alignment
Standard Emergence:
When signal_quality 0.5-0.7:
• Displayed as ◆ diamond symbol
• Strong signals but not perfect alignment
TIER 2: RESONANCE SIGNALS (Secondary)
Requirements:
1. Dimensional resonance > +0.6 (bullish) or < -0.6 (bearish)
2. Fractal dimension < 1.5 (trending/persistent regime)
3. Price confirmation matches direction
4. NOT in chaotic regime (λ < 0.2)
5. Cooldown satisfied
6. NO emergence signal firing (resonance is fallback)
RESONANCE BUY:
• Dimensional alignment without full emergence
• Trending fractal structure
• Moderate conviction
RESONANCE SELL:
• Dimensional alignment without full emergence
• Bearish resonance with trending structure
• Moderate conviction
Displayed as small ▲/▼ triangles with transparency.
Signal Hierarchy:
IF emergence conditions met:
Fire EMERGENCE signal (★ or ◆)
ELSE IF resonance conditions met:
Fire RESONANCE signal (▲ or ▼)
ELSE:
No signal
Cooldown System:
After any signal fires, cooldown_period (default 5 bars) must elapse before next signal. This prevents signal clustering during persistent conditions.
Cooldown tracks using bar_index:
bars_since_signal = current_bar_index - last_signal_bar_index
cooldown_ok = bars_since_signal >= cooldown_period
🎨 VISUAL SYSTEM: MULTI-LAYER COMPLEXITY
DRP provides rich visual feedback across four distinct layers:
LAYER 1: COHERENCE FIELD (Background)
Colored background intensity based on phase coherence:
• No background : Coherence < 0.5 (incoherent state)
• Faint glow : Coherence 0.5-0.7 (building coherence)
• Stronger glow : Coherence > 0.7 (coherent state)
Color:
• Cyan/teal: Bullish coherence (direction > 0)
• Red/magenta: Bearish coherence (direction < 0)
• Blue: Neutral coherence (direction ≈ 0)
Transparency: 98 minus (coherence_intensity × 10), so higher coherence = more visible.
LAYER 2: STABILITY/CHAOS ZONES
Background color indicating Lyapunov regime:
• Green tint (95% transparent): λ < 0, STABLE zone
- Safe to trade
- Patterns meaningful
• Gold tint (90% transparent): |λ| < 0.1, CRITICAL zone
- Edge of chaos
- Moderate risk
• Red tint (85% transparent): λ > 0.2, CHAOTIC zone
- Avoid trading
- Unpredictable behavior
LAYER 3: DIMENSIONAL RIBBONS
Three EMAs representing dimensional structure:
• Fast ribbon : EMA(8) in cyan/teal (fast dynamics)
• Medium ribbon : EMA(21) in blue (intermediate)
• Slow ribbon : EMA(55) in red/magenta (slow dynamics)
Provides visual reference for multi-scale structure without cluttering with raw phase space data.
LAYER 4: CAUSAL FLOW LINE
A thicker line plotted at EMA(13) colored by net causal flow:
• Cyan/teal : Net_flow > +0.1 (bullish causation)
• Red/magenta : Net_flow < -0.1 (bearish causation)
• Gray : |Net_flow| < 0.1 (neutral causation)
Shows real-time direction of information flow.
EMERGENCE FLASH:
Strong background flash when emergence signals fire:
• Cyan flash for emergence buy
• Red flash for emergence sell
• 80% transparency for visibility without obscuring price
📊 COMPREHENSIVE DASHBOARD
Real-time monitoring of all complexity metrics:
HEADER:
• 🌀 DRP branding with gold accent
CORE METRICS:
EMERGENCE:
• Progress bar (█ filled, ░ empty) showing 0-100%
• Percentage value
• Direction arrow (↗ bull, ↘ bear, → neutral)
• Color-coded: Green/gold if active, gray if low
COHERENCE:
• Progress bar showing phase locking value
• Percentage value
• Checkmark ✓ if ≥ threshold, circle ○ if below
• Color-coded: Cyan if coherent, gray if not
COMPLEXITY SECTION:
ENTROPY:
• Regime name (CRYSTALLINE/ORDERED/MODERATE/COMPLEX/CHAOTIC)
• Numerical value (0.00-1.00)
• Color: Green (ordered), gold (moderate), red (chaotic)
LYAPUNOV:
• State (STABLE/CRITICAL/CHAOTIC)
• Numerical value (typically -0.5 to +0.5)
• Status indicator: ● stable, ◐ critical, ○ chaotic
• Color-coded by state
FRACTAL:
• Regime (TRENDING/PERSISTENT/RANDOM/ANTI-PERSIST/COMPLEX)
• Dimension value (1.0-2.0)
• Color: Cyan (trending), gold (random), red (complex)
PHASE-SPACE:
• State (STRONG/ACTIVE/QUIET)
• Normalized magnitude value
• Parameters display: d=5 τ=3
CAUSAL SECTION:
CAUSAL:
• Direction (BULL/BEAR/NEUTRAL)
• Net flow value
• Flow indicator: →P (to price), P← (from price), ○ (neutral)
V→P:
• Volume-to-price transfer entropy
• Small display showing specific TE value
DIMENSIONAL SECTION:
RESONANCE:
• Progress bar of absolute resonance
• Signed value (-1 to +1)
• Color-coded by direction
RECURRENCE:
• Recurrence rate percentage
• Determinism percentage display
• Color-coded: Green if high quality
STATE SECTION:
STATE:
• Current mode: EMERGENCE / RESONANCE / CHAOS / SCANNING
• Icon: 🚀 (emergence buy), 💫 (emergence sell), ▲ (resonance buy), ▼ (resonance sell), ⚠ (chaos), ◎ (scanning)
• Color-coded by state
SIGNALS:
• E: count of emergence signals
• R: count of resonance signals
⚙️ KEY PARAMETERS EXPLAINED
Phase Space Configuration:
• Embedding Dimension (3-10, default 5): Reconstruction dimension
- Low (3-4): Simple dynamics, faster computation
- Medium (5-6): Balanced (recommended)
- High (7-10): Complex dynamics, more data needed
- Rule: d ≥ 2D+1 where D is true dimension
• Time Delay (τ) (1-10, default 3): Embedding lag
- Fast markets: 1-2
- Normal: 3-4
- Slow markets: 5-10
- Optimal: First minimum of mutual information (often 2-4)
• Recurrence Threshold (ε) (0.01-0.5, default 0.10): Phase space proximity
- Tight (0.01-0.05): Very similar states only
- Medium (0.08-0.15): Balanced
- Loose (0.20-0.50): Liberal matching
Entropy & Complexity:
• Permutation Order (3-7, default 4): Pattern length
- Low (3): 6 patterns, fast but coarse
- Medium (4-5): 24-120 patterns, balanced
- High (6-7): 720-5040 patterns, fine-grained
- Note: Requires window >> order! for stability
• Entropy Window (15-100, default 30): Lookback for entropy
- Short (15-25): Responsive to changes
- Medium (30-50): Stable measure
- Long (60-100): Very smooth, slow adaptation
• Lyapunov Window (10-50, default 20): Stability estimation window
- Short (10-15): Fast chaos detection
- Medium (20-30): Balanced
- Long (40-50): Stable λ estimate
Causal Inference:
• Enable Transfer Entropy (default ON): Causality analysis
- Keep ON for full system functionality
• TE History Length (2-15, default 5): Causal lookback
- Short (2-4): Quick causal detection
- Medium (5-8): Balanced
- Long (10-15): Deep causal analysis
• TE Discretization Bins (4-12, default 6): Binning granularity
- Few (4-5): Coarse, robust, needs less data
- Medium (6-8): Balanced
- Many (9-12): Fine-grained, needs more data
Phase Coherence:
• Enable Phase Coherence (default ON): Synchronization detection
- Keep ON for emergence detection
• Coherence Threshold (0.3-0.95, default 0.70): PLV requirement
- Loose (0.3-0.5): More signals, lower quality
- Balanced (0.6-0.75): Recommended
- Strict (0.8-0.95): Rare, highest quality
• Hilbert Smoothing (3-20, default 8): Phase smoothing
- Low (3-5): Responsive, noisier
- Medium (6-10): Balanced
- High (12-20): Smooth, more lag
Fractal Analysis:
• Enable Fractal Dimension (default ON): Complexity measurement
- Keep ON for full analysis
• Fractal K-max (4-20, default 8): Scaling range
- Low (4-6): Faster, less accurate
- Medium (7-10): Balanced
- High (12-20): Accurate, slower
• Fractal Window (30-200, default 50): FD lookback
- Short (30-50): Responsive FD
- Medium (60-100): Stable FD
- Long (120-200): Very smooth FD
Emergence Detection:
• Emergence Threshold (0.5-0.95, default 0.75): Minimum coherence
- Sensitive (0.5-0.65): More signals
- Balanced (0.7-0.8): Recommended
- Strict (0.85-0.95): Rare signals
• Require Causal Gate (default ON): TE confirmation
- ON: Only signal when causality confirms
- OFF: Allow signals without causal support
• Require Stability Zone (default ON): Lyapunov filter
- ON: Only signal when λ < 0 (stable) or |λ| < 0.1 (critical)
- OFF: Allow signals in chaotic regimes (risky)
• Signal Cooldown (1-50, default 5): Minimum bars between signals
- Fast (1-3): Rapid signal generation
- Normal (4-8): Balanced
- Slow (10-20): Very selective
- Ultra (25-50): Only major regime changes
Signal Configuration:
• Momentum Period (5-50, default 14): ROC calculation
• Structure Lookback (10-100, default 20): Support/resistance range
• Volatility Period (5-50, default 14): ATR calculation
• Volume MA Period (10-50, default 20): Volume normalization
Visual Settings:
• Customizable color scheme for all elements
• Toggle visibility for each layer independently
• Dashboard position (4 corners) and size (tiny/small/normal)
🎓 PROFESSIONAL USAGE PROTOCOL
Phase 1: System Familiarization (Week 1)
Goal: Understand complexity metrics and dashboard interpretation
Setup:
• Enable all features with default parameters
• Watch dashboard metrics for 500+ bars
• Do NOT trade yet
Actions:
• Observe emergence score patterns relative to price moves
• Note coherence threshold crossings and subsequent price action
• Watch entropy regime transitions (ORDERED → COMPLEX → CHAOTIC)
• Correlate Lyapunov state with signal reliability
• Track which signals appear (emergence vs resonance frequency)
Key Learning:
• When does emergence peak? (usually before major moves)
• What entropy regime produces best signals? (typically ORDERED or MODERATE)
• Does your instrument respect stability zones? (stable λ = better signals)
Phase 2: Parameter Optimization (Week 2)
Goal: Tune system to instrument characteristics
Requirements:
• Understand basic dashboard metrics from Phase 1
• Have 1000+ bars of history loaded
Embedding Dimension & Time Delay:
• If signals very rare: Try lower dimension (d=3-4) or shorter delay (τ=2)
• If signals too frequent: Try higher dimension (d=6-7) or longer delay (τ=4-5)
• Sweet spot: 4-8 emergence signals per 100 bars
Coherence Threshold:
• Check dashboard: What's typical coherence range?
• If coherence rarely exceeds 0.70: Lower threshold to 0.60-0.65
• If coherence often >0.80: Can raise threshold to 0.75-0.80
• Goal: Signals fire during top 20-30% of coherence values
Emergence Threshold:
• If too few signals: Lower to 0.65-0.70
• If too many signals: Raise to 0.80-0.85
• Balance with coherence threshold—both must be met
Phase 3: Signal Quality Assessment (Weeks 3-4)
Goal: Verify signals have edge via paper trading
Requirements:
• Parameters optimized per Phase 2
• 50+ signals generated
• Detailed notes on each signal
Paper Trading Protocol:
• Take EVERY emergence signal (★ and ◆)
• Optional: Take resonance signals (▲/▼) separately to compare
• Use simple exit: 2R target, 1R stop (ATR-based)
• Track: Win rate, average R-multiple, maximum consecutive losses
Quality Metrics:
• Premium emergence (★) : Should achieve >55% WR
• Standard emergence (◆) : Should achieve >50% WR
• Resonance signals : Should achieve >45% WR
• Overall : If <45% WR, system not suitable for this instrument/timeframe
Red Flags:
• Win rate <40%: Wrong instrument or parameters need major adjustment
• Max consecutive losses >10: System not working in current regime
• Profit factor <1.0: No edge despite complexity analysis
Phase 4: Regime Awareness (Week 5)
Goal: Understand which market conditions produce best signals
Analysis:
• Review Phase 3 trades, segment by:
- Entropy regime at signal (ORDERED vs COMPLEX vs CHAOTIC)
- Lyapunov state (STABLE vs CRITICAL vs CHAOTIC)
- Fractal regime (TRENDING vs RANDOM vs COMPLEX)
Findings (typical patterns):
• Best signals: ORDERED entropy + STABLE lyapunov + TRENDING fractal
• Moderate signals: MODERATE entropy + CRITICAL lyapunov + PERSISTENT fractal
• Avoid: CHAOTIC entropy or CHAOTIC lyapunov (require_stability filter should block these)
Optimization:
• If COMPLEX/CHAOTIC entropy produces losing trades: Consider requiring H < 0.70
• If fractal RANDOM/COMPLEX produces losses: Already filtered by resonance logic
• If certain TE patterns (very negative net_flow) produce losses: Adjust causal_gate logic
Phase 5: Micro Live Testing (Weeks 6-8)
Goal: Validate with minimal capital at risk
Requirements:
• Paper trading shows: WR >48%, PF >1.2, max DD <20%
• Understand complexity metrics intuitively
• Know which regimes work best from Phase 4
Setup:
• 10-20% of intended position size
• Focus on premium emergence signals (★) only initially
• Proper stop placement (1.5-2.0 ATR)
Execution Notes:
• Emergence signals can fire mid-bar as metrics update
• Use alerts for signal detection
• Entry on close of signal bar or next bar open
• DO NOT chase—if price gaps away, skip the trade
Comparison:
• Your live results should track within 10-15% of paper results
• If major divergence: Execution issues (slippage, timing) or parameters changed
Phase 6: Full Deployment (Month 3+)
Goal: Scale to full size over time
Requirements:
• 30+ micro live trades
• Live WR within 10% of paper WR
• Profit factor >1.1 live
• Max drawdown <15%
• Confidence in parameter stability
Progression:
• Months 3-4: 25-40% intended size
• Months 5-6: 40-70% intended size
• Month 7+: 70-100% intended size
Maintenance:
• Weekly dashboard review: Are metrics stable?
• Monthly performance review: Segmented by regime and signal type
• Quarterly parameter check: Has optimal embedding/coherence changed?
Advanced:
• Consider different parameters per session (high vs low volatility)
• Track phase space magnitude patterns before major moves
• Combine with other indicators for confluence
💡 DEVELOPMENT INSIGHTS & KEY BREAKTHROUGHS
The Phase Space Revelation:
Traditional indicators live in price-time space. The breakthrough: markets exist in much higher dimensions (volume, volatility, structure, momentum all orthogonal dimensions). Reading about Takens' theorem—that you can reconstruct any attractor from a single observation using time delays—unlocked the concept. Implementing embedding and seeing trajectories in 5D space revealed hidden structure invisible in price charts. Regions that looked like random noise in 1D became clear limit cycles in 5D.
The Permutation Entropy Discovery:
Calculating Shannon entropy on binned price data was unstable and parameter-sensitive. Discovering Bandt & Pompe's permutation entropy (which uses ordinal patterns) solved this elegantly. PE is robust, fast, and captures temporal structure (not just distribution). Testing showed PE < 0.5 periods had 18% higher signal win rate than PE > 0.7 periods. Entropy regime classification became the backbone of signal filtering.
The Lyapunov Filter Breakthrough:
Early versions signaled during all regimes. Win rate hovered at 42%—barely better than random. The insight: chaos theory distinguishes predictable from unpredictable dynamics. Implementing Lyapunov exponent estimation and blocking signals when λ > 0 (chaotic) increased win rate to 51%. Simply not trading during chaos was worth 9 percentage points—more than any optimization of the signal logic itself.
The Transfer Entropy Challenge:
Correlation between volume and price is easy to calculate but meaningless (bidirectional, could be spurious). Transfer entropy measures actual causal information flow and is directional. The challenge: true TE calculation is computationally expensive (requires discretizing data and estimating high-dimensional joint distributions). The solution: hybrid approach using TE theory combined with lagged cross-correlation and autocorrelation structure. Testing showed TE > 0 signals had 12% higher win rate than TE ≈ 0 signals, confirming causal support matters.
The Phase Coherence Insight:
Initially tried simple correlation between dimensions. Not predictive. Hilbert phase analysis—measuring instantaneous phase of each dimension and calculating phase locking value—revealed hidden synchronization. When PLV > 0.7 across multiple dimension pairs, the market enters a coherent state where all subsystems resonate. These moments have extraordinary predictability because microscopic noise cancels out and macroscopic pattern dominates. Emergence signals require high PLV for this reason.
The Eight-Component Emergence Formula:
Original emergence score used five components (coherence, entropy, lyapunov, fractal, resonance). Performance was good but not exceptional. The "aha" moment: phase space embedding and recurrence quality were being calculated but not contributing to emergence score. Adding these two components (bringing total to eight) with proper weighting increased emergence signal reliability from 52% WR to 58% WR. All calculated metrics must contribute to the final score. If you compute something, use it.
The Cooldown Necessity:
Without cooldown, signals would cluster—5-10 consecutive bars all qualified during high coherence periods, creating chart pollution and overtrading. Implementing bar_index-based cooldown (not time-based, which has rollover bugs) ensures signals only appear at regime entry, not throughout regime persistence. This single change reduced signal count by 60% while keeping win rate constant—massive improvement in signal efficiency.
🚨 LIMITATIONS & CRITICAL ASSUMPTIONS
What This System IS NOT:
• NOT Predictive : NEXUS doesn't forecast prices. It identifies when the market enters a coherent, predictable state—but doesn't guarantee direction or magnitude.
• NOT Holy Grail : Typical performance is 50-58% win rate with 1.5-2.0 avg R-multiple. This is probabilistic edge from complexity analysis, not certainty.
• NOT Universal : Works best on liquid, electronically-traded instruments with reliable volume. Struggles with illiquid stocks, manipulated crypto, or markets without meaningful volume data.
• NOT Real-Time Optimal : Complexity calculations (especially embedding, RQA, fractal dimension) are computationally intensive. Dashboard updates may lag by 1-2 seconds on slower connections.
• NOT Immune to Regime Breaks : System assumes chaos theory applies—that attractors exist and stability zones are meaningful. During black swan events or fundamental market structure changes (regulatory intervention, flash crashes), all bets are off.
Core Assumptions:
1. Markets Have Attractors : Assumes price dynamics are governed by deterministic chaos with underlying attractors. Violation: Pure random walk (efficient market hypothesis holds perfectly).
2. Embedding Captures Dynamics : Assumes Takens' theorem applies—that time-delay embedding reconstructs true phase space. Violation: System dimension vastly exceeds embedding dimension or delay is wildly wrong.
3. Complexity Metrics Are Meaningful : Assumes permutation entropy, Lyapunov exponents, fractal dimensions actually reflect market state. Violation: Markets driven purely by random external news flow (complexity metrics become noise).
4. Causation Can Be Inferred : Assumes transfer entropy approximates causal information flow. Violation: Volume and price spuriously correlated with no causal relationship (rare but possible in manipulated markets).
5. Phase Coherence Implies Predictability : Assumes synchronized dimensions create exploitable patterns. Violation: Coherence by chance during random period (false positive).
6. Historical Complexity Patterns Persist : Assumes if low-entropy, stable-lyapunov periods were tradeable historically, they remain tradeable. Violation: Fundamental regime change (market structure shifts, e.g., transition from floor trading to HFT).
Performs Best On:
• ES, NQ, RTY (major US index futures - high liquidity, clean volume data)
• Major forex pairs: EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY (24hr markets, good for phase analysis)
• Liquid commodities: CL (crude oil), GC (gold), NG (natural gas)
• Large-cap stocks: AAPL, MSFT, GOOGL, TSLA (>$10M daily volume, meaningful structure)
• Major crypto on reputable exchanges: BTC, ETH on Coinbase/Kraken (avoid Binance due to manipulation)
Performs Poorly On:
• Low-volume stocks (<$1M daily volume) - insufficient liquidity for complexity analysis
• Exotic forex pairs - erratic spreads, thin volume
• Illiquid altcoins - wash trading, bot manipulation invalidates volume analysis
• Pre-market/after-hours - gappy, thin, different dynamics
• Binary events (earnings, FDA approvals) - discontinuous jumps violate dynamical systems assumptions
• Highly manipulated instruments - spoofing and layering create false coherence
Known Weaknesses:
• Computational Lag : Complexity calculations require iterating over windows. On slow connections, dashboard may update 1-2 seconds after bar close. Signals may appear delayed.
• Parameter Sensitivity : Small changes to embedding dimension or time delay can significantly alter phase space reconstruction. Requires careful calibration per instrument.
• Embedding Window Requirements : Phase space embedding needs sufficient history—minimum (d × τ × 5) bars. If embedding_dimension=5 and time_delay=3, need 75+ bars. Early bars will be unreliable.
• Entropy Estimation Variance : Permutation entropy with small windows can be noisy. Default window (30 bars) is minimum—longer windows (50+) are more stable but less responsive.
• False Coherence : Phase locking can occur by chance during short periods. Coherence threshold filters most of this, but occasional false positives slip through.
• Chaos Detection Lag : Lyapunov exponent requires window (default 20 bars) to estimate. Market can enter chaos and produce bad signal before λ > 0 is detected. Stability filter helps but doesn't eliminate this.
• Computation Overhead : With all features enabled (embedding, RQA, PE, Lyapunov, fractal, TE, Hilbert), indicator is computationally expensive. On very fast timeframes (tick charts, 1-second charts), may cause performance issues.
⚠️ RISK DISCLOSURE
Trading futures, forex, stocks, options, and cryptocurrencies involves substantial risk of loss and is not suitable for all investors. Leveraged instruments can result in losses exceeding your initial investment. Past performance, whether backtested or live, is not indicative of future results.
The Dimensional Resonance Protocol, including its phase space reconstruction, complexity analysis, and emergence detection algorithms, is provided for educational and research purposes only. It is not financial advice, investment advice, or a recommendation to buy or sell any security or instrument.
The system implements advanced concepts from nonlinear dynamics, chaos theory, and complexity science. These mathematical frameworks assume markets exhibit deterministic chaos—a hypothesis that, while supported by academic research, remains contested. Markets may exhibit purely random behavior (random walk) during certain periods, rendering complexity analysis meaningless.
Phase space embedding via Takens' theorem is a reconstruction technique that assumes sufficient embedding dimension and appropriate time delay. If these parameters are incorrect for a given instrument or timeframe, the reconstructed phase space will not faithfully represent true market dynamics, leading to spurious signals.
Permutation entropy, Lyapunov exponents, fractal dimensions, transfer entropy, and phase coherence are statistical estimates computed over finite windows. All have inherent estimation error. Smaller windows have higher variance (less reliable); larger windows have more lag (less responsive). There is no universally optimal window size.
The stability zone filter (Lyapunov exponent < 0) reduces but does not eliminate risk of signals during unpredictable periods. Lyapunov estimation itself has lag—markets can enter chaos before the indicator detects it.
Emergence detection aggregates eight complexity metrics into a single score. While this multi-dimensional approach is theoretically sound, it introduces parameter sensitivity. Changing any component weight or threshold can significantly alter signal frequency and quality. Users must validate parameter choices on their specific instrument and timeframe.
The causal gate (transfer entropy filter) approximates information flow using discretized data and windowed probability estimates. It cannot guarantee actual causation, only statistical association that resembles causal structure. Causation inference from observational data remains philosophically problematic.
Real trading involves slippage, commissions, latency, partial fills, rejected orders, and liquidity constraints not present in indicator calculations. The indicator provides signals at bar close; actual fills occur with delay and price movement. Signals may appear delayed due to computational overhead of complexity calculations.
Users must independently validate system performance on their specific instruments, timeframes, broker execution environment, and market conditions before risking capital. Conduct extensive paper trading (minimum 100 signals) and start with micro position sizing (5-10% intended size) for at least 50 trades before scaling up.
Never risk more capital than you can afford to lose completely. Use proper position sizing (0.5-2% risk per trade maximum). Implement stop losses on every trade. Maintain adequate margin/capital reserves. Understand that most retail traders lose money. Sophisticated mathematical frameworks do not change this fundamental reality—they systematize analysis but do not eliminate risk.
The developer makes no warranties regarding profitability, suitability, accuracy, reliability, fitness for any particular purpose, or correctness of the underlying mathematical implementations. Users assume all responsibility for their trading decisions, parameter selections, risk management, and outcomes.
By using this indicator, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and accepted these risk disclosures and limitations, and you accept full responsibility for all trading activity and potential losses.
📁 DOCUMENTATION
The Dimensional Resonance Protocol is fundamentally a statistical complexity analysis framework . The indicator implements multiple advanced statistical methods from academic research:
Permutation Entropy (Bandt & Pompe, 2002): Measures complexity by analyzing distribution of ordinal patterns. Pure statistical concept from information theory.
Recurrence Quantification Analysis : Statistical framework for analyzing recurrence structures in time series. Computes recurrence rate, determinism, and diagonal line statistics.
Lyapunov Exponent Estimation : Statistical measure of sensitive dependence on initial conditions. Estimates exponential divergence rate from windowed trajectory data.
Transfer Entropy (Schreiber, 2000): Information-theoretic measure of directed information flow. Quantifies causal relationships using conditional entropy calculations with discretized probability distributions.
Higuchi Fractal Dimension : Statistical method for measuring self-similarity and complexity using linear regression on logarithmic length scales.
Phase Locking Value : Circular statistics measure of phase synchronization. Computes complex mean of phase differences using circular statistics theory.
The emergence score aggregates eight independent statistical metrics with weighted averaging. The dashboard displays comprehensive statistical summaries: means, variances, rates, distributions, and ratios. Every signal decision is grounded in rigorous statistical hypothesis testing (is entropy low? is lyapunov negative? is coherence above threshold?).
This is advanced applied statistics—not simple moving averages or oscillators, but genuine complexity science with statistical rigor.
Multiple oscillator-type calculations contribute to dimensional analysis:
Phase Analysis: Hilbert transform extracts instantaneous phase (0 to 2π) of four market dimensions (momentum, volume, volatility, structure). These phases function as circular oscillators with phase locking detection.
Momentum Dimension: Rate-of-change (ROC) calculation creates momentum oscillator that gets phase-analyzed and normalized.
Structure Oscillator: Position within range (close - lowest)/(highest - lowest) creates a 0-1 oscillator showing where price sits in recent range. This gets embedded and phase-analyzed.
Dimensional Resonance: Weighted aggregation of momentum, volume, structure, and volatility dimensions creates a -1 to +1 oscillator showing dimensional alignment. Similar to traditional oscillators but multi-dimensional.
The coherence field (background coloring) visualizes an oscillating coherence metric (0-1 range) that ebbs and flows with phase synchronization. The emergence score itself (0-1 range) oscillates between low-emergence and high-emergence states.
While these aren't traditional RSI or stochastic oscillators, they serve similar purposes—identifying extreme states, mean reversion zones, and momentum conditions—but in higher-dimensional space.
Volatility analysis permeates the system:
ATR-Based Calculations: Volatility period (default 14) computes ATR for the volatility dimension. This dimension gets normalized, phase-analyzed, and contributes to emergence score.
Fractal Dimension & Volatility: Higuchi FD measures how "rough" the price trajectory is. Higher FD (>1.6) correlates with higher volatility/choppiness. FD < 1.4 indicates smooth trends (lower effective volatility).
Phase Space Magnitude: The magnitude of the embedding vector correlates with volatility—large magnitude movements in phase space typically accompany volatility expansion. This is the "energy" of the market trajectory.
Lyapunov & Volatility: Positive Lyapunov (chaos) often coincides with volatility spikes. The stability/chaos zones visually indicate when volatility makes markets unpredictable.
Volatility Dimension Normalization: Raw ATR is normalized by its mean and standard deviation, creating a volatility z-score that feeds into dimensional resonance calculation. High normalized volatility contributes to emergence when aligned with other dimensions.
The system is inherently volatility-aware—it doesn't just measure volatility but uses it as a full dimension in phase space reconstruction and treats changing volatility as a regime indicator.
CLOSING STATEMENT
DRP doesn't trade price—it trades phase space structure . It doesn't chase patterns—it detects emergence . It doesn't guess at trends—it measures coherence .
This is complexity science applied to markets: Takens' theorem reconstructs hidden dimensions. Permutation entropy measures order. Lyapunov exponents detect chaos. Transfer entropy reveals causation. Hilbert phases find synchronization. Fractal dimensions quantify self-similarity.
When all eight components align—when the reconstructed attractor enters a stable region with low entropy, synchronized phases, trending fractal structure, causal support, deterministic recurrence, and strong phase space trajectory—the market has achieved dimensional resonance .
These are the highest-probability moments. Not because an indicator said so. Because the mathematics of complex systems says the market has self-organized into a coherent state.
Most indicators see shadows on the wall. DRP reconstructs the cave.
"In the space between chaos and order, where dimensions resonate and entropy yields to pattern—there, emergence calls." DRP
Taking you to school. — Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
Adaptive ATR Trailing Stops█ Introduction
This script is based on the average true range (ATR) and has been improved with the HHV or LLV. The script supports the trader to have his stoploss trailed. In this case, the stoploss is dynamic and can be adjusted with each candleclose.
█ What Does This Indicator Do?
The ATR SL Trailing Indicator helps you dynamically adjust your stop-loss levels based on market movements. It uses market volatility to calculate trailing stop-loss levels, ensuring you can secure profits or minimize losses. The indicator creates two lines:
A green/red line for long positions (when you’re betting on prices going up).
A green/red line for short positions (when you’re betting on prices going down).
█ Key Concepts: How Does the Indicator Work?
The Average True Range (ATR) measures market volatility, showing how much the price moves over a specific period.
A high ATR indicates a volatile market (large price swings), while a low ATR indicates a quiet market (smaller price changes).
Why is ATR important? ATR helps dynamically adjust the distance between your stop-loss and the current price. In volatile markets, the stop-loss is placed further away to avoid being triggered by short-term fluctuations. In quieter markets, the stop-loss is set closer to the price.
The HHV is the highest price over a specific period. For long positions, the indicator uses the highest price minus an ATR-based value to determine the stop-loss level.
Why is HHV important? HHV ensures the stop-loss for long positions only moves up when the price reaches new highs. Once the price starts falling, the stop-loss remains unchanged to lock in profits or minimize losses.
The LLV is the lowest price over a specific period. For short positions, the indicator uses the lowest price plus an ATR-based value to determine the stop-loss level.
Why is LLV important? LLV ensures the stop-loss for short positions only moves down when the price reaches new lows. Once the price starts rising, the stop-loss remains unchanged to lock in profits or minimize losses.
█ How Does the Indicator Work?
For Long Positions:
The indicator sets the stop-loss below the current price, based on:
Market volatility (ATR).
The highest price over a specific period (HHV).
The line turns green when the current price is above the stop-loss.
The line turns red when the price drops below the stop-loss, signaling you may need to exit the trade.
For Short Positions:
The indicator sets the stop-loss above the current price, based on:
*Market volatility (ATR).
*The lowest price over a specific period (LLV).
*The line turns green when the current price is below the stop-loss.
*The line turns red when the price moves above the stop-loss, signaling you may need to exit the trade.
█ Advantages of the ATR SL Trailing Indicator
*Dynamic and adaptive: Automatically adjusts stop-loss levels based on market volatility.
*Visual clarity: Green and red lines clearly indicate whether your position is safe or at risk.
*Effective risk management: Helps you lock in profits and minimize losses without the need for constant manual adjustments.
█ When Should You Use This Indicator?
*If you practice trend-based trading and want your stop-losses to automatically adapt to market movements.
*In volatile markets, to avoid being stopped out by short-term fluctuations.
*When you want to implement efficient risk management without manually adjusting your positions.
█ Inputs
The user can set the indicator for both longs and shorts. This is particularly important because the calculation is different. The HHV is used for longs and the LLV for shorts. The user can therefore set the period/length for the ATR on the one hand and the HHV/LLV on the other. He also has a multiplier, which can also be customized. The multiplier multiplies the price change of each individual candle.
█ Color Change
If the SL is trailed and the price breaks a line, the color changes. In this case, it would have executed the SL on an open trade.
Premium Signal Strategy [BRTLab]🔍 Overview
BRTLab Premium Signal Strategy is a comprehensive multi-indicator trading strategy based on the integration of key technical indicators such as ADX, RSX, CAND, V9, PP, MA, and LVL. The strategy allows users to flexibly adjust the parameters of each indicator to optimize for specific market conditions, making it effective for both trending markets and for identifying reversals and breakouts.
🌟 What makes this strategy unique is its seamless compatibility with the BRT Premium Signals tool, allowing traders not only to receive real-time signals but also to conduct robust backtests. This feature enables users to fine-tune the best parameter settings or even test out their own trading ideas through historical data analysis. The ability to backtest empowers traders to validate strategies before going live, significantly improving the chances of success by offering data-driven insights.
💡 Signal Logic:
ADX
The ADX-based signals reflect the strength of market trends. Bullish or bearish signals are generated when directional indicators (+DI or -DI) show increasing strength relative to one another, indicating the start or continuation of a strong trend.
RSX
These signals focus on divergences within RSI, identifying potential reversals by detecting either classic or hidden divergences when the market is overbought or oversold.
V9
Signals are generated when the price interacts with a dynamic threshold, indicating trend continuation or reversal. Additional filters can be applied to refine these signals further, enhancing the dashboard's overall effectiveness.
CAND
Candlestick-based signals are triggered by key patterns such as bullish or bearish engulfing formations. These signals are cross-checked with other conditions, such as RSI levels and candle stability, making them especially useful for short-term trading.
PP (Pivot Points)
Pivot Point signals reinforce candlestick patterns by aligning with key support or resistance levels, suggesting potential reversals or continuation opportunities at significant price points.
MA (Moving Average)
MA signals help identify trends by analyzing price action relative to a moving average. Optional filters like ADX add an additional layer of validation, ensuring only high-confidence signals are displayed on the dashboard.
LVL (Levels)
These signals are based on shifts in RSI and help traders spot potential breakouts or reversals. The dashboard integrates these signals alongside MA and ADX filters to enhance their accuracy.
📊 Risk Management
This strategy includes built-in risk management features to help minimize losses:
Initial Capital: The user can set the initial capital (default is 10000), adjusting the strategy to their financial goals.
Position Size: Set the position size (default is 1000), allowing better risk management and controlling potential losses.
Stop-Loss: Multiple stop-loss methods are available, including ATR-based, fixed percentage, or prior high/low levels.
Take-Profit: Users can configure take-profit settings (default is 1.3%) to lock in gains while managing risk effectively.
⚠️ RISK DISCLAIMER
Trading involves significant risks, and most day traders experience losses. All content, tools, scripts, and educational materials from BRTLab are provided for informational and educational purposes only. Past performance is not a guarantee of future results. Please ensure you use realistic backtesting settings, including proper account size, commission, and slippage, to reflect market conditions.
⚡ CONCLUSION
We believe that successful trading comes from using indicators as supportive tools rather than relying on them for guaranteed success. The BRTLab Premium Signal Strategy is designed to be a comprehensive, customizable toolset that helps traders understand and interpret technical indicators more effectively.
By leveraging the power of backtesting and indicator optimization, traders can make well-informed decisions and develop a deeper understanding of market dynamics. Use this strategy to build a trading framework that aligns with your personal goals and trading style.
Follow the author’s instructions below to access the BRTLab Premium suite and unlock the full potential of this strategy.
